Home

Cadillac 2007 DTS Automobile User Manual

1. eens 4 19 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out 4 26 VA Ta TS iciscseteescevesi ee t a a PaE 4 22 Dual Climate Control System Gu u ssseeeeeereee 3 48 EDR cierre paar e E EER TEESE 7 16 Electrical System Add On Equipment 0cceeeeeeeeeneeeeeneees 5 116 Fuses and Circuit Breakers n se 5 117 Headlamp Wiring 555 orne er eiiiai anan 5 117 Power Windows and Other Power Options 5 117 Rear Underseat Fuse Block eee 5 121 Underhood Fuse Block eeeeeeeneeeee ees 5 118 Windshield Wiper Fuses eeeeeeeeee ee 5 117 Engine Air Cleaner Filter ccccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 5 23 Check and Service Engine Soon Light 3 68 GOOIAMAL SEE Ear a E E 5 25 Goolant Heater si scsieeci niche deeliteien 2 31 Coolant Temperature Gage cceeeeeeeeee ee 3 67 Coolant Temperature Warning Light 3 66 Drive Belt Routing ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 16 Engine Compartment Overview 5 11 Exhaust enade E E 2 38 Oea a r E S 5 18 Oil Life System 25 saas dab burcuna 5 21 Overheated Protection Operating Mode 5 31 Overheating sonscrsneca ele aaie 5 29 Running While Parked iaccess 2 39 SLAMING esie ae E Ea 2 29 Engine cont Enhanced StabiliTrak ccccceeeessseeeeeeeeeeees 4 9 Entry SIG AGE 2 48esnsesisvev oe E NE 3 41 Event Data Recorders 0 0 00 ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee teens 7 16 Ex
2. seseceeeeeeeeeeeees 5 80 When It Is Time for New Tires 000 5 75 Winter MES aars aan enaena innan 5 58 Towing Recreational Vehicle eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 31 Towing a Trailer c eeeeeeteeeeeeeee ees 4 34 4 40 Your Vehicle 2 52 anse sed ewes neta 4 31 Traction Control System TCS G u s sssseeeeeere reen rener 4 6 Control System Warning Light 3 65 Enhanced StabiliTrak ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 9 Limited Slip Rear Axle cceeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee es 4 8 Magnetic Ride Control ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 8 StabiliTrak System cccccceesesseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 8 Transmission Fluid Automatic cccccec cece eee eeeeeeeeenees 5 25 Transmission Operation Automatic 5 2 32 TUNK rererere eroaan EE kone 2 16 Turn and Lane Change Signals 0 ceeeeeees 3 8 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever ceeeeeeeeeee ee 3 8 Twilight Sentinel osoei 3 39 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA 2 45 Uniform Tire Quality Grading eeeeeeeeeeees 5 79 Universal Home Remote System 0eeeeees 2 51 BOT STENO REE fenced otoasacicidadecerieuanesh ae ascetes 2 52 Using this Manual s cnceccccncneweeteienannteadieesaecsnanndente ili Valet Lockout Switch c c ecceceeeeeeeeeee tees 2 25 Vehicle Contor ee RS EEN ERE SE DE SEERE ER ERNA SEES SES ENDERNE 4 3 Damage Warn
3. cceeeeeeeeeeees 5 68 Highway Hypnos Sesera 4 20 Hill and Mountain Roads ee 4 21 Hood Checking Things Under W W W sseeeereeeerernee 5 10 REIESE i cantectncnateat eewupadehaecsecistenean anand 5 10 RON ree ere a EEE EE EEEE 3 6 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 13 Ignition POSITIONS s re tea cdelieecers 2 28 IMMODINZEN sss ae se renere 2 26 Immobilizer Operation cece ceeeeeeeee nee eee eters 2 26 Inadvertent Power Battery Saver 1 3 43 Infants and Young Children Restraints 1 30 Inflation Tire Pressure cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 66 Inflator Kit Tire ccc ccc ec eee eee ee eeeeeeneeeeennenees 5 87 Instrument Panel Overview se25vcece4 d8eecbel E E T 3 4 Instrument Panel I P Brightness iiiaio naas 3 41 CUSE Ps x ss a a E 3 58 JUMP Starting ercsi aiaa aaa 5 45 Keyless Access System W W sssseeeerererenee kernens 2 5 Keyless Access System Operation 2 6 KEYS ianea a reen EE 2 3 Labeling Tire Sidewall Exterior Lighting Battery Saver Inadvertent Power Battery Saver Twilight Sentinel Lane Departure Warning Lane Departure Warning Light Lap Shoulder Belt LATCH System Child Restraints Lifting Your Vehicle Tires Airbag Readiness Antilock Brake System Warning Brake System Warning Charging System Cruise Control Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Lane Departure Warning Lights On Reminde
4. Do you have the proper towing equipment See your dealer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations ls your vehicle ready to be towed Just as you would prepare your vehicle for a long trip you will want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be towed See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on page 4 20 4 32 Dinghy Towing Notice If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground the drivetrain components could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four wheels on the ground If your vehicle must be towed you should use a dolly See Dolly Towing later in this section for more information Dolly Towing Rear Wheel Drive Vehicles STS Only Notice Dolly towing or dinghy towing your vehicle may cause damage because of reduced ground clearance Always tow your vehicle using the dolly towing or dinghy towing procedure listed in this section or put your vehicle on a flat bed truck ER If your vehicle is a rear wheel drive it can be towed using a dolly To tow your vehicle using a dolly follow these steps 1 Put the rear wheels on the dolly 2 Put the vehicle in PARK P 3 Set the parking brake and then remove the key 4 Clamp the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with a clamping device designed for towing
5. 5 Release the parking brake Dolly Towing STS V Notice Dolly towing or dinghy towing your vehicle may cause damage because of reduced ground clearance Always put your vehicle on a flat bed truck If you have an STS V it can only be towed on a flat bed trailer Dolly Towing All Wheel Drive Vehicles Notice Towing an all wheel drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or even with only two of its wheels on the ground will damage drivetrain components Do not tow an all wheel drive vehicle if any of its wheels will be on the ground If you have an All Wheel Drive AWD vehicle it can only be towed on a flat bed trailer 4 33 Towing a Trailer Vehicles With Heavy Duty Cooling A CAUTION If you do not use the correct equipment and drive properly you can lose control when you pull a trailer For example if the trailer is too heavy the brakes may not work well or even at all You and your passengers could be seriously injured You may also damage your vehicle the resulting repairs would not be covered by your warranty Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section Ask your dealer retailer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle Vehicles with heavy duty cooling can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the proper trailer towing equipment To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle you should read the information in Weight of
6. A CAUTION Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL N or with the ignition off is dangerous The brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down and they could get so hot that they would not work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Always have the engine running and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill Stay in your own lane Do not swing wide or cut across the center of the road Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane Top of hills Be alert something could be in your lane stalled car accident Pay attention to special road signs falling rocks area winding roads long grades passing or no passing zones and take appropriate action 4 21 Winter Driving Here are some tips for winter driving Have your vehicle in good shape for winter You might want to put winter emergency supplies in your trunk Include an ice scraper a small brush or broom a supply of windshield washer fluid a rag some winter outer clothing a small shovel a flashlight a red cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles And if you will be driving under severe conditions include a small bag of sand a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle Also see Tires on page 5 57 Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time those places where the tires meet the road probably ha
7. To insert one CD do the following 1 The ignition and the radio can be on or off 2 Press and release the load button Please Wait displays 3 Load the CD when INSERT displays insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player pulls the CD in When a CD is inserted CD displays and the number of the CD and the track number displays if the radio is on If the radio is on the CD begins to play automatically To insert multiple CDs do the following 1 The ignition and the radio can be on or off 2 Press and hold the load button for two seconds Please Wait displays and a beep sounds 3 Load the CD when INSERT displays insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player pulls the CD in Do not load a CD until INSERT displays The CD player takes up to six CDs If you want to load less than six CDs load the desired amount The CD player times out when it does not receive any more CDs and the last CD loaded begins to play Care of Your CDs If playing a CD R the sound quality can be reduced due to CD R quality the method of recording the quality of the music that has been recorded and the way the CD R has been handled Handle them carefully Store CD R s in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust The CD player scans the bottom surface of the disc If the surface of a CD is damaged such as cracked broken or scratched the CD does not play prope
8. sssssssseeeeeeeee 2 15 Shifting Into PARK P cccssseeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 36 Lockout Protection 000ccccccceseeeeesseeeeeeeeees 2 16 Shifting Out of PARK P asserens 2 37 TUNK czas sense DRE SE SEE SEERE a reai 2 16 Parking Over Things That Burn 2 38 Windows 2 19 Engine IEXNAUSE e rscccensonbitiee a E 2 38 Power Windows ccceceeeceeeeee seen eeeeneeeeees 2 20 Huang the Engine ME Parked saistiits 233 S n VIS OS icdeicicccertocmscmatericearecageseeandeaeaceaeeedias 2 22 Porn eee Minor mite ED tie aaa 2 40 antes Systems Elen Gsals ET 2 22 with Intellibeam and OnStar ee 2 40 e t eterrent System eee eee eee essensen 2 22 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror PERR B RE RER SEE Or 2 40 Valet Lockout SWITCH 2 raader 2 25 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror IMMODINZE sererai EA 2 26 with OnStar 2 40 Immobilizer Operation sussie Eee 2 26 ia 2 1 Section 2 Features and Controls Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar and Compass seere Outside Power Heated Mirrors 0 eeeeeeees Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror 0 Outside Convex Mirror c ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Outside Parallel Park Assist Mirror 00 Object Detection Systems cee Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA Side Blind Zone Alert cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Lane Departure Warning seeeeeeeeeeee ees OnStar System ccc cece ee eeeeeeeee
9. Accessories and Modifications When non dealer non retailer accessories are added to your vehicle they can affect your vehicle s performance and safety including such things as airbags braking stability ride and handling emissions systems aerodynamics durability and electronic systems like antilock brakes traction control and stability control Some of these accessories could even cause malfunction or damage not covered by warranty GM Accessories are designed to complement and function with other systems on your vehicle Your GM dealer retailer can accessorize your vehicle using genuine GM Accessories When you go to your GM dealer retailer and ask for GM Accessories you will know that GM trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine GM Accessories Also see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 65 California Proposition 65 Warning Most motor vehicles including this one contain and or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm Engine exhaust many parts and systems including some inside the vehicle many fluids and some component wear by products contain and or emit these chemicals 5 3 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements Certain types of automotive applications such as airbag initiators seat belt pretensioners and lithium batteries contained in remote keyless entry transmitt
10. The shoulder belt is worn under the arm It should be worn over the shoulder at all times Q What is wrong with this A CAUTION You can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap shoulder belt properly In a crash you would not be restrained by the shoulder belt Your body could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury You might also slide under the lap belt The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest A The belt is behind the body 1 19 Q What is wrong with this A CAUTION You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt F an In a crash you would not have the full width of pres S the belt to spread impact forces If a belt is V BAN R twisted make it straight so it can work RS SS YL properly or ask your dealer retailer to fix it oh e gt SS RSS gt X 4S x CA mT Ne 1 lt lt aN 7 gt s 5 lt ss gt D K WE H yn Zs NS A Sa WAD The belt is twisted across the body Lap Shoulder Belt All seating positions in your vehicle have a lap shoulder belt Here is how to wear a lap shoulder belt properly 1 2 Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight To see how see Seats in the Index Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Do not let i
11. Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 3 57 Cruise Control Light c ceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 72 Instrument Panel Cluster eeeeeeeeeeee ees 3 58 Highbeam On Light seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen reas 3 72 Speedometer and Odometer 1 3 59 Fuel Gage snaaien AEE OE 3 73 Tachometer CORRE DEERE EEE EEE EEEFEEEEELEEE 3 59 Driver Information Center DIC 0 00000 3 74 Safety Belt Reminders EEE E A 3 59 DIC Operation and Displays cccecceeeeeeeeees 3 74 Airbag Readiness Light feet e eee e renee 3 60 DIC Warnings and Messages ccsceeeeeeeee 3 80 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 3 61 Other Messages eisrean 3 97 Charging System Light W u ssseeeerereeeereeee 3 63 Brake System Warning Light ceeee 3 64 sae oe Caa terse y ents witty ae Antilock Brake System Warning Light 3 65 a MPS D SEERE FEE EEK ERE ES 3 100 Traction Control System TCS lane anes EEN REE ESS e Warning Light asesiad uasin cade nes nnnaee weetie 3 65 Reaver g eet nage apg ean ee i RE aee XM Radio Messages eee eee eee eee eee ee teen ees 11 Lane Departure Warning Light settee rererere 3 66 a e Rk z 1 i Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light 3 66 R die p li ig fb tet ey vee av ge 3 117 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage 3 67 adio Personalization ceeeeeeeeeeee eee ees Theft Deterrent Fea
12. When the safety belt is unbuckled or when the vehicle is turned off the tension reducer will deactivate The belt should go back out of the way 1 22 To unlatch the belt just push the button on the buckle Before you close a door be sure the belt is out of the way If you slam the door on it you can damage both the belt and your vehicle Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster Your vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the driver and right front passenger Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on your shoulder The belt should be away from your face and neck but not falling off your shoulder Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash To move it down press the release button A and move the height adjuster to the desired position You can move the height adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide After you move the height adjuster to where you want it try to move it down without pressing the release button to make sure it has locked into position Safety Belt Pretensioners Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front outboard occupants Although you cannot see them they are part of the safety belt assembly They help tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal and near frontal cra
13. You can turn off the alarm by pressing the unlock button on the keyless access transmitter or by starting the car If the alarm does not sound when it should check to see if the horn works The horn fuse may be blown To replace the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5 117 If the fuse does not need to be replaced you may need to have your vehicle serviced To reduce the possibility of theft always arm the Theft Deterrent system when leaving your vehicle Do not leave the key or device that disarms or deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle Valet Lockout Switch The valet lockout switch is located inside the glove box O Off Press O to turn the lockout feature off When the lockout feature is off you can open the trunk using either the keyless access transmitter or the trunk release button located on the driver s door On Press to turn the lockout feature on When the lockout feature is turned on the trunk cannot be unlocked with the keyless access transmitter or the trunk release button located on the driver s door If the valet lockout feature is on it will also disable the remote start feature and the Universal Home Remote transmitter if equipped Locking the glove box with your key will also help to secure your vehicle See Keyless Access System Operation on page 2 6 and Trunk on page 2 16 for additional information 2 25 Immobilizer This device complies with Part 15 o
14. but all items over the maximum are ignored Root Directory The root directory is treated as a folder If the root directory has compressed audio files the directory is displayed as F1 ROOT All files contained directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any root directory folders However playlists Px are always accessed before root folders or files Empty Directory or Folder If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the file structure that contains only folders subfolders and no compressed files directly beneath them the player advances to the next folder in the file structure that contains compressed audio files The empty folder is not displayed No Folder When the CD contains only compressed files the files are located under the root folder The next and previous folder functions do not function on a CD that was recorded without folders or playlists When displaying the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT When the CD contains only playlists and compressed audio files but no folders all files are located under the root folder The folder down and the folder up buttons search playlists Px first and then go to the root folder When the radio displays the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT Order of Play Tracks are played in the following order Play begins from the first track in the first playlist and continues sequentially through all tracks in each playlist When the la
15. 0 cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 37 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 44 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position eeeeeeeeee 1 47 Airbag System cece eeeee renerne renerne 1 51 Where Are the Airbags cceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 53 When Should an Airbag Inflate 1 56 What Makes an Airbag Inflate e 1 57 How Does an Airbag Restrain eee 1 58 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates 1 58 Passenger Sensing System seeeeeeeeeees 1 60 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 1 64 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped VONICIG eeraa aA E REAS 1 65 Restraint System Check 1 1 66 Checking the Restraint Systems 1 66 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash un Ed askese 1 67 1 1 Front Seats Power Seats The power seat controls are located on the To adjust the seat Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the horizontal control forward or rearward Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by moving the front of the horizontal control up or down Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by moving the rear of the horizontal control up or down Use the vertical control to recline the seatback See Power Reclining Seatbacks on page 1 4 If your vehicle has the memory feature you can program
16. A B Underhood Fuse Block See Underhood Fuse Block on page 5 118 Remote Positive Terminal See Jump Starting on page 5 45 Remote Negative Terminal See Jump Starting on page 5 45 Battery See Battery on page 5 44 Passenger Compartment Air Filter See Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3 55 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir See Adding Washer Fluid under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 40 Intercooler System Pressure Cap See Engine Coolant on page 5 25 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir See Power Steering Fluid on page 5 39 Engine Oil Fill Cap See When to Add Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 18 J K L M Engine Oil Dipstick Out of View See Checking Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 18 Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir See Brake Fluid under Brakes on page 5 41 Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap See Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5 29 and Cooling System on page 5 32 Engine Air Cleaner Filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 23 If your vehicle is equipped with front compartment underhood sight shields before closing the hood be sure to reinstall the sight shields To reinstall the shields locate the tabs on the left and right sides and insert them into the openings in the tower to tower brace Then insert the fasteners into the top of the shield and push the fasteners back into place Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil
17. A few crashes are mild and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person would not survive But most crashes are in between In many of them people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles the facts are clear In most crashes buckling up does matter a lot Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything you go as fast as it goes Put someone on it Take the simplest vehicle Suppose it is just a seat on wheels Get it up to speed Then stop the vehicle The rider does not stop The person keeps going until stopped by something In a real vehicle it could be the windshield or the instrument panel or the safety belts With safety belts you slow down as the vehicle does You get more time to stop You stop over more distance and your strongest bones take the forces That is why safety belts make such good sense Questions and Answers About Safety Belts Q A er Q Will be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if am wearing a safety belt You could be whether you are wearing a safety belt or not But your chance of being conscious during and after an accident so you can unbuckle and get out is much greater if you are belted And you can unbuckle a safety belt even if you are upside down If my vehicle has airbags why should I ha
18. FM stereo gives the best sound but FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles 16 to 65 km Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals causing the sound to fade in and out XM Satellite Radio Service XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception from coast to coast in the 48 contiguous United States and in Canada Just as with FM tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals causing the sound to fade in and out In addition traveling or standing under heavy foliage bridges garages or through tunnels could cause loss of the XM signal for a period of time The radio may display NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference 3 123 Backglass Antenna The AM FM antenna is integrated with the rear window defogger located in the rear window Make sure that the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched and that the grid lines on the glass are not damaged If the inside surface is damaged it could interfere with radio reception Notice Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside rear window may damage the rear window antenna and or the rear window defogger Repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not clear the inside rear window with sharp objects Notice Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with metallic film The metallic film in some tinting materials will interfere with or distort the incoming radio reception Any damage caused to your backg
19. The fog lamp light will come on when the fog lamps are in use The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off See Fog Lamps on page 3 39 for more information Lights On Reminder This light comes on whenever the parking lamps are on See Headlamps on Reminder on page 3 37 for more information 3 72 Cruise Control Light This light comes on y whenever you set your cruise control The light will go out when the cruise control is turned off See Cruise Control on page 3 17 and Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3 20 for more information Highbeam On Light This light comes on when the high beam headlamps are in use See Headlamp High Low Beam Changer on page 3 9 for more information Fuel Gage All of the following situations are normal and do not indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage The fuel gage shows At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before approximately how much the gage reads full ecco The gage may change when you turn stop quickly Ps the engine is on or accelerate quickly It takes a little more or less fuel to fill the tank than Q the gage indicated For example the gage may ERR have indicated that the tank was half full but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank s capacity to fill the tank If the fuel supply gets low the FUEL LEVEL LOW message will appear on the Driver Information Center DIC and a single chime will sound See DIC W
20. To set this feature to LOCAL or DISTANT perform the following steps 1 Press the knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn this knob until SEEK LOCAL or SEEK DISTANT displays 3 Press the same knob to select either LOCAL or DISTANT 4 Press the BACK F6 button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the BACK F6 button or wait for the display to time out To search for stations press either CI seek arrow If the system is set to LOCAL SEEK displays and seeks to stations only with strong signals If the system is set to DISTANT D SEEK displays and seeks to stations with weak and strong signals This feature does not function with the XM radio stations i Information Press this button while in XM mode to retrieve three different categories of information related to the current song or channel Artist Song Title Category or PTY To view this information perform the following 1 Press the knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn this knob until INFO displays 3 Press the same knob to select INFO The display changes to show the additional XM information 3 102 4 Press the BACK F6 button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the BACK F6 button or wait for the display to time out Setting Preset Stations Up to 30 stations six FM1 six FM2 and six AM six XM1 and six XM2 if equipped can be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons
21. To slow down in very small amounts briefly press the set button Each time this is done the vehicle goes about 1 mph 1 6 km h slower Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase your vehicle speed When you take your foot off the pedal the vehicle slows down to the cruise control speed you set earlier Using Cruise Control on Hills How well the cruise control works on hills depends upon the vehicle speed load and the steepness of the hills When going up steep hills you might have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle s speed When going downhill you might have to brake to keep the vehicle s speed down Applying the brake will turn off the cruise control If you need to apply the brake due to the grade of the downhill slope you might not want to attempt to use your cruise control feature Ending Cruise Control To end a cruise control session step lightly on the brake pedal Stepping on the brake pedal will end the current cruise control session only Move the cruise control switch to off to turn off the system completely Erasing Speed Memory When the cruise control or the ignition is turned off the cruise control set speed memory is erased 3 19 Adaptive Cruise Control If your vehicle has this feature be sure to read this entire section before using it The system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Com
22. W u ssseeeeeereee 2 58 GAINS TIe 5 eee iae 5 82 Charging System Light 3455435 renses innse 3 63 Check Engineclight esos nnda 3 68 Checking Things Under the Hood 5 10 Chemical Paint Spotting u sseseeeererereree 5 114 Child Restraints Child Restraint Systems ssseereeeereee 1 34 Infants and Young Children 0seeeeeeee 1 30 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children 1 37 Older Childrens arne one dede sea 1 28 Child Restraints cont Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position surrender 1 44 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position eee 1 47 Where to Put the Restraint eee 1 36 Cigarette Lighter ccceeeeeeeeeee teeter eeeeeeeeees 3 47 Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels 5 112 Exterior Lamps Lenses eeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 111 Fabric Garpet eressero ra nE 5 108 Finish Care 2222 5 111 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces siss rarmrrsmien nnn nias 5 109 IMENO eeii rna aaa E FEER 5 107 Leather saisine eaaa ns aS 5 109 Speaker Covers W W W u sssseneeeerere renere n kr nenee 5 110 HE TS hoses asc saae aa aaa a EEN 5 113 Underbody Maintenance dsseeeeeeerernere 5 114 Washing Your Vehicle 1 W sssseesereses reen 5 110 WeatherStripS ass error LEE 5 110 Windshield and Wiper Blades 1 5 112 Wood Panels vsscitisaeasdcasecnas e 5 110 Cl
23. not be visible You could forget your settings and be startled by Adaptive Cruise Conirol response and even lose control Keep your HUD on and properly adjusted when using Adaptive Cruise Control The set speed is selected by the driver This is the speed you will travel if there is no vehicle detected in your path To set Adaptive Cruise Control do the following 1 Make sure the Head Up Display HUD is on and properly adjusted You cannot engage Adaptive Cruise Control unless the HUD is on See Head Up Display HUD on page 3 43 for more information 2 Move the switch to the on position 3 Get up to the desired speed 4 Press in the set button at the end of the lever and release the button 5 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal Once Adaptive Cruise Control is set it might immediately apply the brakes if it detects a vehicle ahead that is too close or moving slower than your vehicle This symbol appears on the Head Up Display HUD to indicate that Adaptive Cruise Control is active The number indicates the set speed SET 63 0310 SET SPEED 63mPH United States version shown Canada similar See Head Up Display HUD on page 3 43 for more information Make sure the set speed is visible on the HUD so you know the speed your vehicle will accelerate to if a vehicle is not detected in your path Keep in mind speed limits surrounding traffic speeds and weather conditions when adjusting
24. 1 Unlock the door and open it from the outside 2 Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it so the slot is in the vertical position Lockout Protection Your vehicle can be programmed to sound the horn three times and unlock the driver s door when all doors are closed and there is a keyless access transmitter inside the interior of the vehicle When the driver s door is reopened the key in reminder chime will sound continuously The vehicle will remain locked only when at least one transmitter has been removed from the vehicle and both doors are closed See Vehicle Personalization on page 2 60 Trunk A CAUTION It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid open because carbon monoxide CO gas can come into your vehicle You cannot see or smell CO It can cause unconsciousness and even death If you must drive with the trunk lid open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the trunk lid Make sure all other windows are shut Turn the fan on your heating or cooling system to its highest speed and select the control setting that will force outside air into your vehicle See Climate Control System If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel open them all the way See Engine Exhaust on page 2 38 Trunk Lid Release There are three ways to open the trunk lid q Trunk Lid Release Press this button located on the driver s
25. A CAUTION A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Because there are different systems it is important to refer to the instructions that come with the restraint Make sure the child is properly secured following the instructions that came with that restraint 1 35 Where to Put the Restraint Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat We recommend that children and child restraints be secured in a rear seat including an infant or a child riding in a rear facing child restraint a child riding in a forward facing child seat an older child riding in a booster seat and children who are large enough using safety belts A label on your sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys 1 36 A CAUTION A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger s frontal airbag if the system detects a rear facing child restraint no system is fail safe and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under s
26. A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window Securing an Add On Child Restraint in the Vehicle ACAUTION A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle Make sure the child restraint is properly installed in the vehicle using the vehicle s safety belt or LATCH system following the instructions that came with that restraint and also the instructions in this manual To help reduce the chance of injury the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap shoulder belt or by the LATCH system See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 37 for more information A child can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle When securing an add on child restraint refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both and to this manual The child restraint instructions are important so if they are not available obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle even when no child is in it Securing the Child Within the Child Restraint
27. Always lock your vehicle whenever you leave it Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle Locking your doors can help prevent this from happening There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle From the outside press the lock or unlock button on the keyless access transmitter When you have your transmitter with you you may also unlock and open the door by pulling the door handle You do not have to press the unlock button on the transmitter Entry occurs when the door handle is pulled and the vehicle recognizes your transmitter See Vehicle Personalization on page 2 60 for information on how to program the keyless access feature From the inside use the power door lock switches located on each front door See Power Door Locks on page 2 14 for more information The rear passenger doors have manual door lock knobs located at the top of the door panel near the window Push down the knob to lock the door Pull up the knob to unlock the door Power Door Locks The power door lock switches are located on the front doors n Unlock Press to unlock the doors Lock Press to lock the doors Programmable Automatic Door Locks Your vehicle was programmed from the factory so that when the doors are closed the ignition is on and the shift lever is moved out of PARK P all the doors will lock The front doors can still be opened from the inside while the doors
28. If you wish to limit these types of odors manually select recirculation Your vehicle could also have a charcoal filter that can limit many odors from being pulled into your vehicle This filter needs to be changed periodically See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 The air quality sensor system does not protect against carbon monoxide CO which you cannot see or smell See Engine Exhaust on page 2 38 D Power Driver s Temperature Press the power button located on the driver s side of the climate control panel to turn the entire climate control system on or off Turn the knob to increase or decrease the temperature inside the vehicle D Power Passenger s Temperature Press the power button located on the passenger s side of the climate control panel to turn the passenger s climate control system on if they wish to have a different setting than the driver Turn the knob to increase or decrease the temperature for the front passenger Turning the passenger s side power button off will not shut off the climate control system for the passenger The system is set to the same setting as the driver Ventilated Seat Press this button to turn on the driver or passenger s side ventilated seat if the vehicle has this feature See Heated and Ventilated Seats on page 1 3 e Heated Seat Press this button to turn on the driver or passenger s side heated seat and seatback if the vehicle has this feature See Heated and
29. Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more effectively Ifthe airflow seems low when the fan speed is at the highest setting the passenger compartment air filter may need to be replaced For more information see Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3 55 3 54 Rear Climate Control System Your vehicle has a rear climate control system The base model includes air outlets in the rear of the center console for cooling and under seat air outlets for heating The temperature quantity and air delivery location is controlled automatically by the front climate control system Some vehicles are equipped with an optional climate control panel for the rear passenger located on the back of the center console The left knob controls the temperature of the air to the rear passengers Turning the knob to the left will make the air cooler Turning the knob to the right will make the air warmer The right knob controls the air delivery to the rear passengers Turning the knob all the way to the left will shut off airflow to the rear passengers Operating with the rear air delivery off may make the entire vehicle warm or cool less quickly It may also increase the air rush sound of the front system Off This is the off position 74 Vent This mode directs all the rear passenger airflow to the outlets in the console This is the normal position for cool down con
30. LATCH on page 1 37 for how to install your child restraint using LATCH If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt and it uses a top tether see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 37 for top tether anchor locations Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached 1 44 If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system you will be using the safety belt to secure the child restraint in this position Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say If you need to install more than one child restraint in the rear seat be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint on page 1 36 1 Put the child restraint on the seat 2 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how 3 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks 4 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of Make sure the release button is positioned so you the retractor to set the lock would be abl
31. Online Owner Center United States only The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership needs Specific vehicle information can be found in one place The Online Owner Center allows you to Get e mail service reminders Access information about your specific vehicle including tips and videos and an electronic version of this owner manual Keep track of your vehicle s service history and maintenance schedule Find GM dealers retailers for service nationwide Receive special promotions and privileges only available to members Refer to www MyGMLink com on the web for updated information and to register your vehicle My GM Canada Canada only My GM Canada is a password protected section of gmcanada com where you can save information on GM vehicles get personalized offers and use handy tools and forms with greater ease Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you will have access to My Showroom Find and save information on vehicles and current offers in your area My Dealers Retailers Save details such as address and phone number for each of your preferred GM Dealers or Retailers My Driveway Receive service reminders and helpful advice on owning and maintaining your vehicle My Preferences Manage your profile subscribe to E News and use tools and forms with greater ease To sign up to My GM Canada visit the My GM Canada section within www gmcanada com Custom
32. Press the same knob to set the adjustment 5 Press the BACK F6 button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the BACK F6 button or wait for the display to time out AUDIO EQUALIZER This feature lets you select customized equalization settings To choose an equalization setting EQO through EQ5 perform the following steps 1 Press the knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn this knob until EQUALIZER displays 3 Press the same knob to set the equalization setting The equalization setting displays 3 104 4 Press the BACK F6 button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the BACK F6 button or wait for the display to time out The equalization settings are preset to EQO Normal EQ1 Pop EQ2 Rock EQ3 Jazz EQ4 Talk and EQ5 Country Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade To adjust the balance or fade perform the following steps 1 Press the knob to enter the main menu Turn this knob until BASS MID TREBLE displays Press the same knob to enter the tone settings Press this knob to scroll to BALANCE or FADER Turn this knob to adjust the BALANCE to the right or the left speakers and the FADER to the front or the rear speakers Press the same knob to set the adjustment 7 Press the BACK F6 button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the BACK F6 button or wait for the display to time out E
33. STARTING DISABLED THEFT PROBLEM This message displays when incorrect conditions exist within the theft deterrent system See your dealer retailer for service 3 95 STARTING DISABLED THROTTLE PROBLEM This message displays when your vehicle s throttle system is not functioning properly Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer THEFT ATTEMPTED f This message displays if the theft deterrent system has detected a break in attempt while you were away from your vehicle This symbol appears with this message 3 96 TRACTION ACTIVE This message displays when the Traction Control System TCS is actively limiting wheel spin Slippery road conditions may exist if this message is displayed so adjust your driving accordingly The message stays on for a few seconds after the TCS stops limiting wheel spin See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 6 for more information TRANS Transmission HOT IDLE ENGINE Notice If you drive your vehicle while the transmission fluid is overheating and the transmission temperature warning is displayed on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC you can damage the transmission This could lead to costly repairs that would not be covered by your warranty Do not drive your vehicle with overheated transmission fluid or while the transmission temperature warning is displayed This message displays when the transmission fluid in your vehicle is too hot Stop the vehicle and a
34. See Keyless Access System Operation on page 2 6 for more information If any window is unable to close completely it reverses and the horn chirps See Anti Pinch Feature previously The engine must be off to operate this feature Sun Visors Swing down the visor or detach it from the center mount and move to the side to block out glare The visors also have side to side slide capability for greater coverage Pull the visor down and lift the cover Move the slide switch up or down to brighten or dim the lamp 2 22 Theft Deterrent Systems Vehicle theft is big business especially in some cities Although your vehicle has a number of theft deterrent features we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal Theft Deterrent System Your vehicle has a theft deterrent alarm system The security light is located on the instrument panel cluster f If the ignition is off and a door is open the security light will flash reminding you to arm the theft deterrent system To arm the system Press the lock button on the keyless access transmitter If the door is closed when the lock button is pressed the security light will stay illuminated for 30 seconds After the security light goes off the theft deterrent system is armed Pressing the lock button twice will arm the system immediately If the vehicle is locked using the keyless access transmitter and the trunk lid hood or a door is open or
35. and recall memory settings for seat positions See Memory Seat Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2 77 1 2 outboard side of the seats Power Lumbar On vehicles with power lumbar the control is located on the outboard sides of the front seat s To increase or decrease support press and hold the front or rear of the control To raise or lower the position of the lumbar support press and hold the top or bottom of the control Vehicles with a memory function allow seat settings to be saved and recalled See Memory Seat Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2 77 for more information Heated Seats On vehicles with heated front seats the buttons are located on the climate control panel lt amp gt sf Heated Seat and Seatback Press the up or down arrow once to turn on the heated seat at the highest or lowest setting Press the up or down arrows a second time to raise or lower the setting Keep pressing the down arrow until the indicator on the climate control display is off to turn off the heated seat A light bar in the climate control display shows the setting high medium or low The longest bar shows the high range and the shortest bar shows the low range The heated seat will automatically shut off when the vehicle is turned off Heated and Ventilated Seats On vehicles with heated and ventilated front seats the buttons are located on the climate control panel s Heated Seat and Sea
36. announcement broadcast capability TA Traffic Announcement If TA displays the tuned radio station broadcasts traffic announcements and when a traffic announcement comes on the tuned station you will hear it If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements when TA is turned on it seeks to a station that does When a station that broadcasts traffic announcements is found the radio stops seeking and TA displays If no station is found that broadcasts traffic announcements No Traffic displays 3 105 The radio plays traffic announcements if the volume is low The radio interrupts the play of a CD if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements To turn TA on or off perform the following steps 1 Press the knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn this knob until TRAFFIC ANNOUNCE displays 3 Press the same knob to select ON or OFF An X appears in the box when ON is selected 4 Press the BACK F6 button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the BACK F6 button or wait for the display to time out Activating Program Type PTY Stations RDS and XM PTY lets you search for stations with specific types of music The selectable PTYs are POP EASY TALK CNTRY Country CLASS Classical and JAZZ To activate program types perform the following steps 1 Press the knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn this knob until PROGRAM TYPE MODE displays 3 Press the
37. by performing the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press BAND to select FM1 FM2 or AM or XM1 or XM2 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons for two seconds until a beep sounds The set preset station number displays above the set pushbutton When that numbered pushbutton is pressed for less than two seconds the station that was set returns 5 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton To set the preset stations with an equalization setting DSP setting or a PTY program type setting see each of these features later in this section When a preset station is selected once one of these additional settings is selected the preset station remembers each setting and it remains active until the setting is selected off for that preset station AUTOSTORE PRESETS To set the preset stations automatically perform the following steps 1 Turn the radio on Press BAND to select FM1 FM2 or AM 2 3 Press the knob to enter the main menu 4 Turn this knob until AUTOSTORE PRESETS displays 5 Press the same knob to select AUTOSTORE displays The radio automatically searches the band and selects and stores the six radio stations with the strongest signal The stations are stored by signal strength not sequential order The set preset station number displays above the set pushbutton When that numbered pushbutton is pressed for less than two seconds the station tha
38. coolant mixture to slightly above the FULL COLD FROID line on the side of the coolant surge tank 4 With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot The upper radiator hose is the largest of the hoses which comes out of the radiator on the passenger side of the vehicle Watch out for the engine cooling fans 5 36 By this time the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower If the level is lower add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the FULL COLD FROID line on the side of the coolant surge tank 5 Then replace the pressure cap Be sure the pressure cap is hand tight and fully seated Start the engine and allow it to warm up How to Add Coolant to the Intercooler System Fill Neck 4 4L V8 STS V Engine Only If you have not found a problem yet turn the engine off and allow it to cool down then check to see if coolant is visible within the horizontal tube section of the fill neck If coolant is not visible add a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant to the fill neck Be sure the Intercooler System including the Intercooler System pressure cap is cool before doing so See Engine Coolant on page 5 25 for more information Notice In cold weather water can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts A CAUTION Use the recommended
39. driver side rear tire a double horn chirp will sound to signal the tire matching mode is no longer active Press the push button ignition switch to Acc Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure level as indicated on the tire and loading information label Put the valve caps back on the valve stems Tire Inspection and Rotation We recommend that you regularly inspect your vehicle s tires including the spare tire for signs of wear or damage See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5 75 for more information Tire rotation is not recommended if your vehicle has the following performance tire combinations P235 50R17 size tires on the front wheels and P255 45R17 size tires on the rear wheels P235 50ZR18 size tires on the front wheels and P255 45ZR18 size tires on the rear wheels P255 45R18 size tires on the front wheels and P275 40R19 size tires on the rear wheels 5 73 Different tire sizes should not be rotated front to rear Each tire and wheel should only be used in the original front or rear position it is in Tire rotation is recommended if the vehicle is equipped with P235 50R17 size tires on all four wheel positions or 255 45ZR18 size tires on all four wheel positions These tires should be rotated every 5 000 to 8 000 miles 8 000 to 13 000 km See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle This will ensure
40. inside rearview mirror with OnStar controls For more information about OnStar see OnStar System on page 2 48 To turn on and enable Intellibeam press and release the Intellibeam button on the inside rear view mirror If the vehicle has the IntelliBeam Intelligent High Beam Headlamp Control System the on off button can also be used to turn off or reset this system See IntelliBeam Intelligent High Beam Headlamp Control System under Headlamps on page 3 33 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview mirror AUTO O On Off Press and hold the AUTO button located on the lower center of the mirror for about three seconds to turn automatic dimming on The indicator light will illuminate when this feature is active The automatic dimming feature is active each time the vehicle is started Press and hold the O off button located next to the AUTO button for about three seconds to turn the automatic dimming feature off 2 40 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview mirror that also contains OnStar controls For more information on OnStar see OnStar System on page 2 48 Mirror Operation D On Off Press and hold the button located on the lower left side of the mirror face for about three seconds to turn the automatic dimming feature on or off The indicator light will illuminate when this fe
41. it can lose air after a time Check the inflation pressure regularly It should be 60 psi 420 kPa After installing the compact spare on the vehicle you should stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire is correctly inflated The compact spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph 105 km h for distances up to 3 000 miles 5 000 km The tire inflation monitor system must be calibrated after installing or removing the compact spare See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5 68 The system may not work correctly when the compact spare is installed on the vehicle 5 106 It s best to replace the spare with a full size tire as soon as soon as possible The spare will last longer and be in good shape if needed it again If your vehicle has All Wheel Drive AWD it could also have an StabiliTrak 3 See StabiliTrak System on page 4 8 for more information If the compact spare tire is installed on a vehicle with the StabiliTrak 3 System the vehicle operates in the Stability Secure Mode The STABILITY SECURE MODE message displays on the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 for more information Notice When the compact spare is installed do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with guide rails The compact spare can get caught on the rails That can damage the tire and wheel and maybe other parts of your vehicle Do not use the compact spare on oth
42. message might be displayed such as Battery Saver Active or Service Battery Charging System If this message is displayed it is recommended that the driver reduce the electrical loads as much as possible See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 Inadvertent Power Battery Saver This feature is designed to protect your vehicle s battery against drainage from the interior lamps trunk lamp glove box lamp or the garage door opener When the ignition is turned off the power to these features will automatically turn off after 10 minutes three minutes if a new car has 15 miles 24 km or less Power will be restored for an additional 10 minutes if any door is opened the trunk is opened or the courtesy lamp switch is turned on Head Up Display HUD A CAUTION If the HUD image is too bright or too high in your field of view it may take you more time to see things you need to see when it is dark outside Be sure to keep the HUD image dim and placed low in your field of view For vehicles with the Head Up Display HUD it projects some of the driver information that appears on the instrument panel cluster onto the windshield 3 43 The information may be displayed in English or metric units and appears as an image focused out toward the front of your vehicle To change from English to metric units see DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 74 The HUD consists of the following information Speedometer Turn Si
43. or smell it so you might not know it is in your vehicle Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking the exhaust pipe And check around again from time to time to be sure snow does not collect there Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that is away from the wind This will help keep CO out You can run the engine to keep warm but be careful 4 24 Run your engine only as long as you must This saves fuel When you run the engine make it go a little faster than just idle That is push the accelerator slightly This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged You will need a well charged battery to restart the vehicle and possibly for signaling later on with the headlamps Let the heater run for a while Then shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold But do it as little as possible Preserve the fuel as long as you can To help keep warm you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes lf Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free your vehicle when stuck in sand mud ice or snow See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4 26 If your vehicle has a traction system it can often h
44. tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished pumping before removing the nozzle Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 110 When replacing the fuel cap turn it clockwise until it clicks Make sure the cap is fully installed The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 68 The CHECK GAS CAP message will appear on the Driver Information Center DIC display if the fuel cap is not reinstalled properly See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 for more information ACAUTION If a fire starts while you are refueling do not remove the nozzle Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant Leave the area immediately Notice If you need a new fuel cap be sure to get the right type Your dealer retailer can get one for you If you get the wrong type it may not fit properly This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions system See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 68 Filling a Portable Fuel Container ACAUTION Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in your vehicle Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the fuel vapor You can be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this occurs To hel
45. the trailer lamps will also flash telling other drivers you are about to turn change lanes or stop When towing a trailer the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out Thus you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not It is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working Your vehicle has bulb warning lights When you plug a trailer lighting system into your vehicle s lighting system its bulb warning lights may not let you know if one of your lamps goes out So when you have a trailer lighting system plugged in be sure to check your vehicle and trailer lamps from time to time to be sure they are all working Once you disconnect the trailer lamps the bulb warning lights again can tell you if one of your vehicle lamps is out Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade If you do not shift down you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well On a long uphill grade shift down to THIRD 3 and reduce your speed to around 45 mph 70 km h to reduce the possibility of engine and transmission overheating Parking on Hills A CAUTION You really should not park your vehicle with a trailer attached on a hill If something goes wrong your rig could start to move People can be injured and both your
46. use the automatic transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in Additional Required Services on page 6 6 and be sure to use the fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 Engine Coolant The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX COOL engine coolant This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever occurs first if you add only DEX COOL extended life coolant The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low If you have a problem with engine overheating see Engine Overheating on page 5 29 A 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant will Give freezing protection down to 34 F 37 C Give boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C Protect against rust and corrosion Help keep the proper engine temperature Let the warning lights and gages work as they should Notice Using coolant other than DEX COOL may cause premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion In addition the engine coolant may require changing sooner at the first maintenance service after each 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always use DEX COOL silicate free coolant in your vehicle 5 25 What to Use Use a mixture of on
47. 11 for more information on locations the terminals 5 46 Your vehicle has a remote negative ground location as shown in the illustration It is located on the passenger side front shock tower See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 11 You should always use this remote ground location instead of the terminal on the battery Notice If you connect a negative cable to the Engine Control Module ECM ECM mounting A CAUTION bracket you may damage the ECM Always attach bracket or any cables that attach to the ECM the negative cable to your vehicle s remote negative Using a match near a battery can cause battery ground location instead of the ECM ECM bracket gas to explode People have been hurt doing or any cables attached to the ECM bracket this and some have been blinded Use a flashlight if you need more light A CAUTION Be sure the battery has enough water You do not need to add water to the battery installed in your new vehicle But if a battery has filler An electric fan can start up even when the caps be sure the right amount of fluid is there If it is low add water to take care of that first If you do not explosive gas could be present Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you Do not get it on you If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin flush the place with water and get medical help immediately engine is not running and can injure you Keep hands clothing and to
48. 23 Air GOnmditioniing aars tated es reen nite eiaa 3 48 Airbag Passenger Status Indicator eeeeeeeeees 3 61 Readiness Light csceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeereeees 3 60 Airbag SYSTEM agiterede onkels saae 1 51 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates 1 58 When Should an Airbag Inflate 0 1 56 Where Are the Airbags c c 1 53 Airbag Systems Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped VOHICIO peirers a a aa 1 65 How Does an Airbag Restrain 1 58 Passenger Sensing System e eeeeeeeeees 1 60 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 1 64 What Makes an Airbag Inflate 8 1 57 All Wheel Drive ices cecncecetencacamienentntececnens neenntt 5 50 All Wheel Drive AWD System n se 4 13 Antenna Backglass 0 cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 3 124 Antenna XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 3 124 Antilock Brake System ABS aaee 4 5 Antilock Brake System Warning Light 3 65 Appearance Care Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels 5 112 Care of Safety Belts 10 00 00 cceeeeeeeeeeeeee es 5 110 Chemical Paint Spotting ceeeeeeeeeee ees 5 114 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses 4 5 111 Fabric Carpet 452 kreerede ieee 5 108 Finish Care seca omrking see Egb voters 5 111 Finish Damage ccs sse cicsedisdes etnies ee hernede 5 114 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces 55263 fes
49. 4 4L V8 STS V Engines similar A Engine Cooling Fans B Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap 5 32 Some vehicles may have an engine driven fan as well as the electric pusher fans which are located behind the vehicle s grille A CAUTION An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling do not do anything else until it cools down The vehicle should be parked on a level surface When the engine is cold the coolant level should be at or slightly above the FULL COLD FROID line on the side of the coolant surge tank If it is not you may have a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses heater hoses radiator water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system ACAUTION Heater and radiator hoses and other engine parts can be very hot Do not touch them If you do you can be burned Do not run the engine if there is a leak If you run the engine it could lose all coolant That could cause an engine fire and you could be burned Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle If there seems to be no leak with the engine on check to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running If the engine is overheating both fans should be running If they are not your vehicle needs service Notice Engine damage f
50. At Each Fuel Pill SL am er karnsten seeren 6 9 Maintenance Requirements W ssssseeererererer 6 2 At Least Once a Month u u dc csereeeererererere 6 10 Your Vehicle and the Environment 6 2 At Least Once a Year ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 11 Using the Maintenance Schedule c eeceeeeeens 6 3 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 6 13 Scheduled Maintenance 0 ceseeeeeeeneeeeeneees 6 4 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts 6 15 Additional Required Services ceeeeeee eee 6 6 Engine Drive Belt Routing eee 6 16 Maintenance Footnotes ccceeeeeeeeeeee eters 6 8 Maintenance Record eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 18 6 1 Maintenance Schedule Introduction Important Keep engine oil at the proper level and change as recommended GM Protection Plan Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer retailer for details Maintenance Requirements Notice Maintenance intervals checks inspections replacement parts and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good working condition Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled maintenance might not be covered by warranty Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only
51. C appears in the compass window the compass may need calibration See Compass Calibration listed previously Cleaning the Mirror When cleaning the mirror use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing Outside Power Heated Mirrors The power mirror control is on the driver s door armrest and controls the driver s side and passenger s side mirrors KD Move the selector switch left or right to choose the driver s side or passenger s side mirror Use the arrows located on the control pad to adjust the position of each mirror Adjust each mirror so you can see the side of your vehicle and the area behind your vehicle Return the selector switch to the center position when finished adjusting This will prevent unwanted mirror movement in case the control pad is accidentally bumped while driving The preferred mirror positions can be stored with the memory option See Memory Seat Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2 77 The mirrors can be manually folded inward to prevent damage when going through car washes or confined spaces To fold push the mirror toward the vehicle To return the mirror to its original position push outward Be sure to return both mirrors to their original unfolded position before driving When the rear window defogger is turned on both outside rear view m
52. Collision Damage Repair lf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using the proper equipment and quality replacement parts Poorly performed collision repairs will diminish your vehicle s resale value and safety performance can be compromised in subsequent collisions Collision Parts Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the same materials and construction methods as the parts with which your vehicle was originally built Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to assure that your vehicle s designed appearance durability and safety are preserved The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for repair These parts are typically removed from vehicles that were total losses in prior crashes In most cases the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the vehicle A recycled original equipment GM part may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle s originally designed appearance and safety performance however the history of these parts is not known Such parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty and any related failures are not covered by that warranty Aftermarket collision parts are also available These are made by companies other than GM and may not have been tested for your vehicle As a result these parts ma
53. E E E sac cid eaas ke be anken ele 3 73 Speedometer ccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeas 3 59 TACHOMGIGSR 22 550 tivated ress ms Den brandes reb LEE 3 59 Garage Door Opener W W Wu ssseeeeeeeerere renerne 2 51 Gasoline OCANe A E E AE he arr 5 5 Specifications u ssseseereeeereerere renerne renen 5 6 GIOVE BOX sprintere or aa AEE E teens 2 58 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program 1 1 1 7 6 Hazard Warning Flashers iecere 3 6 Head Restraints cceeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeees 1 6 Headlamp AIMN asoa naaa ister E 5 53 Headlamp Wiring eessen ainiaan tinae 5 117 Headlamps 55255 an DE en ra anaa 3 33 Bulb Replacement cceeeeeeeeeeeseeeerees 5 54 Daytime Running Lamps eeeeeeeeeeee eee 3 37 FlaSh tO PASS 5552 serene Er beeap lies 3 13 Halogen Bulbs ceceeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 5 54 High Intensity Discharge HID Lighting 5 54 High Low Beam Changer 0 0 eeeeeeeneeeeeees 3 9 On Reminder c cccceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeaeeaes 3 37 WASNER asier Aalst nde casa iia eres 3 16 Wiper Activated eecseeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 3 37 Head Up Display HUD cee ee eee eee 3 43 Heated Seats iscisccicssiachiaydiet ed renees dn 1 3 Heated Steering Wheel cceeeeeeneeeeee seen es 3 7 GALS orenera he rr reaa twa caceeacancbeys 3 48 Highbeam On Light sanserne 3 72 High Speed Operation Tires
54. ENGINE OILS HOT WEATHER FIT c LOOK FOR THIS SYMBOL 2 AND GM STANDARD GM4718M DO NOT USE SAE 10W 40 SAE 20W 50 OR ANY OTHER VISCOSITY GRADE COLD WEATHER OIL NOT RECOMMENDED Look for three things e GM4718M Your vehicle s engine requires a special oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M Oils meeting this standard may be identified as synthetic However not all synthetic oils will meet this GM standard Look for and use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M 5 20 Notice If you use oils that do not have the GM4718M Standard designation you can cause engine damage not covered by your warranty e SAE 5W 30 As shown in the viscosity chart SAE 5W 30 is best for your vehicle These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity or thickness Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W 50 Oils meeting these requirements should have the starburst symbol on the container This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API Look for this on the oil container and use only those oils that are identified as meeting GM Standard GM4718M and have the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container Your vehicle s engine is filled at the factory with a Mobil 12 synthetic oil which meets all requirements for your vehicle Substitute Engine Oil When adding oil to maintain engine oil level oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M may not be available You can add
55. For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion have the seatback upright Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly Do no have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving Head Restraints Pull the head restraint up to raise it To lower the head restraint press the button located on the top of the seatback and push the head restraint down SA The front head restraints can also tilt forward or rearward Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is at the same height as the top of the occupant s head This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash 1 6 Rear Seats Heated Seats Your vehicle may have this feature The buttons used to control the heated rear seats are located on the rear of the center console The engine must be running for the heated seat feature to work sf Heated Seat and Seatback Press this button to turn the heated seat feature on When you press the button the feature will turn on at the highest setting Each time you press the button the feature will go down one temperature setting A light next to the button will indicate the setting 3 is the highest 1 is the lowest To turn the feature off keep pressing the button until the indicator light goes off The heated rear seats will shut off automatically when the ignition is turned off Rear Seat Pass Through Door Your vehicle has a pass through door that
56. Is Time for New Tires Various factors such as maintenance temperatures driving speeds vehicle loading and road conditions influence when you need new tires One way to tell when it is time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators which will appear when your tires have only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm or less of tread remaining You need new tires if any of the following statements are true You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire s rubber The tread or sidewall is cracked cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric The tire has a bump bulge or split The tire has a puncture cut or other damage that cannot be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage The rubber in tires degrades over time even if they are not being used This is also true for the spare tire if your vehicle has one Multiple conditions affect how fast this aging takes place including temperatures loading conditions and inflation pressure maintenance With proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out before they degrade due to age If you are unsure about the need to replace your tires as they get older consult the tire manufacturer for more information Buying New Tires GM has developed and matched specific tires for your vehicle The original equipment tires installed on your vehicle when it was new were desi
57. LOW A weak battery may also cause the DIC to display NO FOBS DETECTED when you try to start the vehicle If this happens place the transmitter in the center console storage area transmitter pocket with the buttons facing to the front of the vehicle Then with the vehicle in PARK P or NEUTRAL N press the brake pedal and the start button See Starting the Engine on page 2 29 for additional information about your vehicle s electronic keyless ignition with push button start Although this will start the vehicle it is recommended that you replace the transmitter battery as soon as possible Notice When replacing the battery use care not to touch any of the circuitry Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter To replace the battery 1 Insert a flat object with a thin edge into the slot on the side of the transmitter and separate the bottom half from the top half 2 Carefully pull the battery out of the transmitter 3 Put the new battery in the transmitter positive side down Use a battery type CR2032 or equivalent 4 Reassemble the transmitter Make sure to put it together so water will not get inside the transmitter 5 Test the transmitter Remote Vehicle Start This feature allows you to start the engine from outside the vehicle Before the remote vehicle start system can be operated it must be turned on through the vehicle personalization system You can al
58. MYGMLINK COM sacencsetsncecsactenecasnieepewbed einai 7 4 Navigation System Privacy sssseseeereererere 7 17 Navigation Radio System see Navigation Manual zaren rensede 3 117 New Vehicle Break In YW M G M ssssseeersee reen erne nner 2 27 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts 6 15 OOOMOGIC i osiin a E aA 3 59 Off Road ReCovery seisi ordrerne ble eiii 4 16 Oil ENQING seniri nadia ia iia 5 18 Pressure Lights 22 rel unnn ibien smni iaaa 3 70 Oil Engine Oil Life System W u dsseeeerererereee 5 21 Older Children Restraints ssssssssereree 1 28 Online Owner Center c ccccceceeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 7 4 OnStar Privacy cccceceececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 17 OnStar System see OnStar Manual 2 48 Operation Universal Home Remote System 2 52 Other Warning Devices ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 3 6 Outlet Adjustment siirre ninni ernai i uen 3 54 Outlets Accessory Power 00 0 cceeecee eee eeeeeeeeeeeteenee 3 46 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ccecce 2 44 CONVEX MIRON 5523 cicck an arealer mes 2 44 Parallel Park Assist Mirror ecceeeeeeeees 2 44 Power Heated Mirrors ceccecceeeeeeeeeeees 2 43 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode 5 31 Owner Checks and Services c cceeeeeeeeeeaes 6 9 Owners Canadian wid osciieckseseceetacdinscntdecdnccile se iaia ii Paint Damage 0ccee
59. Radio Frequency Identification RFID Privacy 7 17 PRACIOS sg sergenter a 3 98 RadiO S ic tsertanudsrreahcsnctennehddodatmedtyedselenetebtned 3 100 Radios Navigation Radio System see Navigation Manual ece 3 117 Radio Personalization eeeeeeeeeeeee ees 3 117 Reception heed ennen aiai 3 123 Setting the TMe reinigers ierti nnen 3 99 Theft Deterrent 222 online renses nr 3 121 Rainsense Wipers aesscscsesesesrerereserereennne 3 15 Reading Lamps 3327 arealerne 3 42 Rear AKG oct rar aen ere re eden 5 51 Limited Slip acres hen Antiieiwishienwh ls 4 8 Rear Climate Control System c eeeeeeeeeees 3 54 Rear Door Security LOCKS eeeeeeneeeeeeeees 2 15 Rear Heated Seats c cceceeeeeeneeeeneeeeeneeeees 1 7 Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming 2 40 Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming With OnStar oiran eadarra eint 2 40 Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming with OnStar and Compass 1 2 41 Rearview Mirror with Compass and Temperature 1 7 10 Reclining Seatbacks Power 0sceeeeeeee ees 1 4 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 6 13 Recreational Vehicle Towing ccecce 4 31 Remote Keyless Access System 0 0eeeeeees 2 5 Remote Vehicle Start cceseseseeeeeneeeeeneees 2 12 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire cccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeees 5 99 Removing the Spare Tire a
60. System on page 3 117 G A zg Audio Steering Wheel Controls If Equipped See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3 121 Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Button If Equipped See Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3 20 Heated Steering Wheel Button If Equipped See Heated Steering Wheel on page 3 7 Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering Column Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering Column on page 3 7 Horn See Horn on page 3 6 Ignition Switch See Ignition Positions on page 2 28 Climate Control System See Dual Climate Control System on page 3 48 Hazard Warning Flasher Button See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3 6 Cupholders See Cupholder s on page 2 58 Traction Control System Button See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 6 Shift Lever See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2 32 Glove Box See Glove Box on page 2 58 Hazard Warning Flashers Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others They also let police know you have a problem Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off The hazard warning flasher button is located on the console near the shift lever See nstrument Panel Overview on page 3 4 Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in and even if the key is not in Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off Press the button again to turn the flashers off When the hazard warnin
61. Trailer Brakes Does your trailer have its own brakes Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you will be able to install adjust and maintain them properly Because you have anti lock brakes do not try to tap into your vehicle s brake system If you do both brake systems will not work well or at all Trailer Wiring Harness All of the electrical circuits required for your trailer lighting system can be accessed at the driver s side rear lamp connector This connector is located under the carpet on the rear corner of the trunk compartment 4 37 Driving with a Trailer Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience Before setting out for the open road you will want to get to know your rig Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself Before you start check all trailer hitch parts and attachments safety chains electrical connector lamps tires and mirror adjustment If the trailer has electric brakes start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time During your trip check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure and that the lamps and any
62. a comfortable driving position If you change your seat position later you may have to re adjust your HUD 2 Start your engine and press the top or bottom of the HUD button to center the HUD image in your view The HUD image can only be adjusted up and down not side to side 3 Turn the knob on the DIC control panel to adjust the brightness of the HUD image The brightness of the HUD image is determined by the light conditions in the direction your vehicle is facing and where you have the HUD set If you are facing a dark object or a heavily shaded area your HUD may anticipate that you are entering a dark area and may begin to dim Polarized sunglasses could make the HUD image harder to see 3 45 As light shines out from the HUD it is possible for light to shine back in In rare occurrences when the sun is at a specific angle and position the sun s rays can shine back into the HUD When this occurs the display device within the HUD will be temporarily illuminated The event will end when the vehicle s angle to the sun changes Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to remove any dirt or film that reduces the sharpness or clarity of the HUD image To clean the HUD spray household glass cleaner on a soft clean cloth Wipe the HUD lens gently then dry it Notice When cleaning be careful not to scratch the HUD or camera lenses Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the HUD lens because the cleaner could le
63. a complete alphabet with both upper and lower case letters and the numbers zero through nine Also included are spaces and other non letter characters such as the ampersand amp Press the tune select knob once to select the letter The letter will then appear on the display and the cursor will advance to the next letter If you make a mistake press the F5 button located on the radio repeatedly to cycle back through all of the characters until you reach the character you wish to change Then turn the tune select knob until the letter you want is highlighted and press the tune select knob to select the new letter Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until the name or greeting you want is complete You can program up to 16 characters The name or greeting you programmed is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle by pressing the F6 BACK button located on the radio to return to the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU You will now see a check mark next to the driver greeting menu item which means that the driver greeting feature is on and a customized driver greeting is being used To turn off the customized driver greeting and go back to displaying either Driver 1 or Driver 2 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune sel
64. a pencil style air pressure gage or a key You will have one minute to match the first tire wheel position and five minutes overall to match all four tire wheel positions If it takes longer than one minute to match the first tire and wheel or more than five minutes to match all four tire wheel positions the matching process stops and you will need to start over The TPM matching process is outlined below fi 2 3 Set the parking brake Press the push button ignition switch to Acc Using the keyless access transmitter lock and unlock the vehicle s doors Press the lock and unlock buttons at the same time on the keyless access transmitter A single horn chirp will sound indicating that the TPMS is ready and the sensor matching process can begin Start with the driver side front tire Remove the valve cap from the valve stem Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or decreasing the tire s air pressure for five seconds or until a horn chirp sounds The horn chirp which may take up to 30 seconds to sound confirms that the sensor identification code has been matched to this tire position Proceed to the passenger side front tire and repeat the procedure in Step 6 Proceed to the passenger side rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 6 Proceed to the driver side rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 6 10 11 12 After hearing the confirming single horn chirp for the
65. access transmitter or when starting your vehicle see REMOTE RECALL MEMORY or START BUTTON RECALL under Vehicle Personalization on page 2 60 2 79 STORE DRIVER SETTINGS To store driver settings l Adjust your settings for the driver s seat the outside rearview mirrors and the steering column to a comfortable driving position Enter the memory programming mode for your driver settings by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Driver Selection Submenu From the DRIVER SELECTION submenu turn the tune select knob to scroll to STORE DRIVER SETTINGS and press in the knob Two beeps will sound to confirm that your driver settings are saved Set the HUD position if your vehicle has this feature the climate control temperature fan speed and mode settings the radio presets tone volume playback mode AM FM XM or CD and compact disc position Your memory settings are now programmed Any changes that are made to the HUD audio system and climate controls while driving will be automatically stored when the ignition is turned off Repeat the procedure for a second driver by programming the other driver number 2 80 Entering the Driver Exit Settings Submenu To enter the memory programming mode for your exit settings 1 Be sure the ignition is either on in ACCESSORY or in RAP and place the transmission in PARK P or make sure that the vehicle speed i
66. and remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Adaptive Cruise Control returns to normal operation and the brakes can be applied if needed A CAUTION If you rest your foot on the accelerator pedal the system will not automatically apply the brakes You could crash into a vehicle ahead of you Do not rest your foot on the accelerator pedal when using Adaptive Cruise Conirol 3 29 Curves in the Road A CAUTION Due to Adaptive Cruise Conirol limitations in curves it may respond to a vehicle in another lane or may not have time to react to a vehicle in your lane You could crash into a vehicle ahead of you or lose control of your vehicle Give extra attention in curves and be ready to use the brakes if necessary Select an appropriate speed while driving in curves Adaptive Cruise Control might operate differently in a sharp curve It might reduce your speed if the curve is too sharp 3 30 When following a vehicle and entering a curve Adaptive Cruise Control could lose track of the vehicle in your lane and your vehicle could accelerate When this happens the vehicle ahead symbol will not appear on the HUD Highway Exit Ramps ACAUTION Adaptive Cruise Control may lose track of the vehicle ahead and accelerate up to your set speed while entering or on highway exit ramps You could be startled by this acceleration and even lose control of the vehicle Disengage Adaptive Cruise Control befo
67. be appropriate for all drivers and driving conditions If you prefer to travel at a following distance farther than Adaptive Cruise Control allows disengage the system and drive manually A graphic on the HUD indicates the selected following distance This picture shows a maximum follow distance SET 70 63 MPH FOLLOWING GAP Me 11 United States version shown Canada similar The vehicles will move closer together as you select a smaller following distance 3 25 Alerting the Driver e Driver action is required when The alert symbol flashes on the HUD anda warning beep sounds when driver action is required Adaptive Cruise Control cannot apply sufficient braking because you are approaching a vehicle too rapidly The vehicle speed drops below about 25 mph 40 km h 3 26 A temporary condition prohibits Adaptive Cruise Control from operating See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 for more information A malfunction is detected in the system See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 for more information See Defensive Driving on page 4 2 A CAUTION Adaptive Cruise Control has only limited braking ability to slow your vehicle In some cases Adaptive Cruise Control may not have time to slow your vehicle enough to avoid a collision Be ready to take action and apply the brakes yourself See Defensive Driving on page 4 2 Approaching and Following a Vehicle The vehicle ah
68. belt back into the retractor If you are using a forward facing child restraint you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 7 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure 1 50 If the airbag is off the off indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when the vehicle is started If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit turn the vehicle off Remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle the on indicator is still lit check to make sure that the vehicle s seatback is not pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion If this happens slightly recline the vehicle s seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint If this happens adjust the head restraint Remove any additional material from the seat such as blankets cushions seat covers seat heaters or seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the child restraint If the on indicator is still lit secure the child in the child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and check with your dealer retailer To remove the child restraint unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way Airbag Syst
69. both vehicles can be damaged Only use vehicles with 12 volt systems with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle 2 Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach but be sure the vehicles are not touching each other If they are it could cause a ground connection you do not want You would not be able to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure Put an automatic transmission in PARK P or a manual transmission in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake 5 45 Notice If you leave your radio or other accessories on during the jump starting procedure they could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always turn off your radio and other accessories when jump starting your vehicle 3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlets Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not needed This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries And it could save the radio 4 Open the hoods and locate the positive and negative terminal locations or the remote positive and remote negative terminals of the other vehicle Then locate the remote positive location on your vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5
70. brake service might be required Brake Adjustment Every time you apply the brakes with or without the vehicle moving the brakes adjust for wear 5 43 Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a vehicle is complex Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking Your vehicle was designed and tested with top quality brake parts When you replace parts of the braking system for example when the brake linings wear down and you need new ones put in be sure you get new approved replacement parts If you do not the brakes might not work properly For example if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle the balance between the front and rear brakes can change for the worse The braking performance you have come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts Battery Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery When it is time for a new battery see your dealer retailer for one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery s label See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 11 for battery location Warning Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm Wash hands after handling 5 44 Vehicle Storage A CAUTION Batteries have acid that can bu
71. button in Step 3 than what you used for the garage door opener If these instructions do not work you probably have a Fixed Code garage door opener Follow the Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code garage door opener Programming Universal Home Remote Fixed Code If you have questions or need help programming the Universal Home Remote System call 1 866 572 2728 or go to www learcar2u com Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are Fixed Code units Programming a garage door opener involves time sensitive actions so read the entire procedure before you begin If you do not follow these actions the device will time out and you will have to repeat the procedure 2 54 To program up to three devices 1 To verify if you have a Fixed Code garage door opener remove the battery cover on your hand held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer of your garage door opener motor If you see a row of dip switches similar to the graphic above you have a Fixed Code garage door opener If you do not see a row of dip switches return to the previous section for Programming Universal Home Remote Rolling Code Your hand held transmitter may have between eight to 12 dip switches depending on the brand of transmitter Your garage door opener receiver motor head unit may also have a row of dip switches that can be used when programming the Universal Home Remote If the total number of switches on the mot
72. car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 110 Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish You can get approved cleaning products from your dealer retailer See Vehicle Care Appearance Materials on page 5 115 If your vehicle has a basecoat clearcoat paint finish the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat Always use waxes and polishes that are non abrasive and made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish Notice Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat clearcoat paint finish may damage it Use only non abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts ice melting agents road oil and tar tree sap bird droppings chemicals from industrial chimneys etc can damage your vehicle s finish if they remain on painted surfaces Wash the vehicle as soon as possible If necessary use non abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible 5 111 Protecting Exterior B
73. cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap 5 34 A CAUTION Adding only plain water to the cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will The vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture the engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning The engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant Notice In cold weather water can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts Use the recommended coolant and the proper coolant mixture ACAUTION You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Do not spill coolant on a hot engine If no coolant is visible in the surge tank add coolant as follows 1 Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the cooling system including the coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose is no longer hot Turn the pressure cap slowly 2 Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly and counterclockwise about one quarter of a turn remove it If you hear a hiss wait for that to stop A hiss means there is still some pressure left 5 35 3 Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper DEX COOL
74. coolant and the proper coolant mixture Turning the Intercooler System pressure cap A CAUTION when the engine and intercooler are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot and burn you badly Never turn the Intercooler System pressure cap even a little when the engine and intercooler are hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Do not spill coolant on a hot engine A CAUTION Adding only plain water to the cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will The vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture the engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning The engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant 5 37 1 Remove the Intercooler System pressure cap when the Intercooler System including the upper intercooler hoses are no longer hot Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about one quarter of a turn If you hear a hiss wait for that to stop This allows any pressure still left to be vented 5 38 Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly and remove it Add the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture to the fi
75. corresponding V shaped notches located in the plastic molding on the vehicle s frame The notches in the plastic molding are marked with a triangle shape 2 Loosen all of the wheel nuts but do not remove them yet using the wheel wrench Turn the handle about 180 degrees then flip the handle back to the starting position This avoids taking the wrench off the lug nut for each turn 4 Attach the wheel wrench to the jack A CAUTION Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack A CAUTION Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training The jack provided with your vehicle is designed only for changing a flat tire If it is used for anything else you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack Use the jack provided with your vehicle only for changing a flat tire A CAUTION Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly Notice If you position the jack under the rocker molding and attempt to raise the vehicle you could break the molding and or cause other damage to your vehicle Always position the jack so that when the jack head is raised it will fit firmly in the notch located inboard from the rocker molding 5 Turn the wheel wrench countercl
76. equipped and properly inflated is covered at no charge The customer is responsible for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered by a warrantable failure Jump Siart A battery jump start is covered at no charge if the vehicle does not start Trip Routing Service Upon request Cadillac Roadside Service will send you detailed computer personalized maps highlighting your choice of either the most direct route or the most scenic route to your destination anywhere in North America along with helpful travel information pertaining to your trip Please allow three weeks before your planned departure date In Canada trip routing requests will be limited to six per calendar year Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure incidental expenses may be reimbursed during the 60 months 100 000 miles 160 000 km warranty period Items covered are hotel meals and rental car Alternative Service Canada only There may be times when Roadside Service cannot provide timely assistance Your advisor may authorize you to secure local emergency road service and you will be reimbursed up to 100 upon submission of the original receipt to Cadillac Roadside Service Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to limit services or reimbursement to an owner or driver when in their sole discretion the claims become excessive in frequency or type of occurr
77. following Sidemarker Lamps Taillamps License Plate Lamps Instrument Panel Lights AD Headlamps Turn the control to this position to turn on the headlamps together with the previously listed lamps and lights IntelliBeam Intelligent High Beam Headlamp Control System If your vehicle has this feature be sure to read this entire section before using it IntelliBeam is an enhancement to the vehicle s headlamp system Using a digital light sensor located on the back of the rearview mirror this system turns the high beam headlamps on and off according to surrounding traffic conditions The IntelliBeam system turns the high beam headlamps on when it is dark enough there is no other traffic present and the IntelliBeam system is enabled 3 34 Turning On and Enabling IntelliBeam AUTO D IntelliBeam On Off Press and release the IntelliBeam button on the inside rear view mirror The IntelliBeam indicator on the mirror turns on Once the system has been turned on it remains on each time the vehicle is started Additionally the IntelliBeam system must be enabled To enable the IntelliBeam System turn the exterior lamp control to AUTO with the turn signal multifunction lever in its neutral position The High Beam On Light appears on the instrument panel cluster when the high beams are on See Highbeam On Light on page 3 72 Your vehicle has variable intensity high beams The h
78. following the DOT Department of Transportation code is the Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code tire size and date the tire was manufactured The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire although only one side may have the date of manufacture D Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load E Tire Inflation The temporary use tire or compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi 420 kPa For more information on tire pressure and inflation see Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 66 F Tire Size A combination of letters and numbers define a tire s width height aspect ratio construction type and service description The letter T as the first character in the tire size means the tire is for temporary use only G TPC Spec Tire Performance Criteria Specification Original equipment tires designed to GM s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall GM s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines Tire Size The following illustration shows an example of a typical passenger vehicle tire size P225 60R16 97S T TU B CDE F A Passenger P Metric Tire The United States version of a metric tire sizing system The letter P as the first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to stan
79. following to familiarize yourself with its features A CAUTION This system provides you with far greater access to audio stations and song listings Giving extended attention to entertainment tasks while driving can cause a crash and you or others can be injured or killed Always keep your eyes on the road and your mind on the drive avoid engaging in extended searching while driving Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe driving See Defensive Driving on page 4 2 Here are some ways in which you can help avoid distraction while driving 3 98 While your vehicle is parked Familiarize yourself with all of its controls Familiarize yourself with its operation Set up your audio system by presetting your favorite radio stations setting the tone and adjusting the speakers Then when driving conditions permit you can tune to your favorite radio stations using the presets and steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them Notice Before adding any sound equipment to your vehicle such as an audio system CD player CB radio mobile telephone or two way radio make sure that it can be added by checking with your dealer retailer Also check federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units If sound equipment can be added it is very important to do it properly Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle s engine radio or other systems and even damage them Yo
80. front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger s frontal airbag if The right front passenger seat is unoccupied The system determines that an infant is present in a rear facing infant seat The system determines that a small child is present in a child restraint The system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat A right front passenger takes his her weight off of the seat for a period of time The right front passenger seat is occupied by a smaller person such as a child who has outgrown child restraints Or if there is a critical problem with the airbag system or the passenger sensing system When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger s frontal airbag the off indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 61 1 61 If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit turn the vehicle off Remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint following the child restraint manufacturer s directions and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position on page 1 47 If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle the on indicato
81. get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface 5 52 If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole located on the rear axle you ll need to add some lubricant Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 Front Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check the front axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss could indicate a problem Have it inspected and repaired How to Check Lubricant A Drain Plug B Filler Plug To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface lf the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole located on the front axle you may need to add some lubricant What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 Headlamp Aiming Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and should need no further adjustment However if your vehicle is damaged in a crash the headlamp aim may be affected Aim adjustment to the low beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming drivers flash their high beam headlamps at you for vertical aim If the headlamps need to be re aimed it is recommended that you t
82. helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition but also helps the environment All recommended maintenance is important Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle To help protect our environment and to keep your vehicle in good condition be sure to maintain your vehicle properly Using the Maintenance Schedule We want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition But we do not know exactly how you will drive it You might drive very short distances only a few times a week Or you might drive long distances all the time in very hot dusty weather You might use your vehicle in making deliveries Or you might drive it to work to do errands or in many other ways Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles maintenance needs vary You might need more frequent checks and replacements So please read the following and note how you drive If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition see your dealer retailer This schedule is for vehicles that e carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits You will find these limits on the Tire and Loading Information label See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 26 e are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits e use the recommended fuel See Gasoline Octane on page 5
83. hose assembly must be replaced at a dealer retailer See Removal and Installation of Sealant Canister later in this section Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant canister if it has expired see your dealer retailer for a replacement Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Follow these directions closely for correct sealant usage 1 Place the sealant and compressor kit on the ground and unwrap the sealant filling hose from the compressor 2 Remove the air compressor accessory plug from the unit To do this pull the top portion of the wrapped cord out first then the bottom and then unsnap the plug Do not insert the plug into an accessory outlet yet 3 Remove the valve stem cap or tire pressure monitoring sensor from the flat tire by turning it counterclockwise If an object such as a nail has penetrated the tire do not remove it 5 89 A CAUTION Idling the engine in a closed in place or with the climate control system off can cause deadly carbon monoxide CO See Engine Exhaust on page 2 38 6 Start the vehicle See Starting the Engine on page 2 29 for more information The vehicle must be running while using the air compressor Z CAUTION Inflating something too much can make it explode and you or others could be injured i Be sure to read the inflator instructions and Make sure the sealant and compressor kit on off inflate the tire to its recommended pressure switch B i
84. in a crash And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts First before you or your passenger s wear a safety belt there is important information you should know i amp Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in front of you The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force on your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash Q What is wrong with this A CAUTION You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit snugly against your body A The shoulder belt is too loose It will not give nearly as much protection this way Q What is wrong with this Z CAUTION You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too loose In a crash you could slide under the lap belt and apply force on your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The lap belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touchi
85. include airbag modules and possibly other parts The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information after a crash See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on page 7 16 and Event Data Recorders on page 7 16 Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag systems Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly See your dealer retailer for service 1 59 Passenger Sensing System Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger s position The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on the overhead console when you start your vehicle PASSENGER AIRBAG s ec OFF Noa ANo 4 United States Canada The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off will be visible during the system check If you are using remote start to start your vehicle from a distance if equipped you may not see the system check When the system check is complete either the word ON or the word OFF or the symbol for on or the symbol for off will be visible See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 61 1 60 The passenger sensing system will turn off the right front passenger s frontal airbag under certain conditions The driver s airbags are not part of the passenger sensing system The passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the right front
86. inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition Inspect other brake parts including calipers parking brake etc b Visually inspect front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged loose or missing parts or signs of wear Inspect power steering lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc c Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked swollen or deteriorated Inspect all pipes fittings and clamps replace with genuine parts as needed To help ensure proper operation a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is recommended at least once a year d Inspect wiper blades for wear cracking or contamination Clean the windshield and wiper blades if contaminated Replace wiper blades that are worn or damaged See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5 55 and Windshield and Wiper Blades on page 5 112 for more information e Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety belt assemblies are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced Also see Checking the Restraint Systems on page 1 66 f
87. involves perception time and reaction time First you have to decide to push on the brake pedal That is perception time Then you have to bring up your foot and do it That is reaction time Average reaction time is about three fourths of a second But that is only an average It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another Age physical condition alertness coordination and eyesight all play a part So do alcohol drugs and frustration But even in three fourths of a second a vehicle moving at 60 mph 100 km h travels 66 feet 20 m That could be a lot of distance in an emergency so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important And of course actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road whether it is pavement or gravel the condition of the road whether it is wet dry or icy tire tread the condition of the brakes the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied Avoid needless heavy braking Some people drive in spurts heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking rather than keeping pace with traffic This is a mistake The brakes might not have time to cool between hard stops The brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking That means better braking and longer brake
88. is set to HIGH The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle 2 76 SUSPENSION MODE If your vehicle has this feature you can select between performance or touring modes Performance mode is used where road conditions or personal preference demand more control Touring mode is used for normal city and highway driving Programmable Modes Mode 1 PERFORMANCE Mode 2 TOURING default To program the vehicle to a different mode 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until SUSPENSION MODE is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to enter the SUSPENSION MODE submenu 4 Turn the tune select knob to highlight TOURING or PERFORMANCE 5 Press the tune select knob to select the setting The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle by pressing the F6 BACK button located on the radio to return to the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU Exiting the Personal Settings Menu Once you have finished making your selections on the base audio system you will automatically return to the main audio screen after 15 seconds You can also press the F6
89. knob Turn the knob to scroll through the following available languages e ENGLISH e GERMAN FRENCH e SPANISH e JAPANESE To make your selection press the knob If you accidentally select a language that you did not want ENGLISH is always at the top of the language list SETUP When you select this menu item the following submenu is available e PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU DRIVER SELECTION DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS e CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS 3 119 SETUP Submenu Items The following choices are available for programming using the Base audio system PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU This item turns the entire list of personalization features on or off This item allows you to program certain features to a preferred setting for up to two people The number of available features varies depending upon which options are purchased While this item is on a check mark appears after it For more information on the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU item see Vehicle Personalization on page 2 60 DRIVER SELECTION When you select this item the following submenu displays DRIVER 1 DRIVER 2 e RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS STORE DRIVER SETTINGS 3 120 For more information on the DRIVER SELECTION submenu item see Recalling Driver Settings and Storing Driver Settings under Memory Seat Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2 77 DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS When you select this item the following submenu displays e RECALL EXIT SETTI
90. life If your vehicle s engine ever stops while you are driving brake normally but do not pump the brakes If you do the pedal could get harder to push down If the engine stops you will still have some power brake assist But you will use it when you brake Once the power assist is used up it can take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push Adding non dealer non retailer accessories can affect your vehicle s performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 Antilock Brake System ABS Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System ABS an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid When you start the engine and begin to drive away ABS will check itself You might hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on and you might even notice that the brake pedal moves a little This is normal Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you You slam on the brakes and continue braking Here is what happens with ABS If there is a problem with ABS this warning light will stay on See Antilock Brake System Warning Light on page 3 65 A computer senses that wheels are slowing down If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling the computer will separately work the brakes at each wheel ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could The computer is programmed to make t
91. magnetic field interfering with the compass Such interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna mount magnetic note pad holder or a similar magnetic item If the letter C should ever appear in the compass window the compass may need calibration The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in circles at 5 mph 8 km h or less until the display reads a direction The compass can be placed in calibration mode manually by pressing and holding the on off button until a C is shown in the compass display 2 41 Compass Variance The zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for compass variance if you live outside zone eight Under certain circumstances as during a long distance cross country trip it will be necessary to adjust for compass variance Compass variance is the difference between earth s magnetic north and true geographic north If not adjusted to account for compass variance your compass could give false readings To adjust for compass variance do the following 1 Find the current location and variance zone number on the following zone map 2 42 Press and hold the on off button until a zone number appears in the display Once the zone number appears in the display press the on off button quickly until the correct zone number appears in the display Stop pressing the button and the mirror will return to normal operation If
92. not be enabled and you will not be provided with FCA audible and visual warnings See Head Up Display HUD on page 3 43 for more information ACAUTION On winding roads FCA may not detect a vehicle ahead You could crash into a vehicle ahead of you Do not rely on FCA on winding roads When weather limits visibility such as in fog rain or snow FCA performance is limited There may not be enough warning distance to the vehicle in front of you Do not rely on FCA in low visibility conditions ACAUTION When FCA is enabled the Adaptive Cruise Control switch is on If you press another Adaptive Cruise Control button you might go into cruise when you do not want to You could be startled and even lose control Be careful not to press adaptive cruise buttons unless you want to use cruise control Warning the Driver e The driver warning is active when The alert symbol will flash on the HUD and a warning beep will sound when driver You are approaching a vehicle too quickly You are following a vehicle ahead much too closely See Defensive Driving on page 4 2 for more information action may be required Detecting the Vehicle Ahead The vehicle ahead symbol will only appear on the HUD when a vehicle ahead of you is detected in your path If this symbol does not appear or disappears briefly FCA will not respond to vehicles you may see ahead The symbol may disappear on curves highway exit ra
93. not closed completely the security light will flash for 60 seconds and then turn off At this time the theft deterrent system is armed but the alarm will not sound if the trunk lid hood or door that was not closed completely is tampered with or opened The alarm will sound for the trunk lid hood or a door that was completely closed at the time the vehicle was locked using the keyless access transmitter Open the door Lock the door with the power door lock switch or lock button on the keyless access transmitter The security light should flash Close the door The security light will stop flashing and stay on After 30 seconds the light should turn off the theft deterrent system is armed Passive Arming if activated through the vehicle personalization feature will arm the system automatically after you close the door and take at least one keyless access transmitter with you The security light will turn on After 60 seconds the light should turn off The theft deterrent system is armed See Vehicle Personalization on page 2 60 If a door hood or the trunk is opened without the keyless access transmitter the horn will sound for 30 seconds and the lamps will flash for two minutes The vehicle cannot be started without a keyless access transmitter The Theft Deterrent system will not arm if The key is used to turn the key cylinder to the lock position The driver s door is locked using the power door lock switch afte
94. off if it is light enough outside If it is dark they will remain on See Wiper Activated Headlamps on page 3 37 Notice Do not place stickers or other items on the exterior glass surface directly in front of the moisture sensor Doing this could cause the moisture sensor to malfunction 3 15 Windshield Washer W Washer Fluid The lever on the right side of the steering column also controls the windshield washer There is a button at the end of the lever To spray washer fluid on the windshield press the button and hold it The washer will spray until you release the button The wipers will continue to clear the window for about six seconds after the button is released and then stop or return to your preset speed A CAUTION In freezing weather do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision If the fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low the message CHECK WASHER FLUID will appear on the Driver Information Center DIC display It will take 60 seconds after the bottle is refilled for this message to turn off For information on the correct washer fluid mixture to use see Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 40 and Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 3 16 Headlamp Washer Your vehicle may have headlamp washers The headlamp washers clear debris from the headlamp lenses The headlamp washers are lo
95. on the dipstick The level should be within the HOT mark If necessary add only enough fluid to bring the level within the mark What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 Always use the proper fluid Notice Use of the incorrect fluid may damage your vehicle and the damages may not be covered by your warranty Always use the correct fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 5 39 Windshield Washer Fluid What to Use When you need windshield washer fluid be sure to read the manufacturer s instructions before use If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing Adding Washer Fluid The CHECK WASHER FLUID message will appear on the Driver Information Center DIC when the fluid level is low See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 for more information Open the cap with the washer symbol on it Add washer fluid until the tank is full See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 11 for reservoir location 5 40 Notice When using concentrated washer fluid follow the manufacturer s instructions for adding water Do not mix water with ready to use washer fluid Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system Also water does not clean as well as wash
96. or from Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 GENERAL MOTORS GM the GM Emblem CADILLAC 1 800 551 4123 the CADILLAC Crest amp Wreath and the name STS are www helminc com registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation Propri taires Canadiens This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed We reserve the right to make changes in On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en frangais the product after that time without notice For vehicles aupr s de concessionnaire ou a l adresse suivante first sold in Canada substitute the name General Helm Incorporated Motors of Canada Limited for Cadillac Motor Car P O Box 07130 Division whenever it appears in this manual Detroit MI 48207 This manual describes features that may be available in 1 800 551 4123 this model but your vehicle may not have all of them www helminc com For example more than one entertainment system may be offered or your vehicle may have been ordered without a front passenger or rear seats Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference Litho in U S A Part No 15864565 A First Print 2007 General Motors Corporation All Rights Reserved Using this Manual Many people read the owner manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle to learn about the vehicle s features and controls Pictures and words work together to explain things Index A good place to quickly locate in
97. passing and you are Going less than 35 mph 55 km h push the accelerator pedal about halfway down Going about 35 mph 55 km h or more push the accelerator all the way down The transmission will shift down to a lower gear and have more power Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions could result in skidding see Skidding under Loss of Control on page 4 16 2 33 Driver Shift Control DSC Notice If you drive your vehicle at high RPMs without upshifting while using Driver Shift Control DSC you could damage your vehicle Always upshift when necessary while using DSC Your automatic transmission has a Driver Shift Control DSC feature that allows you to change gears similar to a manual transmission To use the DSC feature 1 Slide the shift lever over from DRIVE D to the right into the DSC area When the transmission is in DSC mode the sport symbol in the Driver Information Center DIC will come on I DRIVER DOOR AJAR aom SD oF If you do not move the shift lever forward or rearward the vehicle will be in sport mode When you are in the sport mode the vehicle will still shift automatically 2 34 While driving in sport mode the transmission may remain in a gear longer than it would in normal driving mode based on braking throttle input and vehicle lateral acceleration 2 Press the shift lever forward to upshift or rearward to downshift The DIC will show
98. pedal If your vehicle starts to slide ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go If you start steering quickly enough your vehicle may straighten out Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs You might see the STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message on the Driver Information Center See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 and StabiliTrak System on page 4 8 or Enhanced StabiliTrak on page 4 9 Of course traction is reduced when water snow ice gravel or other material is on the road For safety you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited While driving on a surface with reduced traction try your best to avoid sudden steering acceleration or braking including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower gear Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding Learn to recognize warning clues such as enough water ice or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface and slow down when you have any doubt Remember Any Antilock Brake System ABS helps avoid only the braking skid Competitive Driving See your warranty book before using your vehicle for competitive driving Notice If you use your vehicle for competitive drivi
99. power windows once the engine killed if caught in the path of a closing window has been turned off For more information see Retained Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children Accessory Power RAP on page 2 29 When there are children in the rear seat use the window lockout button to prevent unintentional operation of the windows 2 20 Express Down Up Window Any window can be lowered or raised all the way without holding the switch Press the front of the window switch to the second position and release to activate the express down feature To stop the window briefly pull up the switch Lift the front of the switch briefly to activate the express up feature To stop the window briefly press the switch Programming the Power Windows lf the battery on your vehicle has been recharged disconnected or is not working each window must be reprogrammed for the express up feature to work To program each window 1 With the ignition on or in ACC ACCESSORY or while RAP is active close all doors 2 Press and hold the power window switch until the window has fully opened 3 Continue holding the switch for approximately two seconds 4 Pull up the power window switch until the window is fully closed Repeat the process for all windows Express Window Anti Pinch Feature If any object is in the path of the window when the express up is active the window will stop at the obstruction and auto reverse to a prese
100. readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving your airbag system may not work properly Have your vehicle serviced right away ACAUTION If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle it means the airbag system may not be working properly The airbags in your vehicle may not inflate in a crash or they could even inflate without a crash To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle serviced right away if the airbag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle The airbag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you start the engine If the light does not come on then have it fixed immediately lf there is a problem with the airbag system an airbag Driver Information Center DIC message may also come on See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 for more information Passenger Airbag Status Indicator Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system Your overhead console has a passenger airbag status indicator PASSENGER AIRBAG 2 OFF United States Canada When you start the vehicle the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off for several seconds as a system check If you use remote start to start your vehicle from a distance if your vehicle has this feature you may not see the system check 3 61 Then after several more seconds the status indicator wi
101. same time For base level vehicles each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately by pressing and holding the bottom of the trip information button while the desired trip odometer is displayed For uplevel vehicles reset each trip odometer by pressing the reset button or by pressing and holding the trip information button while the desired trip odometer is displayed 3 80 DIC Warnings and Messages Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and that some action may be needed by the driver to correct the condition Multiple messages may appear one after another The text messages are the same for both the base audio and Navigation systems unless otherwise indicated Some messages may not require immediate action but you can press the reset button to acknowledge that you received the messages and to clear them from the display Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC display because they are more urgent These messages require action before they can be cleared Take any messages that appear on the display seriously and remember that clearing the messages will only make the messages disappear not correct the problem The following are the possible messages that can be displayed and some information about them AUTOMATIC LIGHTS OFF This message displays when the automatic headlamps are turned off See Headlamps on page 3 33 for more information AUTOMATI
102. section To access the fuses push in the two tabs then lift the cover off Your vehicle may not have all the fuses listed below 5 123 Driver s Side INCLR ELC CMPRSR LT POS PUMP SPARE PWR SEATS AMP stssts v JU Fuses Usage Amplifier REAR DR MDL Rear Door Modules INCLR PUMP Inner Cooler Pump Option ELC EXH Electronic Level Control Exhaust Theft Sensors Auto Shifter Power Solenoid Option THEFT SHFT sounder Driver Door Module Front Door DDM MRTD MDL_ Magnetic Ride Control Module SubWoofers Option Option 5 124 Fuses Usage S Relays Usage Infotainment Export Only Left Rear Taillamp Position Lamps TV VICS SCM Supervisory Control Module Option LT POS Option REAR Right Rear Taillamp Position Lamps HTD SEATS Rear Heated Seats RT POS Option SPARE RUN ignition 3 SPARE STDBY LAMP Rear Tallamps Position Lamps Front Passenger Heated Seat Auto Option IGN3 Shifter Occupant Protection TRUNK RELSE Trunk Release Motor Electronic Tension Reducer for Reverse Lamps Rear Parking Aid Seatbelt BCK UP LAMP inside Rearview Mirror ir u Rear Shelf Speaker Option sw emery Seat Module Lumbar pears Reverse Lamps Rear Parking Aid BCK UP LAMP Inside Rearview Mirrors Diodes _____ Usage _ _ AIR BAG BATT SPARE POS LAMPS Rear Taillamps ELC CMPRSR Automatic Level Control Option Joint Connector Splice Pack Green Relays Usage
103. start be sure you have enough room 1 Before you start be sure you have enough room around the vehicle It should be parked on a level around the vehicle surface 2 Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular 2 Firmly apply the parking brake See Parking Brake brake See Parking Brake on page 2 35 on page 2 35 Do not use the accelerator pedal and be ready to Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if turn off the engine immediately if it starts the vehicle begins to move 3 Try to start the engine in each gear The vehicle 3 With the engine off and without applying the regular should start only in PARK P or NEUTRAL N brake try to move the shift lever out of PARK P If the vehicle starts in any other position contact with normal effort If the shift lever moves out your dealer retailer for service of PARK P contact your dealer retailer for service Parking Brake and Automatic Park on a fairly steep hill with the vehicle facing Transmission Park P Mechanism Check downhill Keeping your foot on the regular brake set the parking brake A CAUTION When you are doing this check your vehicle could begin to move You or others could be injured and property could be damaged Make sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case it begins to roll Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move To check the parking brake s holding ability With the engine running
104. substitute oil designated SAE 5W 30 with the starburst symbol at all temperatures Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard GM4718M should not be used for an oil change Engine Oil Additives Do not add anything to the oil The recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM standards are all you need for good performance and engine protection Engine Oil Life System When to Change Engine Oil Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know when to change the engine oil and filter This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature and not on mileage Based on driving conditions the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can vary considerably For the oil life system to work properly you must reset the system every time the oil is changed Notice If your vehicle is an STS V model the engine uses a special oil filter The use of any other engine oil filter could lead to filter failure and result in severe engine damage Damage caused by use of the wrong engine oil filter would not be covered by your new vehicle warranty When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished it will indicate that an oil change is necessary A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message in the DIC will come on See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 Change the oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles 1 000 km It is possible that if you are driving under the best conditions the oil life system might no
105. that the vehicle continues to perform most like it did when the tires were new Any time you notice unusual wear rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment Also check for damaged tires or wheels See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5 75 and Wheel Replacement on page 5 80 5 74 When rotating P235 50R17 size tires or 255 45ZR18 size tires always use the correct rotation pattern shown here If the vehicle has a compact spare tire do not include the compact spare tire in the tire rotation After the tires have been rotated adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and Loading Information label See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 66 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 26 Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5 70 Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened See Wheel Nut Torque under Capacities and Specifications on page 5 128 ACAUTION Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if needed to get all the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 96 When It
106. the Trailer that appears later in this section Trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself Trailering means 4 34 changes in handling acceleration braking durability and fuel economy Successful safe trailering takes correct equipment and it has to be used properly That is the reason for this part In it are many time tested important trailering tips and safety rules Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer Load pulling components such as the engine transmission wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder against the drag of the added weight The engine is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under greater loads generating extra heat Also the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance increasing the pulling requirements If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer If you do here are some important points There are many different laws including speed limit restrictions having to do with trailering Make sure your rig will be legal not only where you live but also where you will be driving A good source for this information can be state or provincial police Consider using a sway control You can ask a hitch dealer retailer about sway controls Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km your new vehicle is driven Your engine axle or oth
107. the dead battery 2 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle with the good battery 3 Disconnect the red positive cable from the vehicle with the good battery 4 Disconnect the red positive cable from the other vehicle All Wheel Drive All of the lubricant checks in this section apply to your vehicle If you have an all wheel drive vehicle there is an additional system that need lubrication Transfer Case When to Check Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check the transfer case fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss could indicate a problem Have it inspected and repaired How to Check Lubricant A Drain Plug B Fill Plug To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole located on the transfer case you ll need to add some lubricant Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole Use care not to overtighten the plug What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 Rear Axle When to Check Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss could indicate a problem Have it inspected and repaired 5 51 How to Check Lubricant To
108. the system is designed to make an automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request emergency services be sent to your location If you lock your keys in the vehicle call OnStar at 1 888 4 ONSTAR and they can send a signal to unlock your doors If you need roadside assistance press the OnStar button and they can contact Roadside Service for you OnStar service is provided to you subject to the OnStar Terms and Conditions You may cancel your OnStar service at any time by contacting OnStar 2 48 A complete OnStar Owner s Guide and the OnStar Terms and Conditions are included in the vehicle s OnStar Subscriber glove box literature For more information visit onstar com or onstar ca contact OnStar at 1 888 4 ONSTAR 1 888 466 7827 or TTY 1 877 248 2080 or press the OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day 7 days a week Not all OnStar features are available on all vehicles To check if your vehicle is equipped to provide the services described below or for a full description of OnStar services and system limitations see the OnStar Owner s Guide in your glove box or visit onstar com OnStar Services For new vehicles with OnStar the Safe amp Sound Plan or the Directions amp Connections Plan is included for one year from the date of purchase You can extend this plan beyond the first year or upgrade to the Directions amp Connections Plan For more information press the OnStar butt
109. to driver requests to change the stability mode until the next ignition cycle or until the vehicle condition or fault is returned to normal See Enhanced StabiliTrak on page 4 9 3 94 STABILITY SYS System ACTIVE This message displays any time the StabiliTrak system or Enhanced StabiliTrak system is actively assisting with directional control of the vehicle Slippery road conditions may exist when this message is displayed so adjust your driving accordingly This message may stay on for a few seconds after StabiliTrak stops assisting with directional control of the vehicle See StabiliTrak System on page 4 8 or Enhanced StabiliTrak on page 4 9 for more information STABILITY SYS System NOT READY This message displays if the StabiliTrak system is not ready Two conditions may cause this message to display The vehicle needs to be driven in a straight line until the sensors are centered Once the sensors are centered the StabiliTrak system is ready and the STABILITY SYS READY message displays The system needs to warm up This may occur when first starting your vehicle and driving away during cold winter weather This is normal To acknowledge this message press the reset button The StabiliTrak performance is affected until the STABILITY SYS READY message is displayed in the DIC See StabiliTrak System on page 4 8 for more information STABILITY SYS System OFF This message displays any time St
110. to your satisfaction the following steps should be taken STEP ONE Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management Normally concerns can be quickly resolved at that level If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales service or parts manager contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager STEP TWO If after contacting a member of dealership management it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help in the United States contact the Cadillac Customer Assistance Center 24 hours a day by calling 1 800 458 8006 In Canada contact the Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre by calling 1 888 446 2000 7 2 We encourage you to call the toll free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention Please have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative Vehicle Identification Number VIN This is available from the vehicle registration or title or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield Dealership name and location Vehicle delivery date and present mileage When contacting Cadillac please remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer s facility That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern STEP THREE United States Owners Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completel
111. underhood emission control label If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications but emission control system performance might be affected The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and your vehicle might fail a smog check test See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 68 If this occurs return to your authorized dealer retailer for diagnosis If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used repairs might not be covered by your warranty Additives To provide cleaner air all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming allowing the emission control system to work properly In most cases you should not have to add anything to the fuel However some gasolines contain only the minimum amount of additive required to meet U S Environmental Protection Agency regulations To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean or if your vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Also your dealer retailer has additives that will help correct and prevent most deposit related problems Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol and reformulated gasolines might be available in your area We recommend that you u
112. vehicle or vehicle owner OnStar lf your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the OnStar services please refer to the OnStar Terms and Conditions for information on data collection and use See also OnStar System on page 2 48 in this manual for more information Navigation System If your vehicle has a navigation system use of the system may result in the storage of destinations addresses telephone numbers and other trip information Refer to the navigation system operating manual for information on stored data and for deletion instructions Radio Frequency Identification RFID RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system security as well as in connection with conveniences such as key fobs for remote door locking unlocking and starting and in vehicle transmitters for garage door openers RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use or record personal information or link with any other GM system containing personal information 4 NOTES 7 18 A Accessories and Modifications sssssereeeree 5 3 Adaptive Cruise Control 0 cceceeeeeeeeeeees 3 20 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped N S af te REESE Ses SDS ERE A TERE RES SER TET 1 65 Additives Fuel c ccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeetenees 5 6 Add On Electrical Equipment 0 eeeee 5 116 Air Cleaner Filter Engine eeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 5
113. warning flashers Press the Acc button ignition switch See Ignition Positions on page 2 28 Turn on the valet lockout switch See Valet Lockout Switch on page 2 25 When you enter the vehicle during a remote start press the brake pedal and press the start button on the keyless ignition switch to transition from remote start operation to normal vehicle operation Laws in some local communities may restrict the use of remote starters For example laws may require a person using remote start to have the vehicle in view when doing so Check local regulations for any requirements on remote starting of vehicles Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low on fuel Your vehicle may run out of fuel The remote start feature provides two separate starts each with 10 minutes of engine running If you press the lock button and then hold the remote start button on the keyless access transmitter again for at least three seconds before the first 10 minutes of engine running time has expired 10 minutes is added to the remaining minutes For example if the remote start is initiated again after five minutes of the engine run time 10 minutes is added and you now have 15 minutes with the engine running Once two remote starts or 20 minutes of the engine running have been provided the vehicle must be started using the keyless access with pushbutton start feature if the engine needs to be restarted See Starting the Engin
114. wheels other than those recommended for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning properly See Buying New Tires on page 5 76 Operating electronic devices or being near facilities using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal a low tire condition See your dealer retailer for service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes on and stays on TPMS Sensor Matching Process Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors or rotate your vehicle s tires the identification codes will need to be matched to the new tire wheel position 5 72 The sensors are matched to the tire wheel positions in the following order driver side front tire passenger side front tire passenger side rear tire and driver side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool See your dealer retailer for service The TPMS sensors may also be matched to each tire wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire s air pressure When increasing the tire s pressure do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the tire s sidewall If using this method to match TPMS sensors the complete procedure outlined below must be performed within 15 minutes of the vehicle being stationary To decrease air pressure out of a tire you can use the pointed end of the valve cap
115. with Used Oil Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long Clean your skin and nails with soap and water or a good hand cleaner Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil See the manufacturer s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products Used oil can be a threat to the environment If you change your own oil be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash pouring it on the ground into sewers or into streams or bodies of water Instead recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil If you have a problem properly disposing of used oil ask your dealer retailer a service station or a local recycling center for help Engine Air Cleaner Filter 4 6L V8 Engine shown 3 6L V6 Engine similar The engine air cleaner filter is in the engine compartment on the driver s side of the vehicle near the front See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 11 for more information on locating the air cleaner filter When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspect the air cleaner filter at the Maintenance II intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each 50 000 mile 80 000 km interval See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 for more information If you are driving in dusty dirty conditions inspec
116. 0 A trailer was attached to your vehicle or a bicycle or an object was hanging out of your trunk during your last drive cycle the red light may illuminate Once the attached object is removed URPA will return to normal operation The vehicle s bumper is damaged Take the vehicle to your dealer retailer to repair the system Other conditions may affect system performance such as vibrations from a jackhammer or the compression of air brakes on a very large truck If the system is still disabled after driving forward at least 15 mph 25 km h take your vehicle to your dealer retailer Side Blind Zone Alert Your vehicle may have a Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA system The SBZA system is an aid that may help you avoid lane change crashes with vehicles in your side blind spots zones Read the entire section before using the system See Side Blind Zone Alert in the Index of the navigation manual Lane Departure Warning Your vehicle may have a Lane Departure Warning LDW system The LDW system does not steer the vehicle and is only an aid to help you stay in your driving lane Read the entire section before using the system See Lane Departure Warning in the Index of the navigation manual 2 47 OnStar System ile Jl se OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety security information and convenience services If your airbags deploy
117. 10 to 30 minutes Then adjust the temperature if necessary You can switch from English to metric units through the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 74 The air conditioning system removes moisture from the air So some water might drip underneath the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine This is normal Manual Operation N V Mode Pressing the mode switch and changing the mode cancels automatic operation and allows the operator to manually select the air delivery location Press AUTO to return to automatic operation The outboard air outlets always receive airflow regardless of the mode selected See Outlet Adjustment on page 3 54 to change this airflow from the outboard outlets To change the current mode select one of the following 74 Vent This mode directs air to the instrument panel outlets ib Bi Level This mode splits the air between the instrument panel outlets and the floor outlets In automatic operation cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets td Floor This mode directs most of the air to the floor outlets with some air directed to the outboard outlets and a little air directed to the windshield and side windows 3 49 The mode switch can also be used to select the defog mode Information on defogging and defrosting can be found later in this section A V Fan Press this switch to increase or dec
118. 2008 Cadillac STS STS V Owner Manual Q Seats and Restraint Systems 1 1 Driving Your Vehicle 0ccceseeeeeeeeees 4 1 FrontSeats iedeen a aa rnEeE vs 1 2 Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle 4 2 Rear Seats oo ec ccc cc ccc cece eee ec eee eeeeneeeenenes 1 7 TOWING lbs eaa ra EEEE oxsaedaacdacies 4 31 Safety BeltS 0 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 3 Service and Appearance Care 055 5 1 Child Restraints oo ccccccceece eee eee eee eee eens 1 28 SERVICE oo E EEE 5 3 Airbag System ooo eecceceececc eee eeeeeeeeeeenees 1 51 Fuel eere e e E E a caeaeeh 5 5 Restraint System Check W G G sssssesererrerereee 1 66 Checking Things Under the Hood _ 5 10 Features and Controls 0 c ccccceeeeceeeeeeeeees 2 1 All Wheel Drive ooo cece cece cece eeeeeaeeeee eases 5 50 KEYS sehr ioina a ie A a aiana ee 2 3 Rear Axle n aaaanannnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnennrnrrnrrnrnrrene 5 51 Doors and LOCKS ooo cece cece ccc ce ee ee eee ee nen es 2 14 FRONEAKIG amente eE e ESEE 5 52 WINdOWS GGsssssseeeeeeeeereeveene nerve renser n ennen nere 2 19 Headlamp Aiming oo cee eececeeeeeeeee ee ee eee 5 53 Theft Deterrent Systems o oo eee eeee eee eee ees 2 22 Bulb Replacement oo oe ecc ec cce eee ee eee eee es 5 54 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle _ 2 27 Windshield Replacement 1 5 55 MIMOPS secsetscienesce
119. 5 The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 should be performed when indicated See Additional Required Services on page 6 6 and Maintenance Footnotes on page 6 8 for further information A CAUTION Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous In trying to do some jobs you can be seriously injured Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know how and the proper tools and equipment for the job If you have any doubt see your dealer retailer to have a qualified technician do the work See Doing Your Own Service Work on page 5 4 Some maintenance services can be complex So unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment you should have your dealer retailer do these jobs When you go to your dealer retailer for your service needs you will know that trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine parts If you want to purchase service information see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 15 Owner Checks and Services on page 6 9 tells you what should be checked when to check it and what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition The proper replacement parts fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 and Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6 15 When your vehicle is serviced make sure these are used All parts should be replaced and al
120. 7 Customer Assistance and Information 7 2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 0005 7 2 Online Owner Center cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 4 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users 0 eceeeeeeeee eee 7 5 Customer Assistance Offices ccceceeeeeee 75 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program 7 6 Roadside Service ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 6 Scheduling Service Appointments 00 7 Courtesy Transportation 0cceseeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 7 9 Collision Damage Repair ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 7 11 Customer Assistance Information Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government 005 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors Service Publications Ordering Information Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy Event Data Recorders OnStar Navigation System Radio Frequency Identification RFID Customer Assistance and Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Cadillac Normally any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your dealer s sales or service departments Sometimes however despite the best intentions of all concerned misunderstandings can occur If your concern has not been resolved
121. AL ON message will appear on the Driver Information Center DIC display See Turn Signal On under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 for more information Headlamp High Low Beam Changer Push forward on the turn signal multifunction lever to change the headlamps from low to high beam Pull the lever back and then release it to change from high to low beam If you turn the vehicle off with the high beams on the next time you start your vehicle the low beams will be on To re activate high beams pull lever toward you and then push it forward again This light on the instrument panel cluster will be on indicating high beam usage Forward Collision Alert FCA System If your vehicle has this feature be sure to read this entire section before using it The system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired ope
122. B OFF OR RUN This message displays when the keyless access transmitter is not detected inside the vehicle while you are trying to turn the ignition off Your vehicle may be near a strong radio antenna signal causing the keyless access system to be jammed The vehicle remains in ACCESSORY until OFF or START has been pressed or 10 minutes has expired If you turn the ignition off and you cannot find the keyless access transmitter you will not be able to restart the vehicle The keyless access transmitter needs to be inside of the vehicle in order for the vehicle to start See Starting the Engine on page 2 29 for more information OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE Notice If you drive your vehicle while the engine oil pressure is low severe engine damage may occur If a low oil pressure warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible Do not drive the vehicle until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected See Engine Oil on page 5 18 for more information This message displays when the vehicle s engine oil pressure is low A multiple chime sounds when this message is displayed See Engine Oil on page 5 18 for more information Stop the vehicle immediately as engine damage can result from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer as soon as possible when this message is displayed PASSENGER DOOR AJAR This symbol appears with th
123. BACK button located on the radio to return to the main audio screen Memory Seat Mirrors and Steering Wheel If your vehicle has the memory feature you can program and recall memory settings for the following features for up to two drivers The drivers seat position The outside rearview mirrors position The power tilt wheel and telescopic steering column position The following settings and presets are set automatically The language radio and XM presets tone volume playback mode AM FM or CD last displayed stations and compact disc position The last climate control setting The Head Up Display HUD position if your vehicle has this feature Other personalization settings for example remote start settings See Vehicle Personalization on page 2 60 2 77 For vehicles with the base audio system memory features are programmed and recalled through the radio from the DRIVER SELECTION and the DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS submenus See Entering the Driver Selection Submenu and Entering the Driver Exit Settings Submenu later in this section for more information on recalling and programming the memory settings using the base audio system For vehicles with the Navigation system memory features are programmed and recalled through the navigation display See Personalization in the Index of the Navigation System manual for more information on programming and recalling the memory settings usin
124. C LIGHTS ON This message displays when the automatic headlamps are turned on See Headlamps on page 3 33 for more information BATTERY NOT CHARGING SERVICE CHARGING SYS System This symbol appears with this message This message displays when a problem with the charging system has been detected Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE This message displays when the system detects that the battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonable level The battery saver system starts reducing certain features of the vehicle that may be noticeable At the point that the features are disabled this message is displayed It means that the vehicle is trying to save the charge in the battery Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the battery to recharge The normal battery voltage range is 11 5 to 15 5 volts To monitor battery voltage on the DIC press the information button until BATTERY VOLTS displays BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH This symbol appears with this message This message displays when the electrical charging system is overcharging the battery When the system detects that the battery voltage is above an estimated 16 volts this message displays To reduce the charging overload use the vehicle s accessories Turn on the exterior lamps and radio Set the climate control on AUTO and the fan speed on the highest setting Turn the rear window defogger on The normal bat
125. Enter the memory programming mode for your driver settings by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Driver Selection Submenu 2 From the DRIVER SELECTION submenu turn the tune select knob to highlight the driver number that you want either DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2 3 Set your choice by pressing in the tune select knob If you would like to recall or store driver settings for the selected driver see RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS or STORE DRIVER SETTINGS later in this section If you would like to recall or store exit settings for the selected driver see RECALL EXIT SETTINGS or STORE EXIT SETTINGS later in this section RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS To recall driver settings 1 Enter the memory programming mode for your driver settings by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Driver Selection Submenu 2 From the DRIVER SELECTION submenu turn the tune select knob to scroll to RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS and press in the knob If the vehicle is in PARK P one beep will sound and your previously saved driving position will then be recalled If the vehicle is not in PARK P three beeps will sound and your previously saved driving position will not be recalled A memory recall can be stopped by pressing any memory seat or mirror position button If you would like the stored driving positions to be recalled when unlocking your vehicle with the keyless
126. GE lf your vehicle is low on fuel the Fuel Level Low message will be displayed See Fuel Level Low under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 for more information MPG AVG L 100 km AVG This display shows the approximate average miles per gallon mpg or liters per 100 kilometers L 100 km This number is calculated based on the number of mpg L 100 km recorded since the last time this display was reset To reset MPG AVG press the reset button The display will return to zero MPG INST L 100 km INST This display shows the current fuel economy This number reflects only the fuel economy that the vehicle has right now and will change frequently as driving conditions change Unlike average fuel economy this display cannot be reset GAL FUEL USED L FUEL USED This display shows the number of gallons gal or liters L of fuel used since the last reset of this display To reset GAL FUEL USED press the reset button The display will return to zero AVG MPH AVG km h This display shows the average speed of the vehicle in miles per hour mph or kilometers per hour km h This average is calculated based on the various vehicle speeds recorded since the last reset of this display To reset AVG MPH press the reset button The display will return to zero 3 77 TIMER OFF This display can be used like a stopwatch You can record the time it takes to travel from one point to another To access the timer p
127. Have the system inspected and repaired and the fluid level checked Add fluid if needed I Drain flush and refill intercooler system This service can be complex you should have your dealer retailer perform this service See Engine Coolant on page 5 25 m If you drive regularly under dusty conditions inspect the filter at each engine oil change n Visually inspect belt for fraying excessive cracks or obvious damage Replace belt if necessary Owner Checks and Services These owner checks and services should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle Your dealer retailer can assist you with these checks and services Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle make sure they are the proper ones as shown in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 At Each Fuel Fill It is important to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill Engine Oil Level Check Notice It is important to check the engine oil regularly and keep it at the proper level Failure to keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause damage to the engine not covered by your warranty Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary See Engine Oil on page 5 18 Engine Coolant Level Check Check the engine coolant level and add DEX COOL coolant mixture if necess
128. INCLR PUMP Inner Cooler Pump Option Electronic Level Control ELG GMPRSR Compressor Option 5 125 Passenger s Side p REARFOG STOP LAMP Nn A E SPARE REAR DEFOG FUEL PUMP Cc TRUNK WNOWMTAS FEAR DIODE DEFOG DIFF PUMP J C 4 stssts v I INTLAMP CNSTR VENT DIFF PUMP REAR FOG RF HTD SEAT XM RDO ONSTAR AIRBAG AGN RIM RPA ISRVM CLM RUN CRNK Fuses Sensing and Diagnostic Monitor ERT PDM Front Passenger Door Module Right AIRBAG IGN Automatic Occupant Sensor Power Subwoofer Passenger Supplemental Inflatable FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump Restraint 7 CNSTR VENT Canister Vent Solenoid FDD STR Hearen Sigering Wheel DIFF PUMP_ Rear Differential Pump ate ama e e a Pasan 5 126 Relays Usse Fuses Usage _ RDO ONSTAR Radio OnStar INTLAMP csi Turn Signal Lane Departure ET TRN DN Warning Option REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger STOP LAMP Stop Lamp REAR FOG __ Rear Fog Lamps Option Rear Integration Module Rear Integration Module Rear Parking Aid Inside Rearview Mirror eave ELM Column Lock Module Power Circuit Breakers WINDOW Power Window Motors Circuit Sounder Active Front Steering WGS Breaker AFS Supervisory Control Module UHBEC Run CRNK Relay Coil Diodes Usage RUN CRNK Rear Fog Lamp Relay Coil TRUNK DIODE Trunk Release S ROOF Sun Roof Module Option SPARE Joint LO O u STOP LAMPS Stop Lamps Connector RT TRN SZBA Right Turn Signa
129. Idling the engine with the climate control system off could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle See the earlier caution under Engine Exhaust on page 2 38 Also idling in a closed in place can let deadly carbon monoxide CO into your vehicle even if the climate control fan is at the highest setting One place this can happen is a garage Exhaust with CO can come in easily NEVER park in a garage with the engine running Another closed in place can be a blizzard See Winter Driving on page 4 22 A CAUTION It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set the parking brake after you move the shift lever to PARK P Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not move See Shifting Into PARK P on page 2 36 If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a trailer also see Towing a Trailer Vehicles With Heavy Duty Cooling on page 4 34 or Towing a Trailer Vehicles Without Heavy Duty Cooling on page 4 40 2 39 Mirrors Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with Intellibeam and OnStar Your vehicle may have an Intellibeam
130. It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you get fuel In order to get an accurate reading the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 11 for the location of the engine oil dipstick 1 Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan If you do not do this the oil dipstick might not show the actual level 2 Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth then push it back in all the way Remove it again keeping the tip down and check the level When to Add Engine Oil V6 Engine ES D V8 Engine lf the oil is below the cross hatched area at the tip of the dipstick add at least one quart liter of the recommended oil This section explains what kind of oil to use For engine oil crankcase capacity see Capacities and Specifications on page 5 128 Notice Do not add too much oil If the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross hatched area that shows the proper operating range the engine could be damaged See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 11 for the location of the Ti engine oil fill cap Mobil SAE 5W 30 Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range Push the dipstick all the way back in when you are through What Kind of Engine Oil to Use RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE
131. Lubricate all key lock cylinders Lubricate all hinges and latches including those for the hood rear compartment glove box door and console door More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak g f you drive regularly under dusty conditions the filter may require replacement more often h Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as limousine service Uses such as high performance operation i f using DOT 4 brake fluid only Drain flush and refill brake hydraulic system at a regular maintenance service every two years This service can be complex You should have your dealer retailer perform this service See Brakes on page 5 41 j Drain flush and refill cooling system This service can be complex you should have your dealer retailer perform this service See Engine Coolant on page 5 25 for what to use Inspect hoses Clean radiator condenser pressure cap and filler neck Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap k A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a problem
132. NGS e STORE EXIT SETTINGS For more information on the DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS submenu item see Recalling Exit Settings and Storing Exit Settings under Memory Seat Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2 77 CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS Base Audio System This item lets you customize the functions of the four configurable keys located to the left and right of the audio display See Configurable Radio Display Keys under Radio s MP3 on page 3 100 for programming information Theft Deterrent Feature THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your vehicle s radio The feature works automatically by JL soe learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN If the radio is moved to a different vehicle it does not operate and LOC LOCK or LOCKED could display g With THEFTLOCK activated the radio does not operate if stolen Audio Steering Wheel Controls Standard Audio Steering Audio Controls Your vehicle has audio steering wheel controls Wheel Controls and With Heated Steering They could differ depending on your vehicle s options Cruise Control Cancel Wheel and Cruise There are three versions Control Cancel On the outboard side you may have 1 SEEK SRCE Source SCAN and Cruise Control Cancel 2 SEEK SRCE Heated Steering Wheel and Cruise Control Cancel 3 SRCE Heated Steering Wheel Adaptive Cruise Control Gap and Cruise Control Cancel The inboard side controls are th
133. Notice If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle you could scratch the glass and or cause damage to the rear window defogger When cleaning the glass on your vehicle use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner Many cleaners contain solvents that may become concentrated in your vehicle s breathing space Before using cleaners read and adhere to all safety instructions on the label While cleaning your vehicle s interior maintain adequate ventilation by opening your vehicle s doors and windows Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs using a small brush with soft bristles Your dealer retailer has a product for cleaning your vehicle s glass Should it become necessary you can also obtain a product from your dealer retailer to remove odors from your vehicle s upholstery 5 107 Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners or techniques Never use a knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil from any interior surface Never use a stiff brush It can cause damage to your vehicle s interior surfaces Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively with a cleaning cloth Use of heavy pressure can damage your interior and does not improve the effectiveness of soil removal Use only mild neutral pH soaps Avoid laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers Using too much soap will leave a residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt For liquid cleaners ab
134. Passenger Sensing System on page 1 60 If you have any questions about this you should contact Customer Assistance before you modify your vehicle The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7 2 Because have a disability have to get my vehicle modified How can I find out whether this will affect my airbag system If you have questions call Customer Assistance The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7 2 In addition your dealer retailer and the service manual have information about the location of the airbag sensors sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring 1 65 Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems Safety Belts Now and then make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash They can rip apart under impact forces If a belt is torn or frayed get a new one right away Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working See Safety Belt Reminde
135. QO does not display while in this mode a Fon gt RDS Messages ALERT Alert warns of local and national emergencies When an alert announcement comes on the current radio station or a related network station ALERT displays You will hear the announcement even if the volume is low or a CD is playing If a CD is playing play stops during the announcement Alert announcements cannot be turned off If the radio tunes to a related network station for the announcement it returns to the original station when the announcement is finished ALERT is not affected by tests of the emergency broadcast system This feature is not supported by all RDS stations MSG Message If the current RDS station has a message MSG displays The message can display the artist song title call in phone numbers etc If the entire message does not display parts of the message displays every three seconds until the message is complete Once the completed message has displayed MSG disappears from the display until another new message is received To display the last message perform the following steps 1 Press the knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn this knob until RECALL RDS MESSAGE displays 3 Press the same knob and the message displays Once the message displays MSG disappears from the display until another new message is received TP Traffic Program TP displays when the radio detects a signal from an RDS station that has traffic
136. RSE R anda five second delay has occurred the mirror will return to its original position The delay prevents movement of the mirror if multiple gear transitions REVERSE R to DRIVE D to REVERSE R occur during a parallel parking maneuver Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA system see Side Blind Zone Alert in the Index of your vehicle s navigation system manual Object Detection Systems Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA system it helps you park easier and avoid other vehicles while in REVERSE R It operates at speeds less than 3 mph 5 km h It can determine how close objects are to the rear bumper up to 5 feet 1 5 m behind your vehicle The distance sensors are located on the rear bumper ACAUTION The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA system does not replace driver vision It cannot detect objects that are below the bumper underneath the vehicle or if they are too close or far from the vehicle children pedestrians bicyclists or pets CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued If you do not use proper care before and while backing vehicle damage injury or death could occur Even with URPA always check behind your vehicle before backing up While backing be sure to look for objects and check your vehicle s mirrors The display is located in the dome la
137. STABILITY COMPETITIVE MODE message To turn traction control off while in the Stability Touring Mode press the traction control button briefly and the traction control system warning light will come on See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 6 To turn traction control on while in the Stability Touring Mode press the traction control button briefly and the traction control system warning light will turn off Panic Brake Assist Your vehicle has a panic brake assist system that monitors the intention of the driver while braking If the system senses that the driver has applied hard fast pressure to the brake pedal the system will generate additional pressure making it easier for the driver to maintain brake application When this happens the brake pedal will feel easier to push Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let the system work for you You may feel the brakes vibrate or you may notice some noise but this is normal The brakes will return to normal operation after the brake pedal has been released All Wheel Drive AWD System lf your vehicle has this feature engine power is sent to all four wheels all the time This is like four wheel drive but it is fully automatic Steering Power Steering lf you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning you can steer but it will take much more effort Speed Variable Assist Steering Your vehicle has a steering syste
138. See KEYLESS FT Front DOOR UNLOCK and KEYLESS DOORS UNLOCK later in this section for more information Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON default Mode 2 OFF 2 68 To program the vehicle to a different mode 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until LIGHTS FLASH AT LOCK is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name You can select this feature by itself or you can combine it with Horn Chirps At Lock so that both the exterior lamps flash and the horn chirps when you lock your vehicle The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle EXT Exterior LIGHTS AT UNLOCK This feature turns on the exterior lamps when the keyless access transmitter is used to unlock the vehicle The lamps will remain on for about 20 seconds unless a door is opened the ignition is in ACCESSORY on or START or the keyless access transmitter is used to lock the vehicle Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON default Mode 2 OFF To program the vehicle to a different mode 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously unde
139. Star button or calling 1 888 4 ONSTAR 1 888 466 7827 2 49 OnStar Virtual Advisor OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar Hands Free Calling that uses your minutes to access location based weather local traffic reports and stock quotes By pressing the phone button and giving a few simple voice commands you can browse through the various topics See the OnStar Owner s Guide for more information Only available in the continental U S OnStar Steering Wheel Controls Your vehicle may have a Talk Mute button that can be used to interact with OnStar Hands Free Calling See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3 121 for more information On some vehicles you may have to hold the button for a few seconds and give the command ONSTAR to activate the OnStar Hands Free Calling On some vehicles the mute button can be used to dial numbers into voicemail systems or to dial phone extensions See the OnStar Owner s Guide for more information 2 50 How OnStar Service Works Your vehicle s OnStar system has the capability of recording and transmitting vehicle information This information is automatically sent to an OnStar Call Center at the time of an OnStar button press Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACN system deploys The vehicle information usually includes your GPS location and in the event of a crash additional information regarding the accident that your vehicle has been involved in
140. Steering on page 4 13 for more information Have the steering system inspected by your dealer retailer as soon as possible If the SERVICE STEERING SYS message appears because the Active Steering system needs service normal power steering is still operational However compared to Active Steering normal power steering requires a larger degree of steering wheel input at low vehicle speeds and a smaller degree of steering wheel input at high vehicle speeds The center position of the steering wheel may be different You may continue to drive your vehicle with normal power steering but have the steering system inspected by your dealer retailer as soon as possible 3 92 If the Active Steering system needs service the system may be operating in the Stability Secure Mode and the STABILITY SECURE MODE message will display See Enhanced StabiliTrak on page 4 9 When certain steering faults are present the vehicle speed may be limited If vehicle speed is limited the SPEED LIMITED TO XXX message will display See Active Steering under Steering on page 4 13 SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS System This message displays when the suspension system is not operating properly Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer If your All Wheel Drive AWD vehicle has the Active Steering with Enhanced StabiliTrak option and the suspension system needs service the Enhanced StabiliTrak system may be operating in the Stability Secu
141. Ventilated Seats on page 1 3 X Air Conditioning Press this button to manually turn off the air conditioning compressor Press AUTO to return to automatic operation To limit fogging on the windshield the air conditioning compressor cannot be off while in the defrost mode 3 51 Sensors There is a solar sensor located on the instrument panel near the windshield There is also an interior temperature sensor located next to the steering wheel on the instrument panel These sensors monitor the solar radiation and the air inside the vehicle then use the information to adjust the temperature the fan speed and the air delivery system in order to maintain the selected temperature 3 52 The system may also supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun Do not cover the sensors or the automatic climate control system will not work properly Defogging and Defrosting Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity moisture condensing on the cool window glass This can be minimized if the climate control system is used properly There are two modes to clear fog from the windshield Use the defog mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly NAV Mode Press this button until defog appears on the display N Defog This mode directs the air between the windshield and floor outlets with som
142. Your Driving the Road and Drunk Driving Your Vehicle os A CAUTION Defensive Driving Defensive driving means always expect the Drinking and then driving is very dangerous unexpected The first step in driving defensively is to Your reflexes perceptions attentiveness and wear your safety belt See Safety Belts They Are for judgment can be affected by even a small Everyone on page 1 8 amount of alcohol You can have a serious or even fatal collision if you drive after drinking A CAUTION Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking Ride home in a cab or if you Assume that other road users pedestrians bicyclists and other drivers are going to be are with a group designate a driver who will not drink careless and make mistakes Anticipate what they might do and be ready In addition Allow enough following distance between you and the driver in front of you Focus on the task of driving Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in injury or possible death These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a global tragedy Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle judgment muscular coordination vision and attentiveness Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor vehicle related deaths involve alcohol In most cases these deaths are the resul
143. abiliTrak or Enhanced StabiliTrak is turned off using the TC traction control on off button See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 6 and Enhanced StabiliTrak and Traction Control Mode Selection under Enhanced StabiliTrak on page 4 9 for more information When this message has been displayed StabiliTrak or Enhanced StabiliTrak is no longer available to assist with directional control of the vehicle Adjust your driving accordingly See StabiliTrak System on page 4 8 or Enhanced StabiliTrak on page 4 9 for more information STABILITY SYS System READY This message displays any time StabiliTrak is turned back on using the TC traction control on off button See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 6 for more information When this message has been displayed StabiliTrak is ready to assist with directional control of the vehicle if needed See StabiliTrak System on page 4 8 for more information STABILITY TOURING MODE If your All Wheel Drive AWD vehicle has the Active Steering with Enhanced StabiliTrak option this message displays when the Stability Touring Mode is re activated by using the traction control button after Driving in the Stability Competitive Mode The stability control system is turned off by the driver This message may also display after exiting STABILITY SECURE MODE when certain system faults or vehicle conditions have been cleared See Enhanced StabiliTrak on page 4 9
144. ace available An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o clock positions you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand But you have to act fast steer quickly and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly 4 15 Off Road Recovery You may find that your vehicle s right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are driving If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement recovery should be fairly easy Ease off the accelerator and then if there is nothing in the way steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement You can turn the steering wheel up to one quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge Then turn the steering wheel to go straight down the roadway 4 16 Passing Passing another vehicle on a two lane road can be dangerous To reduce the risk of danger while passing we suggest the following tips e Look down the road to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect a successful pass If in doubt wait Watch for traffic signs pavement markings and lines that could indicate a turn or an intersecti
145. ached Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1 36 for additional information Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System ACAUTION If a LATCH type child restraint is not attached to anchors the restraint will not be able to protect the child correctly In a crash the child could be seriously injured or killed Make sure that a LATCH type child restraint is properly installed using the anchors or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint following the instructions that came with that restraint and also the instructions in this manual ACAUTION Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in the vehicle is designed to hold only one child restraint Attaching more than one child restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or even break during a crash A child or others could be injured if this happens To help prevent injury to people and damage to your vehicle attach only one child restraint per anchor 1 41 A CAUTION Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten Secure any unused safety belts behind the child restraint so children cannot reach them Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock if your vehicle has one
146. ad conditions and quicker steering response For more information see Active Steering and Magnetic Ride Control Mode in the Index of the vehicle s Navigation Manual To assist you with directional control of the vehicle always leave the system on Stability control can be turned off however by using the traction control button See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 6 The STABILITY SYS OFF message will be displayed on the DIC See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 If there is a problem detected with Enhanced StabiliTrak the SERVICE STABILITY SYS message will be displayed on the DIC See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 When this message is displayed the system is not operating Driving should be adjusted accordingly When certain faults or vehicle conditions are detected the Stability control will automatically go into a secure mode and the STABILITY SECURE MODE message will be displayed on the DIC When the Stability Secure Mode is activated the stability control system will not respond to driver requests to change the stability mode until the next ignition cycle or until the vehicle condition or fault is returned to normal When the Stability Secure Mode is activated you may see other messages such as SERVICE STEERING SYS SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS or CHECK TIRE PRESSURE on the DIC When the Stability Secure Mode is activated a larger degree of steering wheel input at low vehicle speeds and a small
147. after the child restraint has been installed Be sure to follow the instructions of the child restraint manufacturer Notice Contact between the child restraint LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle s safety belt assembly may cause damage to these parts Make sure when securing unused safety belts behind the child restraint that there is no contact between the child restraint LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle s safety belt assembly 1 42 Folding an empty rear seat with the safety belts secured may cause damage to the safety belt or the seat When removing the child restraint always remember to return the safety belts to their normal stowed position before folding the rear seat 1 Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the lower anchors If the child restraint does not have lower attachments or the desired seating position does not have lower anchors secure the child restraint with the top tether and the safety belts Refer to your child restraint manufacturer instructions and the instructions in this manual 1 1 Find the lower anchors for the desired seating position 1 2 Put the child restraint on the seat 1 3 Attach and tighten the lower attachments on the child restraint to the lower anchors 2 If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether be attached attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor if equipped Refer to the child restraint instructions and the followi
148. age 5 29 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 for more information Engine Coolant Temperature Gage This gage shows the engine coolant temperature It can be used to see when your engine has warmed up and to make sure your cooling system is operating properly If the gage pointer moves into the shaded area the engine coolant is too hot and the engine coolant temperature warning light will come on See Engine Overheating on page 5 29 for more information Tire Pressure Light This light comes on briefly when the engine is started This light will also come on when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated A tire pressure message in the Driver Information Center DIC may accompany the light See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 for more information Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to do so If underinflated inflate to the proper pressure See Tires on page 5 57 for more information If a problem is detected with the Tire Pressure Monitor System this light will flash for approximately 60 seconds and then stay on solid for the remainder of the ignition cycle See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5 68 for more information 3 67 Malfunction Indicator Lamp Check Engine Light A computer system called OBD II On Board Diagnostics Second Generation monitors operation of the fuel ignition and emission control systems It makes sure that emissions are at acceptable leve
149. ak inside the unit and cause damage If the ignition is on and you cannot see the HUD image check to see if Something is covering the HUD unit The brightness is adjusted properly The HUD image is adjusted to the proper height Ambient light in the direction your vehicle is facing is low A fuse is blown See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5 117 3 46 The windshield is part of the HUD system See Windshield Replacement on page 5 55 The following Adaptive Cruise Control message may appear in the HUD The PEDAL APPLIED ACC OVERRIDE message indicates that you are pressing your foot on the accelerator pedal and overriding Adaptive Cruise Control While this is being done the system will not automatically apply the brakes Once you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Adaptive Cruise Control will return to normal operation and be able to apply the brakes if needed An Adaptive Cruise Control active symbol alert symbol or vehicle ahead symbol may also appear See Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3 20 for more information Accessory Power Outlet s Your vehicle is equipped with accessory power outlets The outlets can be used to plug in electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone CB radio etc Your vehicle has one outlet in front of the center console one in the center console lid and there may be an additional outlet in the rear of the center console Your vehicle may have a small cap tha
150. ake about one minute for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is light outside 3 37 During that delay the instrument panel cluster may not be as bright as usual Make sure the instrument panel brightness lever is in the full bright position See Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3 41 To operate your vehicle with the DRL off turn the exterior lamp control off and then do one of the following Turn the exterior lamp control to the parking lamp position Turn the exterior lamp control to the headlamp position Turn the exterior lamp control from AUTO to off and back to AUTO An AUTOMATIC LIGHTS OFF message will appear on the DIC showing that automatic lighting has been disabled See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 The regular headlamp system should be turned on when needed 3 38 Light Sensor The light sensor for the DRL is located on top of the instrument panel If the sensor is covered it will read dark and the exterior lamps may come on when they are not needed Fog Lamps Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty conditions The fog lamp controls are located on the turn signal multifunction lever 30 Fog Lamps The band with this symbol is used to turn the fog lamps on and off The parking lamps must be on for the fog lamps to work To turn the fog lamps on turn the fog lamp band on the lever up to the dot and release it The band will return to its or
151. ake the vehicle to your dealer retailer for service 5 53 Bulb Replacement Halogen Bulbs For the proper type of replacement bulbs see Replacement Bulbs on page 5 55 eee A CAUTION For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section contact your dealer retailer Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and i A can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb You or High Intensity Discharge HID others could be injured Be sure to read and Lighting follow the instructions on the bulb package A CAUTION Back Up Lamps The low beam high intensity discharge lighting To replace a back up lamp bulb system operates at a very high voltage If you 1 Open the trunk See Trunk on page 2 16 for more try to service any of the system components information you could be seriously injured Have your dealer retailer or a qualified technician service them Your vehicle has HID headlamps After your vehicle s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced you may notice that the beam is a slightly different shade than it was originally This is normal 5 54 Pull out the push pins holding down the top portion of the cloth cover Fold the cover down slightly and locate the lamp assembly Turn the socket counterclockwise and pull it straight out to remove it from the lamp assembly Pull the old bulb straight out and reinstall the new bulb Reverse the steps to reinstall Replacement Bulbs Exterior La
152. anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached 1 48 You will be using the lap shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position Follow the instructions that came with the child restraint 1 Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward facing child restraint When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger s frontal airbag the off indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 61 2 Put the child restraint on the seat 3 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how 4 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks 5 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of Make sure the release button is positioned so you the retractor to set the lock would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if necessary 1 49 6 To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
153. and transmission in NEUTRAL N slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only To check the PARK P mechanism s holding ability With the engine running shift to PARK P Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake Contact your dealer retailer if service is required Underbody Flushing Service At least every spring use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect Recommended Fluids and Usage Fuser Lubricants 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable Engine Cooling water and use only DEX COOL Fluids and lubricants identified below by name part System Coolant See Engine Coolant on number or specification can be obtained from your page 5 25 dealer retailer Usage Fluid Lubricant The engine requires a special engine oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M Oils meeting this standard can be identified as synthetic and should also be identified with the American Petroleum Institute API Certified Engine Oil for Gasoline Engines starburst symbol However not all synthetic API oils with the starburst symbol will meet this GM standard Look for and use only oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M For the proper viscosity see Engine Oil on page 5 18 Intercooler System 50 50 mixture of clean 4 4L V8 drinkable water and use only k
154. anic Alarm Press and release amp to locate your vehicle The horn will chirp three times and the turn signal lamps will flash three times Press and hold 2 for three seconds to sound the panic alarm The horn will chirp and the turn signal lamps will flash for 30 seconds Press and release amp again to cancel the panic alarm Matching Transmitter s to Your Vehicle Each Keyless Access System is coded to allow only transmitters programmed to your vehicle to work If a transmitter is lost or stolen a replacement can be purchased and programmed through your dealer retailer Your dealer retailer can reprogram your vehicle so lost or stolen transmitters no longer work with your vehicle Each vehicle can have a maximum of four transmitters Two recognized transmitters are required for Canadian owners To match a new transmitter to your vehicle when you have a recognized transmitter 1 The vehicle must be off 2 Have the recognized transmitter and the new unrecognized transmitter s with you 3 Insert the vehicle key into the key lock cylinder located on the outside of the driver s door 4 Turn the key to the unlock position five times within five seconds 5 The Driver Information Center DIC will display READY FOR FOB X where X can be 2 3 or 4 6 Place the new unrecognized transmitter into the transmitter pocket with the transmitter buttons facing the front of the vehicle The transmitter pocket is inside
155. ant speed fast or slow for the first 500 miles 805 km Do not make full throttle starts Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles 322 km or so During this time the new brake linings are not yet broken in Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement Follow this breaking in guideline every time you get new brake linings Do not tow a trailer during break in See Towing a Trailer Vehicles With Heavy Duty Cooling on page 4 34 or Towing a Trailer Vehicles Without Heavy Duty Cooling on page 4 40 for the trailer towing capabilities of your vehicle and more information Following break in engine speed and load can be gradually increased 2 27 Ignition Positions Your vehicle has an electronic keyless ignition with pushbutton start ENGINE O Acc e e To shift out of PARK P the vehicle must be running or in ACCESSORY mode and the regular brake pedal must be applied Q START Press this button while your foot is on the brake to start the engine The shifter must be in PARK P or NEUTRAL N to start the engine and the keyless access transmitter must be in the vehicle for the ignition to work 2 28 O Acc OFF ACCESSORY When this button is pressed the engine will turn off even if the shifter is not in PARK P If the shifter is in PARK P the ignition mode will change to RAP if all doors are closed The igniti
156. anual Transmission Fluid All Wheel GM Part No U S 88861800 Drive in Canada 88861801 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name part number or specification can be obtained from your dealer retailer et GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number 25735505 or 25798271 A290440 A30780 PF21209 4 4L V Series Engine PF26 Pre CF130 47 990 4 4L V Series Engine 41 991 41 987 Driver s Side 22 inches 56 5 cm Passenger s Side 21 inches 53 0 cm 1 Notice If your vehicle is an STS V model the engine uses a special oil filter The use of any other engine oil filter could lead to filter failure and result in severe engine damage Damage caused by use of the wrong engine oil filter would not be covered by your new vehicle warranty Engine Drive Belt Routing 3 6L V6 Engine 4 4L V8 Engine 4 6L V8 Engine Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed record the date odometer reading who performed the service and the type of services performed in the boxes provided See Maintenance Requirements on page 6 2 Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6 9 can be added on the following record pages You should retain all maintenance receipts Maintenance Record Odometer i Date Giaa Serviced By Maintenance Stamp Services Performed Maintenance Record cont d Maintenance Record cont d 6 20 Section
157. ap properly installed should turn the light off Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water If so your vehicle s electrical system might be wet The condition is usually corrected when the electrical system dries out A few driving trips should turn the light off Have you recently changed brands of fuel If so be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel See Gasoline Octane on page 5 5 Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently as designed You might notice this as stalling after start up stalling when you put the vehicle into gear misfiring hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration these conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on If you experience one or more of these conditions change the fuel brand you use It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off If none of the above steps have made the light turn off your dealer retailer can check the vehicle Your dealer retailer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have developed 3 69 Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Some state provincial and local governments have or might begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registratio
158. aptive Cruise Control apply the brake If no vehicle is in your path your vehicle will react like traditional cruise control A CAUTION Adaptive Cruise Control will not apply hard braking or bring the vehicle to a complete stop It will not respond to stopped vehicles pedestrians or animals When you are approaching a vehicle or object Adaptive Cruise Control may not have time to slow your vehicle enough to avoid a collision Your complete attention is always required while driving and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes For more information see Defensive Driving on page 4 2 A CAUTION e On slippery roads fast changes in e On winding roads Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect a vehicle ahead You could crash into a vehicle ahead of you Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control on winding roads Adaptive Cruise Control may not have time to slow your vehicle enough to avoid a crash when you are driving in conditions where vehicles may suddenly slow or stop ahead of you enter your lane or cross your vehicle s path If you are driving in these conditions do not use Adaptive Cruise Control The warning beep and alert symbol may indicate that you are driving in conditions where Adaptive Cruise Control should not be used See Alerting the Driver in this section CAUTION Continued tire traction can cause needless wheel spinning and you could lose control Do not use cruise control o
159. ar defogger and the seat temperature if your vehicle has this feature Activating these features helps provide a more comfortable vehicle upon entry See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2 12 for more information Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON default Mode 2 OFF To program the vehicle to a different mode 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until REMOTE START is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth between on and off When REMOTE START is on a check mark will appear next to the feature name You can then choose to activate any or all of the following features by turning the tune select knob to highlight the feature then pressing the knob to turn it on 2 64 CLIMATE CONTROL The climate control system will engage when the vehicle is started using the remote start feature It will be at the same climate control setting that was last used by the driver using that keyless entry transmitter REAR WINDOW DEFOG If this feature is active the rear defogger will engage when the vehicle is started using the remote start feature SEAT TEMP Temperature CONTROL If your vehicle has this feature and this feature is active the seats will be heated or cooled when the vehicle is started using the remote start feature The mode you selected is now set You can either exit
160. are locked If a rear passenger needs to exit the vehicle have that person use the manual knob or use the power door lock switch on either front door When the door is closed again it will not lock automatically Use the manual knob or the power door lock switch to lock the door The doors were also programmed from the factory to unlock every time the shift lever is moved back into PARK P The power door locks can be programmed through the radio display The radio display allows you to choose various lock and unlock settings For more information on programming see Vehicle Personalization on page 2 60 Rear Door Security Locks Your vehicle has rear door security locks These prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside The rear door security locks are located on the inside edge of each rear door The rear doors must be open to access them The label showing lock and unlock positions is located near the lock Lock Label shown To set the locks do the following 1 Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it so the slot is in the horizontal position 2 Close the door When you want to open a rear door when the security lock is on do the following 1 Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry transmitter if the vehicle has one the power door lock switch or the rear door manual lock 2 Open the door from the outside To cancel the rear door security lock do the following
161. arnings and Messages on page 3 80 for more information 3 73 Driver Information Center DIC The Driver Information Center DIC gives you the status of many of your vehicle s systems The DIC is also used to display warning status messages All messages will appear in the DIC display located at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster below the tachometer and speedometer The DIC buttons are located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel The DIC comes on when the ignition is on After a short delay the DIC will display the current driver and the information that was last displayed before the engine was turned off The top line of the DIC display shows the vehicle system information and the warning status messages The bottom line of the DIC display shows either the odometer the trip odometer A or the trip odometer B information on the left side Only one odometer can appear at a time See Trip Information under DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 74 for information on changing the display to show the odometer or trip odometer information The bottom line of the DIC display also shows the outside temperature on the right side and the shift lever position indicator in the center See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2 32 for more information on the shift lever positions 3 74 When the sport mode is active an S will appear next to the shift position indicator on the center of the DIC disp
162. ary See Engine Coolant on page 5 25 Intercooler Coolant Level Check 4 4L Supercharged Engine Check the coolant level and add DEX COOL coolant mixture if necessary See Engine Coolant on page 5 25 Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if necessary See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 40 At Least Once a Month Tire Inflation Check Inspect your vehicle s tires and make sure they are inflated to the correct pressures Do not forget to check the spare tire See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 66 Check to make sure the spare tire is stored securely See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 96 Tire Wear Inspection Tire rotation is recommended if your vehicle has the same size tires at all four wheel positions and may be required for high mileage highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service notification Check the tires for wear and if necessary rotate the tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 73 At Least Once a Year Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System Check ACAUTION Starter Switch Check ACAUTION When you are doing this inspection the vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle moves you or others could be injured When you are doing this inspection the vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle moves you or others could be injured 1 Before you
163. as been turned off See the Index in the Navigation manual and DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 74 for more information SPEED LIMITED TO XXX This message displays when the vehicle speed is limited to XXX mph in English mode and km h in Metric mode because the vehicle detects a problem in the steering stability control or suspension system Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer 3 93 STABILITY COMPETITIVE MODE If your All Wheel Drive AWD vehicle has the Active Steering with Enhanced StabiliTrak option this message displays when the Competitive Mode for stability control has been turned on using the TC traction control button See Enhanced StabiliTrak on page 4 9 When the Enhanced StabiliTrak Competitive Mode has been activated traction control operates in competitive mode and cannot be turned off Also the Active Steering and the Magnetic Ride Control systems operate in the Performance Mode For more information see Active Steering and Magnetic Ride Control in the Index in the Navigation manual STABILITY SECURE MODE If your All Wheel Drive AWD vehicle has the Active Steering with Enhanced StabiliTrak option this message displays when the stability control system is in the secure mode Stability Secure Mode is set automatically when certain system faults or vehicle conditions are detected When the Stability Secure Mode is activated the stability control system will not respond
164. assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty repairs are required Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information Transportation Options Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait However if you are unable to wait GM helps to minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options Depending on the circumstances your dealer can offer you one of the following Shuttle Service Participating dealers can provide shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule This includes one way or round trip shuttle service to a destination up to 10 miles 16 km from the dealership Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires warranty repairs and public transportation is used instead of the dealer s shuttle service the expense must be supported by original receipts and can only be up to the maximum amount allowed by GM for shuttle service In addition for U S customers should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative limited reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be available Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts See your dealer for information regarding the allowance amounts
165. astened How far if at all the driver was pressing the accelerator and or brake pedal e How fast the vehicle was traveling This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur Important EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data e g name gender age and crash location is recorded However other parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equipment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR GM will not access this data or share it with others except with the consent of the vehicle owner or if the vehicle is leased with the consent of the lessee in response to an official request of police or similar government office as part of GM s defense of litigation through the discovery process or as required by law Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for GM research needs or may be made available to others for research purposes where a need is shown and the data is not tied to a specific
166. ation label See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 26 Then be sure you do not go over the GVW limit for your vehicle including the weight of the trailer tongue Hitches It is important to have the correct hitch equipment Crosswinds large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you will need the right hitch Here are some rules to follow The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for hitches Do not attach rental hitches or other bumper type hitches to it Use only a frame mounted hitch that does not attach to the bumper Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch If you do then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the hitch If you do not seal them deadly carbon monoxide CO from your exhaust can get into your vehicle See Engine Exhaust on page 2 38 Dirt and water can also enter the vehicle Safety Chains You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if it becomes separated from the hitch Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer Follow the manufacturer s recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig And never allow safety chains to drag on the ground
167. ation radio system The navigation system has built in features intended to minimize driver distraction Technology alone no matter how advanced can never replace your own judgment See the Navigation System manual for some tips to help you reduce distractions while driving Radio Personalization Accessing the Radio s Main Menu Base Audio System There are two different procedures for accessing the radio s main menu depending upon whether or not your vehicle has the Navigation system To access the main menu of the radio do one of the following Using the Base audio system press the CNFG button located on the radio or press the tune knob located on the right side of the radio Then turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to scroll through the menu items e If your vehicle has the Navigation system see the Navigation System manual supplied with your vehicle for more information on accessing the main menu and for descriptions of the menu items for the Navigation system The main menu for the Base audio system consists of the following menu items e amp BASS MID TREBLE e lt BALANCE FADER amp EQ EQUALIZER H A HOME AWAY PRESETS AUTOSTORE PRESETS e CAT CATEGORY TA TRAFFIC ANNOUNCE RECALL RDS Radio Data System MESSAGE e SEEK LOCAL DISTANT e SET CLOCK e 31 SET DATE e i INFO Information LANG LANGUAGE e SETUP 3 117 Radio Main Menu Item Descriptions Base Aud
168. ature is active The automatic dimming feature is active each time the vehicle is started Cleaning the Mirror When cleaning the mirror use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar and Compass Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview mirror with a compass display The mirror also contains OnStar controls For more information see OnStar System on page 2 48 The mirror includes an eight point compass display in the upper right corner of the mirror face When on the compass automatically calibrates as the vehicle is driven Mirror Operation D On Off Press and hold the button located on the lower left side of the mirror face for about three seconds to turn the automatic dimming feature on or off The indicator light will illuminate when this feature is active The automatic dimming feature is active each time the vehicle is started Compass Operation Press the on off button once to turn the compass on or off When the ignition and the compass feature are on the compass will show two character boxes for about two seconds After two seconds the mirror will display the compass heading Compass Calibration If after two seconds the display does not show a compass heading for example N for North there may be a strong
169. axle See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 26 Intended Outboard Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle Kilopascal kPa The metric unit for air pressure Light Truck LT Metric Tire A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles Load Index An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall Maximum Load Rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight The sum of curb weight accessory weight vehicle capacity weight and production options weight Normal Occupant Weight The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 Ibs 68 kg See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 26 5 63 Occupant Distribution Designated seating positions Outward Facing Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle The side of the tire that contains a whitewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of the tire Passenger P Metric Tire A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty
170. ay affect the way your vehicle performs including its braking ride and handling characteristics stability and resistance to rollover Additionally if your vehicle has electronic systems such as anti lock brakes traction control and electronic stability control the performance of these systems can be affected 5 78 A CAUTION If you add different sized wheels your vehicle may not provide an acceptable level of performance and safety if tires not recommended for those wheels are selected You may increase the chance that you will crash and suffer serious injury Only use GM specific wheel and tire systems developed for your vehicle and have them properly installed by a GM certified technician See Buying New Tires on page 5 76 and Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 for additional information Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA which grades tires by treadwear traction and temperature performance This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires The Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG system does not apply to deep tread winter type snow
171. ay be blocking the signal Take a few steps to the left or right hold the transmitter higher and try again Check to determine if battery replacement is necessary See Battery Replacement under Keyless Access System Operation on page 2 6 Check to make sure that an electronic device such as a cellular phone or lap top computer is not causing interference If you are still having trouble see your dealer retailer or a qualified technician for service Keyless Access System Operation Your vehicle has a Keyless Access System that lets you lock and unlock your vehicle s doors open the trunk lid remotely start the engine and locate your vehicle or sound your vehicle s alarm from a distance as much as 30 feet 10 m away The Keyless Access System also lets you lock and unlock the vehicle s doors and access the trunk without removing the remote transmitter from your pocket purse briefcase etc The system operates when the transmitter is located within 3 feet 1 m of the door or trunk of your vehicle See Keyless Doors Unlock and Keyless Ft Front Door Unlock under Vehicle Personalization on page 2 60 Your vehicle comes with two transmitters Lock Press once to lock the doors The lock status light on the front doors will turn on for five seconds and the turn signal indicators will flash If is pressed twice the doors will lock the status light on the door will turn on for five seco
172. ber make sure they are the same size load range speed rating and construction type radial and bias belted tires as your vehicle s original tires Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system could give an inaccurate low pressure warning if non TPC Spec rated tires are installed on it Non TPC Spec rated tires may give a low pressure warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5 68 5 77 Your vehicle s original equipment tires are listed on the Tire and Loading Information label See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 26 for more information about the Tire and Loading Information label and its location on your vehicle Vehicles that have performance tires P235 50R17 95V front axle and P255 45R17 98V rear axle are mounted on wheels with different rim widths The front axle tires are mounted on rims 7 5 inches 19 05 cm wide and the rear axle tires require wheels with a minimum rim width of 8 inches 20 32 cm The original equipment wheels designed for P255 45R17 98V size tires are etched with the words REAR ONLY When replacing P255 45R17 98V size tires have them mounted on wheels with a minimum width of 8 inches 20 32 cm and marked REAR ONLY See Wheel Replacement on page 5 80 Different Size Tires and Wheels If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than your original equipment wheels and tires this m
173. blink rapidly until programming is complete 8 Press and release the same button again The garage door should move confirming that programming is successful and complete To program another Fixed Code device such as an additional garage door opener a security device or home automation device repeat Steps 1 8 choosing a different button in Step 6 than what you used for the garage door opener Using Universal Home Remote Press and hold the appropriate button for at least half of a second The indicator light will come on while the signal is being transmitted Reprogramming Universal Home Remote Buttons You can reprogram any of the three buttons by repeating the instructions Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons You should erase the programmed buttons when you sell or terminate your lease To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the Universal Home Remote device 1 Press and hold the two outside buttons at the same time for approximately 20 seconds until the indicator lights located directly above the buttons begin to blink rapidly 2 Once the indicator lights begin to blink release both buttons The codes from all buttons will be erased For help or information on the Universal Home Remote System call the customer assistance phone number under Customer Assistance Offices on page 7 5 2 57 Storage Areas Glove Box To open the glove box lift up on the lever Cupholder s Your vehicle has t
174. cases inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle When you carry something inside the vehicle secure it whenever you can Do not leave a seat folded down unless you need to Towing Towing Your Vehicle Consult your dealer retailer or a professional towing service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed See Roadside Service on page 7 6 If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes such as behind a motorhome see Recreational Vehicle Towing following Recreational Vehicle Towing Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle behind another vehicle such as behind a motorhome The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as dinghy towing towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground and dolly towing towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a dolly With the proper preparation and equipment many vehicles can be towed in these ways See Dinghy Towing and Dolly Towing following Here are some important things to consider before you do recreational vehicle towing What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer s recommendations How far will you tow Some vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long they can tow
175. cated to the inside of the headlamps To wash the headlamps press the washer button located at the end of the windshield wiper lever Both the headlamps and the windshield will be washed After the first wash the headlamps will be washed after the fifth press of the windshield washer button The headlamps must be on to be washed If the headlamps are off only the windshield will be washed when the washer button is pressed If the washer fluid is low the headlamp washers will not work See Windshield Washer on page 3 16 for additional information Cruise Control These controls are located on the end of the multifunction lever O Off Move to this position to turn the system off On Move to this position to turn on the system Resume Accelerate Move to this position to make the vehicle resume a previously set speed or to accelerate when cruise is already active Oy Set Decrease Press this button to set the speed or to decrease the speed when cruise is already active With cruise control a speed of about 25 mph 40 km h or more can be maintained without keeping your foot on the accelerator This can really help on long trips Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph 40 km h If you apply your brakes the cruise control shuts off A CAUTION Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed So do not use your cruise control on winding roads o
176. cations Ordering Information on page 7 15 5 24 A CAUTION Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off can cause you or others to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it helps to stop flames if the engine backfires If it is not there and the engine backfires you could be burned Do not drive with it off and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner filter off Notice If the air cleaner filter is off a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire And dirt can easily get into your engine which will damage it Always have the air cleaner filter in place when you are driving Automatic Transmission Fluid How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss If a leak occurs take the vehicle to the dealer retailer service department and have it repaired as soon as possible There is a special procedure for checking and changing the transmission fluid Because this procedure is difficult you should have this done at the dealership service department Contact your dealer for additional information or the procedure can be found in the service manual To purchase a service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 15 Notice Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage your vehicle and the damages may not be covered by your warranty Always
177. ccessory power outlet and unscrew the inflating hose from the tire valve See Roadside Service on page 7 6 9 Push the sealant and compressor kit switch to the O off position 10 11 12 13 14 The tire is not sealed and will continue to leak air until the vehicle is driven and the sealant is distributed in the tire Steps 11 through 18 must be done right after Step 10 Unplug the air compressor accessory plug from the accessory power outlet in the vehicle Disconnect the sealant filling hose from the tire valve stem by turning it counterclockwise and replace the tire valve stem cap Be careful when handling the tire inflator components as they may be hot after usage Wrap the sealant filling hose around the air compressor channel to stow it in its original location Stow the air compressor accessory plug back in the air compressor To do this wrap the air compressor accessory plug snap in the plug and then push in the bottom and then the top of the wrapped air compressor accessory plug 5 91 15 If the flat tire was able to inflate to the recommended inflation pressure remove the maximum speed label from the sealant canister Place it in a highly visible location such as the inside of the upper left corner of the windshield or to the face of the radio clock The maximum speed label reminds you to drive cautiously and not to exceed 55 mph 90 km h until you have the damaged tire inspec
178. ce Footnotes seeecsecserereernrererene 6 8 Maintenance Record c ceeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 6 18 Maintenance Requirements ceeeeeeeee ees 6 2 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts 6 15 Owner Checks and Services 0eeeeeeeee 6 9 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 6 13 Scheduled Maintenance cceeeeeeeeeeee ees 6 4 USING h ne nens RR See en ER E eeneamennunadaim 6 3 Your Vehicle and the Environment 6 2 Malfunction Indicator Light cceeeeeeeee eee 3 68 Manual USING cceeeeeee ee ec ee aea aa iil Memory Mirmors senorde aE E 2 77 Memory Seal ics sid gior ne ninaa aen e E aE iai 2 77 Memory Steering Wheel Controls 1 1 2 77 Message DIC Warnings and Messages 0 eeeeeeee 3 80 Mirrors Automatic Dimming Rearview 2 40 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with Intellibeam and OnStar ses 2 40 Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar 2 40 Mirrors cont Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar and Compass n 2 41 Manual Rearview Mirror with Compass and Temperature ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteenee 1 7 Memory areires E E 2 77 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror 2 44 Outside Convex Mirror ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 44 Outside Parallel Park Assist Mirror 2 44 Outside Power Heated Mirrors 6 0020 2 43 MPS EE T 3 112
179. cept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation 5 69 The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS operates on a radio frequency and complies with RSS 210 of Industry and Science Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment Tire Pressure Monitor Operation The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS is designed to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition exists TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly excluding the spare tire and wheel assembly The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the vehicle s tires and transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle 5 70 When a low tire pressure condition is detected the TPMS illuminates the low tire pressure warning light located on the instrument panel cluster At the same time a message to check the pressure in a specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center DIC display The low tire pressure warning light and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure Using the DIC tire pressure leve
180. cessary When a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used test a small hidden area for colorfastness first If the locally cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation may result clean the entire surface After the cleaning process has been completed a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the fabric or carpet Leather A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to remove dust If a more thorough cleaning is necessary a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used Allow the leather to dry naturally Do not use heat to dry Never use steam to clean leather Never use spot lifters or spot removers on leather Many commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect leather may permanently change the appearance and feel of your leather and are not recommended Do not use silicone or wax based products or those containing organic solvents to clean your vehicle s interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non uniform manner Never use shoe polish on leather Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove dust If a more thorough cleaning is necessary a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used to gently remove dust and dirt Never use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to pr
181. ch as climate control settings radio and XM preset settings exterior lighting at unlock and remote lock unlock confirmation and language have already been programmed for your convenience Your vehicle also has an automatic door locking feature that is always on You cannot turn the automatic door locking feature off See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2 15 Some vehicles have additional features that can be programmed including the seat steering column and outside rearview mirror position 2 60 If your vehicle has the base audio system the following information explains the vehicle personalization on your vehicle If your vehicle has the Navigation system see Personalization in the Index of the Navigation System manual for information on vehicle personalization If your vehicle has the ability to program additional personalization features the driver s preferences are recalled by pressing any button on the keyless access transmitter 1 or 2 by selecting Driver 1 or 2 on the radio display or when a valid keyless access transmitter is detected upon opening the driver s door If more than one valid keyless access transmitter is detected upon opening the driver s door the driver preferences for the lowest driver number will be recalled Certain features can be programmed not to recall until the ignition is turned off The default settings for the personalization features were set when your vehicle lef
182. chains that are the proper size for your tires Install them on the rear tires and tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer s instructions If you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle stop and retighten them If the contact continues slow down until it stops Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle Lifting Your Vehicle STS V 7 Z CAUTION 3 With your right foot still holding the brake pedal down set the parking brake with your left foot Lifting a vehicle can cause an injury The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you or other people You and they could be badly injured Find a level place to lift your vehicle To help prevent the vehicle from moving 4 Turn off the engine To be even more certain the vehicle will not move you can put blocks in front of and behind the wheels Also see Shifting Into PARK P on page 2 36 and Parking Brake on 1 Hold the brake pedal down with your page 2 35 for additional information right foot 2 Move the shift lever in PARK P by pressing the button on the front of the shift lever while pushing the lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle Release the button CAUTION Continued 5 83 A CAUTION Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed N
183. ck with your dealer retailer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle Fuel Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the proper maintenance of your vehicle To help keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN shows the code letter or number that identifies your vehicle s engine The VIN is at the top left of the instrument panel See Vehicle Identification Number VIN on page 5 116 Gasoline Octane If your vehicle has the 3 6L V6 engine VIN Code V use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 87 or higher If the octane rating is less than 87 you might notice an audible knocking noise when you drive commonly referred to as spark knock If this occurs Use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking the engine needs service If your vehicle has the 4 6L V8 engine VIN Code A use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 91 or higher You can also use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher but your vehicle s acceleration could be slightly reduced and you might notice a slight audible knocking noise commonly referred to as spark knock If the octane is less than 87 you might notice a heavy knocking noi
184. completely 3 87 NO FOBS DETECTED This message displays if the vehicle does not detect the presence of a keyless access transmitter when you have attempted to start the vehicle or a vehicle door has just closed The following conditions may cause this message to appear Driver added equipment plugged into the accessory power outlet on the center console is causing interference Examples of these devices are cell phones and cell phone chargers two way radios power inverters or similar items Try moving the keyless access transmitter away from these devices when starting the vehicle In addition PDA devices and remote garage and gate openers may also generate Electromagnetic Interference EMI that may interfere with the keyless access transmitter Do not carry the keyless access transmitter in the same pocket or bag as these devices The vehicle is experiencing Electromagnetic Interference EMI Some locations such as airports automatic toll booths and some gas stations have EMI fields which may interfere with the keyless access transmitter 3 88 If moving the transmitter to different locations within the vehicle does not help place the transmitter in the center console transmitter pocket with the buttons facing forward and then press the START button The vehicle s battery voltage is low The battery voltage must be above 10 volts for the keyless access transmitter to be detected properly NO FO
185. conditioning efficiency is noticeable SERVICE AIR BAG This message displays if there is a problem with the airbag system Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer immediately See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 60 for more information SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST This message displays when a problem with the panic brake assist system has been detected Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer SERVICE LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEM lf your vehicle has the Lane Departure Warning LDW system this message may display to indicate that the LDW system is not working properly If this message remains on after continued driving the system needs service See your dealer retailer See the Index in the Navigation manual for more information SERVICE RADAR CRUISE This message displays when the Adaptive Cruise Control system is disabled and needs service See your dealer retailer SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA system and this message displays both SBZA displays will remain on indicating there is a problem with the SBZA system If these displays remain on after continued driving the system needs service See your dealer retailer See the Index in the Navigation manual for more information SERVICE STABILITY SYS System Your vehicle has a vehicle stability enhancement system called StabiliTrak All Wheel Drive AWD vehicle with the Active Steering with Enha
186. corrected contact your dealer retailer If the radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your dealer retailer when reporting the problem Configurable Radio Display Keys The four keys located on each side of the radio display can be configured to make it easier to adjust the radio features and other non radio related features can also be customized To program the configurable radio display keys perform the following steps 1 Press the knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn this knob until SETUP displays 3 Press this knob to enter into SETUP 4 Turn the same knob until CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS displays 5 Press this knob to enter into CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS 6 Turn this knob to select which of the four configurable keys you would like to change The currently assigned feature displays 7 Press the same knob to select the configurable key to change 8 Turn this knob to find the feature that will be stored to the key 9 Press this knob when you have found the feature to be stored The display updates by showing the symbol of the feature selected next to the configurable key 10 Repeat the previous steps for each configurable key 3 111 Once a feature is programmed to a key the feature does not display when programming the remaining configurable keys The configurable keys can be changed at any time Using an MP3 MP3 CD R Disc MP3 Format If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal com
187. d StabiliTrak see Enhanced StabiliTrak on page 4 9 StabiliTrak activates when the computer senses a discrepancy between the intended path and the direction the vehicle is actually traveling StabiliTrak selectively applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle s brakes to help steer the vehicle in the direction which you are steering When the system activates a STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message will be displayed on the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 You may also hear a noise or feel vibration in the brake pedal This is normal Continue to steer the vehicle in the direction you want it to go If there is a problem detected with StabiliTrak a SERVICE STABILITY SYS message will be displayed on the DIC See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 When this message is displayed the system is not operational Driving should be adjusted accordingly StabiliTrak comes on automatically whenever the vehicle is started To help assist with directional control of the vehicle always leave the system on StabiliTrak can be turned off however by using the TC traction control on off button See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 6 If the vehicle is in cruise control when the StabiliTrak activates the cruise control will automatically disengage When road conditions allow you to safely use it again you may reengage the cruise control See Cruise Control on page 3 17 or A
188. d also move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest Infants and Young Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection This includes infants and all other children Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need for everyone to use safety restraints In fact the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle 1 30 ACAUTION Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and never allow children to play with the safety belts Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles they should have the protection provided by appropriate restraints Children who are not restrained properly can strike other people or can be thrown out of the vehicle In addition young children should not use the vehicle s adult safety belts alone they need to use a child restraint ACAUTION People should never hold a baby in their arms while riding in a vehicle A baby does not weigh much until a crash During a crash a baby will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it For example in a crash at only 25 mph 40 km h a 12 Ib 5 5 kg baby will suddenly become a 240 Ib 110
189. d cargo load See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 26 Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire Load on an individual tire due to curb weight accessory weight occupant weight and cargo weight Vehicle Placard A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the vehicle s capacity weight and the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure See Tire and Loading Information Label under Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 26 Run Flat Tires STS V If your vehicle has run flat tires there is no spare tire and no tire changing equipment Your vehicle also has a Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS which will alert you if there is a loss of tire pressure in any of the tires See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5 68 A CAUTION When the low tire warning light is displayed on the instrument panel cluster your vehicle s handling capabilities will be reduced during severe maneuvers If you drive too fast you could lose control of your vehicle You or others could be injured Do not drive over 55 mph 90 km h when the low tire warning light is displayed Drive cautiously and check your tire pressures as soon as you can If a tire goes flat you will not need to stop on the side of the road to change the tire You can just keep on driving The vehicle s run flat tires can operate effectively with no air pressure for up to 50 miles 80 km at speeds up to 55 mph 90 km h The shorter the distance you driv
190. d surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels If there is no traction inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction If you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice you will understand this The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of the tires and the road surface the angle at which the curve is banked and your speed While you are in a curve speed is the one factor you can control Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve Then you suddenly accelerate Both control systems steering and acceleration have to do their work where the tires meet the road Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places You can lose control See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 6 and StabiliTrak System on page 4 8 or Enhanced StabiliTrak on page 4 9 What should you do if this ever happens Ease up on the accelerator pedal steer the vehicle the way you want it to go and slow down Your stability system might be active See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 and StabiliTrak System on page 4 8 or Enhanced StabiliTrak on page 4 9 Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed Of course the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions Under less favorable conditions you will want to go slower If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve do it before you en
191. d to be rebalanced See your dealer retailer for proper diagnosis Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent cracked or badly rusted or corroded If wheel nuts keep coming loose the wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced If the wheel leaks air replace it except some aluminum wheels which can sometimes be repaired See your dealer retailer if any of these conditions exist Your dealer retailer will know the kind of wheel you need Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity diameter width offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces If you need to replace any of your wheels wheel bolts wheel nuts or Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS sensors replace them only with new GM original equipment parts This way you will be sure to have the right wheel wheel bolts wheel nuts and TPMS sensors for your vehicle A CAUTION Using the wrong replacement wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle make your tires lose air and make you lose control You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured Always use the correct wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement Notice The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life brake cooling speedometer or odometer calibration headlamp aim bumper height vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain cl
192. daptive Cruise Control on page 3 20 for more information Enhanced StabiliTrak All wheel drive AWD vehicles with the Active Steering with Enhanced StabiliTrak option have an enhanced computer controlled vehicle stability system that assists with directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions This system coordinates automatic control of the Active Steering System the Magnetic Ride Control Suspension System and the Brake Control System for better vehicle performance During extreme cold temperature conditions the active steering function may be temporarily disabled which may cause the steering wheel to be off set from the center position while driving straight This is normal operation and the vehicle is safe to drive in these cases Stability control activates when the computer senses a difference between the intended path and the direction the vehicle is actually traveling Stability control automatically adjusts the front road wheel steering angle modifies the suspension stiffness and selectively applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle s brakes to help maintain directional control of the vehicle When the system activates a STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message displays on the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 You may also hear a noise or feel vibration in the brake pedal This is normal Continue to steer the vehicle in the direction you want it to go If
193. dards set by the U S Tire and Rim Association B Tire Width The three digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall C Aspect Ratio A two digit number that indicates the tire height to width measurements For example if the tire size aspect ratio is 60 as shown in item C of the illustration it would mean that the tire s sidewall is 60 percent as high as it is wide D Construction Code A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire The letter R means radial ply construction the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction and the letter B means belted bias ply construction E Rim Diameter Diameter of the wheel in inches F Service Description These characters represent the load range and speed rating of the tire The load index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified to carry The load index can range from 1 to 279 The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load Speed ratings range from A to Z 5 62 Tire Terminology and Definitions Air Pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascal kPa Accessory Weight This means the combined weight of optional accessories Some examples of optional accessories are automatic transmission power steering power brakes power window
194. der having it serviced by your dealer retailer before departing Things to check on your own include Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir full Windows clean inside and outside Wiper Blades In good shape Fuel Engine Oil Other Fluids All levels checked Lamps Do they all work and are lenses clean Tires Are treads good Are tires inflated to recommended pressure Weather and Maps Safe to travel Have up to date maps 4 20 Highway Hypnosis Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings while driving If you become tired or sleepy find a safe place to park your vehicle and rest Other driving tips include Keep the vehicle well ventilated Keep interior temperature cool Keep your eyes moving scan the road ahead and to the sides Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments often Hill and Mountain Roads Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different than driving on flat or rolling terrain Tips for driving in these conditions include Keep your vehicle serviced and in good shape Check all fluid levels and brakes tires cooling system and transmission e Going down steep or long hills shift to a lower gear A CAUTION If you do not shift down the brakes could get so hot that they would not work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Shift down to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope
195. dian residents are to make checks payable in U S funds Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated computers that record information about the vehicle s performance and how it is driven For example your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control engine and transmission performance to monitor the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in a crash and if so equipped to provide antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle These modules may store data to help your dealer retailer technician service your vehicle Some modules may also store data about how you operate the vehicle such as rate of fuel consumption or average speed These modules may also retain the owner s personal preferences such as radio pre sets seat positions and temperature settings Event Data Recorders This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems performed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled f
196. ditions 74 Bi Level This mode directs airflow to the console outlets and the floor vad Floor This mode directs all of the airflow to the floor This is the normal position for warm up conditions The amount of airflow to the rear passengers is controlled automatically by the front climate control system regardless of optional equipment Airflow to the rear system will be turned off when defrost is selected on the front climate control panel to direct air to clear the windshield Vehicles equipped with a rear climate control panel also have heated rear seats There are two buttons each with three indicator lights located between the two climate control knobs on the rear climate control panel to control the rear heated seats See Heated Seats on page 1 7 for additional information Be sure to keep the area under the front seats clear of any objects so the air in your vehicle can circulate effectively Passenger Compartment Air Filter Your vehicle may be equipped with a passenger compartment air filter There are two types of filters available There is a standard dust filter that traps small particles including pollen There is also a dust odor filter available that traps dust and pollen and also uses a charcoal element to help reduce many offensive odors from entering your vehicle The filter will need to be changed periodically For information on how often to change the passenger compartment air filter see Sch
197. dlamp Washer Motor HDLP WASH Circuit Breaker 5 121 To reinstall the rear seat cushion do the following A CAUTION A safety belt that is not properly routed through the seat cushion or is twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash If the safety belt has not been routed through the seat cushion at all it will not be there to work for the next passenger The person sitting in that position could be badly injured After reinstalling the seat cushion always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and are not twisted 1 Buckle the center passenger position safety belt then route the safety belts through the proper slots in the seat cushion Do not let the safety belts get twisted 5 122 2 Slide the rear of the cushion up and under the seatback so the rear locating guides hook into the wire loops on the back frame 3 With the seat cushion lowered push rearward and then press down on the seat cushion until the spring locks on both ends engage 4 Check to make sure the safety belts are properly routed and that no portion of any safety belt is trapped under the seat Also make sure the seat cushion is secured Rear Underseat Fuse Block There is a fuse block located under the rear seat on the driver s side and passenger s side of the vehicle The rear seat cushion must be removed to access the fuse blocks See Removing the Rear Seat Cushion listed previously in this
198. does not go to the dead battery It goes toa heavy unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery 10 11 Connect the other end of the negative cable at least 18 inches 45 cm away from the dead battery but not near engine parts that move The electrical connection is just as good there and the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less Use a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Your vehicle s remote negative ground location is for this purpose Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery If it will not start after a few tries it probably needs service 5 49 Notice If the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct order making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal Jumper Cable Removal A Heavy Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote Negative Terminal B Good Battery or Remote Positive and Remote Negative Terminals C Dead Battery or Remote Positive Terminal 5 50 To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do the following 1 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle that had
199. door The vehicle must be in PARK P or NEUTRAL N and the valet mode turned off To disable valet mode see Valet Lockout Switch on page 2 25 Press the trunk lid release button on the keyless access transmitter See Keyless Access System Operation on page 2 6 The vehicle must be in PARK P or NEUTRAL N and the valet mode turned off e Squeeze the trunk release button located on the rear of the trunk lid above the license plate as long as you have your keyless access transmitter with you Entry occurs when the button is being pressed and the vehicle recognizes the transmitter The vehicle must be in PARK P and the valet mode turned off If your vehicle has lost battery power you can still access the trunk by unlocking and lowering the rear seat pass through door and pulling the emergency trunk release handle Rear Seat Pass Through Door To open the door 1 Pull the rear seat armrest down 2 If the door is locked insert the key into the lock and turn it counterclockwise 3 Press the button above the lock and lower the door To open the trunk lid pull the emergency trunk release handle located in the trunk on the other side of the door opening See Emergency Trunk Release Handle following Emergency Trunk Release Handle OR TT Notice Do not use the emergency trunk release handle as a tie down or anchor point when securing items in the trunk as it could damage the handle There is a glow in
200. driving accordingly When you press the Traction Control button again the Traction Control System will be on The traction engaged symbol will be displayed temporarily in the DIC and a chime will be heard See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 for more information Magnetic Ride Control Your vehicle may have Magnetic Ride Control that automatically adjusts the ride of your vehicle Automatic ride control is achieved through a computer used to control and monitor the suspension system The controller receives input from various sensors to determine the proper system response If the controller detects a problem within the system the DIC will display a SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS message See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 for more information See your dealer for service Limited Slip Rear Axle Your limited slip rear axle can give you additional traction on snow mud ice sand or gravel It works like a standard axle most of the time but when one of the rear wheels has no traction and the other does this feature will allow the wheel with traction to move the vehicle StabiliTrak System Your vehicle has a vehicle stability enhancement system called StabiliTrak It is an advanced computer controlled system that assists with directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions If your all wheel drive vehicle has the optional enhanced vehicle stability control system called Active Steering with Enhance
201. ds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer retailer or General Motors To contact NHTSA call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington D C 20590 You can obtain information about motor vehicle safety from http Awww safercar gov 7 14 Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government If you live in Canada and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect notify Transport Canada immediately in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited Call them at 1 800 333 0510 or write to Transport Canada Road Safety Branch 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors In addition to notifying NHTSA or Transport Canada in a situation like this please notify General Motors Call 1 800 458 8006 or write Cadillac Customer Assistance Center Cadillac Motor Car Division P O Box 33169 Detroit MI 48232 5169 In Canada call 1 888 446 2000 or write Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre CA1 163 005 General Motors of Canada Limited 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Service Publications Ordering Information Service Manuals Service Manuals have the dia
202. e is overheating severe engine damage may occur If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible Do not increase the engine speed above normal idling speed See Engine Overheating on page 5 29 for more information RMIT This message displays when the engine coolant temperature is too hot Stop and allow the vehicle to idle until it cools down See Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light on page 3 66 This symbol appears with this message See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5 37 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency ENGINE HOT AC Air Conditioning OFF This message displays when the engine coolant becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3 67 To avoid added strain on a hot engine the air conditioning compressor is automatically turned off When the coolant temperature returns to normal the air conditioning compressor turns back on You can continue to drive your vehicle If this message continues to appear have the system repaired by your dealer retailer as soon as possible to avoid damage to the engine ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE Notice If you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating severe engine damage may occur If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible See Eng
203. e on page 2 29 for more information regarding the keyless ignition The remote start feature will not operate if any of the following occur The check engine light is displayed See Check Engine Light under Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 68 The valet lockout switch is on The keyless access transmitter is in the vehicle The vehicle s hood is open The vehicle personalization feature is not enabled An unauthorized vehicle entry or a vehicle theft was attempted Your keyless access transmitter with the remote start button provides an increased range of operation However the range may be less while the vehicle is running As a result you may need to be closer to your vehicle to turn it off than you were to turn it on There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the transmitter see Keyless Access System on page 2 5 Doors and Locks Door Locks A CAUTION Unlocked doors can be dangerous Passengers especially children can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle When a door is locked the handle will not open it You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors are not locked So wear safety belts properly and lock the doors whenever you drive Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke
204. e 0 F 18 C To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1 Turn off the engine 2 Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord For the 3 6L V6 and 4 4L V8 engine the cord is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger s side of the vehicle For the 4 6L V8 engine the cord is located in the engine compartment on the driver s side of the vehicle near the inner fender and above the strut 3 You must remove the plastic cap to access the plug 4 Plug it into a normal grounded 110 volt AC outlet A CAUTION Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock Also the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire You could be seriously injured Plug the cord into a properly grounded three prong 110 volt AC outlet If the cord will not reach use a heavy duty three prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps 5 Before starting the engine be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts If you do not it could be damaged How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in The answer depends on the outside temperature the kind of oil you have and some other things Instead of trying to list everything here we ask that you contact your dealer in the area where you will be parking your vehicle The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area 2 31 Automatic Transmission Operation Ther
205. e Control may not detect and react to stationary or slow moving vehicles or other objects ahead of you Your vehicle may accelerate toward objects such as a stopped vehicle that suddenly appears after the lead vehicle changes lanes Your complete attention is always required while driving and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes Low Speed Deactivation If your speed falls below 25 mph 40 km h while following a vehicle ahead Adaptive Cruise Control will begin to disengage The driver alert symbol on the HUD will flash and the warning beep will sound The driver must take action since Adaptive Cruise Control will not slow the vehicle to a stop Deactivation When Head Up Display is Turned Off lf the HUD is turned off when Adaptive Cruise Control is engaged it will begin to disengage A warning beep sounds and the message RADAR CRUISE NOT READY appears on the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 for additional information If Adaptive Cruise Control was braking when the HUD is turned off the braking will continue briefly Passing a Vehicle Adaptive Cruise Control Override To increase speed to pass a vehicle use the accelerator pedal While you are doing this the system will not automatically apply the brakes A PEDAL APPLIED ACC OVERRIDE message will appear on the HUD See Head Up Display HUD on page 3 43 for additional information Once you pass the vehicle
206. e Tank A CAUTION Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause bad injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others read and follow all the instructions on the pump island Turn off your engine when you are refueling Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle Do not use cellular phones Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle This is against the law in some places Do not re enter the vehicle while pumping fuel Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel door on the passenger s side of the vehicle To open the fuel door apply pressure in the center of the rear edge of the fuel door and it will pop open To remove the fuel cap turn it slowly counterclockwise The fuel cap has a spring in it if the cap is released too soon it will spring back to the right While refueling hang the tethered fuel cap from the hook on the fuel door A CAUTION Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly If you spill fuel and then something ignites it you could be badly burned This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full and is more likely in hot weather Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop Then unscrew the cap all the way Be careful not to spill fuel Do not top off or overfill the
207. e air supplied to the outboard panel outlets and side window defogging outlets When this mode is selected the system turns off recirculation and runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing The recirculation mode is cancelled when the system enters the defog mode If recirculation is selected while in the defog mode it is cancelled after 10 minutes lf there is fogging on the side windows remain in defog or defrost mode until they clear WP Defrost Press this button to direct most of the air to the windshield with some air directed to the side windows and outboard panel outlets In this mode the system automatically turns off recirculation and runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing Recirculation cannot be selected while in the defrost mode This mode can also cause the fan speed and air temperature to increase Rear Window Defogger The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog or frost from the rear window The rear window defogger only works when the ignition is on or during remote start if programmed See Personal Settings Menu under Vehicle Personalization on page 2 60 for additional information Gt Rear Window Defogger Press this button to turn the rear window defogger on or off Be sure to clear as much snow from the rear window as possible The rear window defogger turns off about 10 minute
208. e and the slower the speed the greater the chance that the tire will not have to be replaced When a tire is filled with air it provides a cushion between the road and the wheel Because you will not have this cushion when driving on a deflated run flat tire try to avoid potholes that could damage your wheel and require replacement of it Some road hazards can damage a tire beyond repair This damage could occur even before you have driven on the tire in a deflated condition When a tire has been damaged or if you have driven any distance on a deflated run flat tire check with an authorized run flat tire service center as soon as possible to determine whether the tire can be repaired or should be replaced To maintain your vehicle s run flat feature all replacement tires must be self supporting tires To locate the nearest GM or authorized run flat servicing facility call Roadside Service See Roadside Service on page 7 6 for details 5 65 A CAUTION Run flat tires are constructed differently than other tires and could explode during improper service You or others could be injured or killed if you attempt to repair replace dismount or mount a run flat tire Let only an authorized run flat service center repair replace dismount and mount run flat tires The valve stems on your vehicle s run flat tires have sensors that are part of the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS These sensors contain batteries which a
209. e are several different positions for the shift lever PARK P This position locks the rear wheels It is the best position to use when you start the engine because your vehicle cannot move easily A CAUTION It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll CAUTION Continued 2 32 CAUTION Continued Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P See Shifting Into PARK P on page 2 36 If you are pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer Vehicles With Heavy Duty Cooling on page 4 34 or Towing a Trailer Vehicles Without Heavy Duty Cooling on page 4 40 Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK P before starting the engine Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system You must fully apply your regular brakes first and then press the shift lever button before you can shift from PARK P when the vehicle is running If you cannot shift out of PARK P ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way into PARK P as you maintain brake application Then press the shift lever button and move the sh
210. e could be damaged Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system If the ignition is on and the brake fluid is low the CHECK BRAKE FLUID message will be displayed in the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 5 41 What to Add When you do need brake fluid DOT 3 brake fluid is recommended for use DOT 4 brake fluid is also compatible with your vehicle s brake system parts However if you choose to use DOT 4 fluid it is recommended that you flush the brake hydraulic system and refill it with new DOT 4 fluid at a regular maintenance service every two years See Additional Required Services on page 6 6 Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it This helps keep dirt from entering the reservoir A CAUTION With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic system the brakes might not work well This could cause a crash Always use the proper brake fluid 5 42 Notice Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake hydraulic system parts For example just a few drops of mineral based oil such as engine oil in the brake hydraulic system can damage brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they will have to be replaced Do not let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid e If you spill brake fluid on yo
211. e does not start and the security light comes on there may be a problem with your immobilizer system Press the START button again lf the vehicle does not start and the keyless access transmitter appears to be undamaged try another keyless access transmitter Or you may try placing the transmitter in the transmitter pocket See NO FOBS DETECTED under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 for additional information At this time you may also want to check the fuse See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5 117 If the engine still does not start with the other transmitter your vehicle needs service If the engine does start the first transmitter may be faulty See your dealer retailer who can service the theft deterrent system and have a new keyless access transmitter programmed to the vehicle It is possible for the immobilizer system to learn new or replacement keyless access transmitters Up to 4 keyless access transmitters can be programmed for the vehicle To program additional transmitters see Matching transmitter s to Your Vehicle under Keyless Access System Operation on page 2 6 Do not leave the key or device that disarms or deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle Starting and Operating Your Vehicle New Vehicle Break In Notice Your vehicle does not need an elaborate break in But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines Do not drive at any one const
212. e g the direction from which your vehicle was hit When you use the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar Hands Free Calling your vehicle also sends OnStar your GPS location so that we can provide you with location based services OnStar service cannot work unless your vehicle is in a place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless service provider for service in that area OnStar service also cannot work unless you are in a place where the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that area has coverage network capacity and reception when the service is needed and technology that is compatible with the OnStar service Not all services are available everywhere particularly in remote or enclosed areas or at all times Location information about your vehicle is only available if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and available Your vehicle must have a working electrical system including adequate battery power for the OnStar equipment to operate There are other problems OnStar cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing OnStar service to you at any particular time or place Some examples are damage to important parts of your vehicle in an accident hills tall buildings tunnels weather or wireless phone network congestion Your Responsibility Increase the radio volume if you cannot hear the OnStar advisor If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red this means that your system is not functioning pr
213. e half clean drinkable water and one half DEX COOL coolant which will not damage aluminum parts If you use this coolant mixture you do not need to add anything else A CAUTION Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant 5 26 Notice If you use an improper coolant mixture your engine could overheat and be badly damaged The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts If you have to add coolant more than once or twice a year have your dealer check your cooling system Notice If you use extra inhibitors and or additives in your vehicle s cooling system you could damage your vehicle Use only the proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 for more information Checking Coolant The coolant surge tank and pressure cap are located on the driver s side of the vehicle toward the r
214. e i DEX COOL Coolant engine PE Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or System equivalent DOT 3 brake fluid eee Optikleen Washer Solvent Chassis Lubricant GM Part No U S 12377985 in Canada 88901242 or lubricant Cable Guides meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB i GM Power Steering Fluid Power Steering GM Part No U S 89021184 in Canada 89021186 Parking Brake Usage Fluid Lubricant Usage Fluid Lubricant Automatic DEXRON VI Automatic Hood Latch Transmission Transmission Fluid Assembly Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol i Secondary GM Part No U S 12346293 Key Lock Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube Latch Pivots in Canada 992723 or lubricant Cylinders GM Part No U S 12346241 Spring meeting requirements of NLGI 2 in Canada 10953474 Anchor and Category LB or GC LB SAE 75W 90 Synthetic Release Pawl Axle Lubricant Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube Rear Axle GM Part No U S 89021677 Hood and GM Parn No U S 12346241 in Canada 89021678 meeting Door Hinges iy Canada 10953474 GM Specification 9986115 Weatherstrip Lubricant SAE 75W 90 Synthetic GM Part No U S 3634770 Front Axle j Axle Lubricant Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518 or All Wheel GM Part No U S 89021677 Conditioning Dielectric Silicone Grease Drive in Canada 89021678 meeting GM Part No U S 12345579 GM Specification 9986115 C Canada 992887 Transfer Case M
215. e reduced during severe maneuvers If you drive too fast you could lose control of your vehicle You or others could be injured Do not drive over 55 mph 90 km h when the low tire warning light is displayed Drive cautiously and check your tire pressures as soon as you can See Run Flat Tires STS V on page 5 65 and Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5 68 for additional information A CAUTION Special tools and procedures are required to service a run flat tire If these special tools and procedures are not used you or others could be injured and your vehicle could be damaged Always be sure the proper tools and procedures as described in the service manual are used To order a service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 15 Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Your vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit that is capable of temporarily sealing small punctures in the tread There is no jack or spare tire The kit inflates the tire with liquid sealant and air After the tire is inflated to the recommended inflation pressure see Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 66 for more information the vehicle must be driven for five miles to distribute the sealant in the tire and seal the puncture After driving five miles the tire pressure must be rechecked and adjusted as needed See Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit later in this section 5 87 Be sure to read and follow all of th
216. e same for all versions 3 121 SRCE HE fel Audio Controls With Heated Steering Wheel Adaptive Cruise Control GAP and Cruise Control Cancel Right Side Audio Controls Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel See the following descriptions of the controls that can adjusted K SEEK D Press the SEEK arrows to go to the previous or the next radio station while in AM FM or XM if equipped 3 122 The radio seeks stations only with a strong signal that are in the selected band Press either SEEK arrow to go to the previous or the next track while sourced to a CD SRCE Source Press this button to switch between the radio AM FM XM if equipped and CD SCAN To scan stations press and hold this button for a few seconds the radio goes to a station plays for a few seconds then goes to the next station Press this button again to stop scanning The radio scans stations only with a strong signal that are in the selected band NV Previous Next Press the arrows to go to the previous or the next radio station stored as a favorite While a CD is playing press either arrow to go to the previous or to the next track lt d Volume Press the plus or minus volume button to increase or to decrease the volume amp Mute Voice Recognition Press and release this button to silence the vehicle speakers only The audio of the wireless and wired headphones if your vehicle
217. e smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle ACAUTION When an airbag inflates there may be dust in the air This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so If you have breathing problems but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or a door If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment you should seek medical attention Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock the doors turn the interior lamps on and turn the hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate You can lock the doors turn the interior lamps off and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the controls for those features In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag windshields are broken by vehicle deformation Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger airbag Airbags are designed to inflate only once After an airbag inflates you will need some new parts for the airbag system If you do not get them the airbag system will not be there to help protect you in another crash A new system will
218. e this message is displayed When the engine oil returns to a safe operating temperature this message clears from the DIC and the vehicle returns to normal operation Your vehicle does not require service when this message is displayed FUEL LEVEL LOW This symbol appears with this message This message displays and a chime sounds if the fuel level is low Refuel as soon as possible See Fuel Gage on page 3 73 and Fuel on page 5 5 for more information HOOD AJAR This symbol appears with this message This message displays when the hood is not closed completely Make sure that the hood is closed completely See Hood Release on page 5 10 ICE POSSIBLE This message displays when the outside temperature is cold enough to create icy road conditions Adjust your driving accordingly KEY FOB BATTERY LOW This message displays when the battery in the keyless access transmitter is low Replace the battery in the transmitter See Battery Replacement under Keyless Access System Operation on page 2 6 LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEM UNAVAILABLE If your vehicle has the Lane Departure Warning LDW system this message may display if the LDW system does not activate due to a temporary condition See the Index in the Navigation manual for more information LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR This symbol appears with this message This message displays when the driver side rear door is not closed completely Make sure that the door is closed
219. e tire sealant and compressor kit instructions The kit includes A Air Compressor E Air Pressure Gage B Tire Sealant Canister F Air Compressor C Air Compressor Inflator Hose Accessory Plug G Sealant Filling Hose D On Off Switch After temporarily repairing the tire sealant and compressor kit it is recommended to take your vehicle to an authorized dealer retailer as soon as possible 5 88 If the sealant is not removed from the tire within 100 miles 161 kilometers of driving the dealer retailer may recommend that the tire be replaced Accessing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit To access the tire sealant and compressor kit 1 Open the trunk See Trunk on page 2 16 for more information 2 Locate the tire sealant and compressor kit on the driver side of the vehicle near the back corner of the trunk 3 Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit strap by squeezing the two tabs of the quick release buckle 4 Remove the sealant and compressor kit from its foam container Tire Sealant Read and follow the safe handling instructions on the sealant canister The sealant can temporarily seal small punctures in the tread area of the tire The sealant cannot seal sidewall damage large punctures or a tire that has unseated from the wheel See Roadside Service on page 7 6 if you need assistance The sealant can only be used to seal one tire After usage the sealant canister and sealant filling
220. e to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if necessary 1 45 6 If your child restraint has a top tether follow the child restraint manufacturer s instructions regarding the use of the top tether See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 37 for more information 7 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor disconnect it 5 To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor If you are using a forward facing child restraint you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 1 46 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position Your vehicle has airbags A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward facing child restraint See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1 36 In addition your vehicle has a passenger sensing system which is designed to turn off the right front passenger s frontal airbag under certain conditions See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 60 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 61 for more information on this including important safety information A label on your sun visor says Never p
221. ead symbol only appears on the HUD when a vehicle ahead is detected in your path lf this symbol does not appear or disappears briefly Adaptive Cruise Control will not respond to vehicles you may see ahead ACAUTION When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar is blocked by snow ice or dirt it may not detect a vehicle ahead Adaptive Cruise Control may not have time to slow your vehicle enough to avoid a collision Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control when the radar is blocked by snow ice or dirt Keep your radar clean See Cleaning the System later in this section Adaptive Cruise Control automatically slows your vehicle down when approaching a slower moving vehicle It then adjusts your speed to follow the vehicle in front at the selected following distance Your speed increases or decreases to follow the vehicle in front of you but will not exceed the set speed It may apply limited braking if necessary When braking is active your brake lights come on It may feel or sound different than if you were applying the brakes yourself This is normal 3 27 Stationary or Very Slow Moving Objects A CAUTION Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect and react to stationary or slow moving vehicles or other objects ahead of you You could crash into an object ahead of you Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control when approaching stationary or slow moving vehicles or other objects 3 28 A CAUTION Adaptive Cruis
222. ear of the engine compartment See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 11 for more information on location ACAUTION Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly Never turn the surge tank pressure cap even a little when the engine and radiator are hot The vehicle must be on a level surface When your engine is cold the coolant level should be at the FULL COLD FROID line on the side of the surge tank Follow the arrow from the top of the tank down the side to the horizontal mark 5 27 Checking Intercooler System Coolant 4 4L V8 STS V Engine Only See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 11 for the location of the intercooler system pressure cap 5 28 Notice This vehicle has a specific coolant fill procedure Failure to follow this procedure could cause your engine to overheat and be severely damaged Park the vehicle on a level surface and turn off the engine When the engine is cold the coolant level should be visible in the intercooler fill neck Adding Coolant If you need more coolant add the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture at the intercooler fill neck but only when the engine is cool See Cooling System on page 5 32 for instructions on how to add coolant to the intercooler fill neck ACAUTION You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contain
223. earance to the body and chassis See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 96 for more information Used Replacement Wheels A CAUTION Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous You cannot know how it has been used or how far it has been driven It could fail suddenly and cause a crash If you have to replace a wheel use a new GM original equipment wheel 5 81 Tire Chains A CAUTION If your vehicle has P255 45R17 P235 50ZR18 P255 45ZR18 P275 40R19 or 255 45ZR18 size tires do not use tire chains as there is not enough clearance Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes suspension or other vehicle parts The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash CAUTION Continued 5 82 CAUTION Continued Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions Follow that manufacturer s instructions To help avoid damage to your vehicle drive slowly readjust or remove the device if it is contacting your vehicle and do not spin your vehicle s wheels If you do find traction devices that will fit install them on the rear tires only Notice If your vehicle has P235 50R17 size tires use tire chains only where legal and only when you must Use only SAE Class S type
224. eason tires Winter tires are recommended for snow or ice covered roads Notice If your vehicle has low profile tires they are more susceptible to damage from road hazards or curb impact than standard profile tires Tire and or wheel assembly damage can occur when coming into contact with road hazards like potholes or sharp edged objects or when sliding into a curb Your vehicle warranty does not cover this type of damage Keep tires set to the correct inflation pressure and when possible avoid contact with curbs potholes and other road hazards 5 58 Winter Tires If you expect to drive on snow or ice covered roads often you may want to get winter tires for your vehicle All season tires provide good overall performance on most surfaces but they may not offer the traction you would like or the same level of performance as winter tires on snow or ice covered roads Winter tires in general are designed for increased traction on snow and ice covered roads With winter tires there may be decreased dry road traction increased road noise and shorter tread life After switching to winter tires be alert for changes in vehicle handling and braking See your dealer retailer for details regarding winter tire availability and proper tire selection Also see Buying New Tires on page 5 76 If you choose to use winter tires Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all four wheel positions Use only radial ply tire
225. ect If the vehicle hits an object that deforms the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform 1 56 e If the vehicle hits a narrow object like a pole the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object like a wall e If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the object Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers rear impacts or in many side impacts In addition your vehicle has dual stage frontal airbags Dual stage airbags adjust the restraint according to crash severity Your vehicle has electronic frontal sensors which help the sensing system distinguish between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal impact For moderate frontal impacts dual stage airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment For more severe frontal impacts full deployment occurs Your vehicle has seat mounted side impact and roof rail airbags See Airbag System on page 1 51 Seat mounted side impact and roof rail airbags are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes Seat mounted side impact and roof rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above the system s designed threshold level The threshold level can vary with spec
226. ect knob until DRIVER GREETING is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to turn on the DRIVER GREETING feature The check mark will be cleared and the customized driver greeting is off The only way to correct a customized driver greeting once you have exited the screen to spell the name is to turn the driver greeting feature off and then turn it back on KEY FOB REMINDER This feature chirps the horn three times when the driver s door is closed and there is a keyless access transmitter left inside of the vehicle This will only occur when the vehicle is off Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON default Mode 2 OFF To program the vehicle to a different mode 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until KEY FOB REMINDER is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle 2 63 REMOTE START If your vehicle has this feature it allows you to choose the features you would like to have activated when you engage the remote start on your vehicle These features include the climate control system the re
227. ed seat mirror and steering column position when the start button on the ignition is pressed Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF default To program the vehicle to a different mode 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until START BUTTON RECALL is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name If this feature is selected REMOTE RECALL MEMORY cannot be selected The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle 2 65 AUTO EXIT SEAT If your vehicle has the optional memory package you will have this feature When this feature is turned on you can recall any previously programmed exit position for the driver s seat when the vehicle is off the shift lever is in PARK P and the driver s door is opened Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF default To program the vehicle to a different mode 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until AUTO EXIT SEAT is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switc
228. edge or the lower center pillar on the driver s side of the vehicle This label shows the gross weight capacity of your vehicle called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel and cargo The Certification label also shows the maximum weights for the front and rear axles called the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR Never exceed the GVWR or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle 4 30 Z CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle Notice Overloading your vehicle may cause damage Repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not overload your vehicle If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases tools packages or anything else they will go as fast as the vehicle goes If you have to stop or turn quickly or if there is a crash they will keep going ACAUTION Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn or in a crash Put things in the trunk of your vehicle In a trunk put them as far forward as you can Try to spread the weight evenly Never stack heavier things like suit
229. eduled Maintenance on page 6 4 Notice Driving without a passenger compartment air filter in place can cause water and small particles like paper and leaves to be pulled into your climate control system which may cause damage to it Make sure you always replace the old filter with a new one 3 55 The access panel for the passenger compartment air filter is located under the hood near the windshield on the passenger s side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 11 for more information on location See Doing Your Own Service Work on page 5 4 for information on doing your own service work To access the passenger compartment air filter do the following 1 Pull back the rubber hood seal from the edge of the leaf screen vent cover 2 Remove the three fasteners that hold the filter access cover in place and slide the cover off 3 56 3 To access the filter remove the plastic water deflector by lifting the outboard edge of the deflector to release the retention tab 4 Lift the inboard edge of the deflector to release the retention tab 5 Lift and slide the water deflector toward the inboard side and remove it 6 The top edge of the filter should be visible Reach in and lift the filter out pulling upward and toward the front of the vehicle 7 Insert the new air filter by sliding it back into place Make sure the arrow on the filter is pointing toward the passenger compartment Reverse
230. ee 2 26 Time SONG seire ei E E EEEE 3 99 Tire Pressure LIQNT 2 margrethe ai 3 67 TINGS schtssGealiastresaces SEER SES SEES ESSENS N 5 57 Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels Cleaning siainen ar reel else slag 5 112 Buying New TIES s nissin isinna 5 76 CAINS aan earnen rees i n nanes 5 82 Changing a Flat Tite 52 serne 5 96 12 Tires cont GIS ARK Sara re E 5 113 Compact Spare Tire cceeeeeeeeeeeeen teers 5 106 Different Si ZO s sorg sidens onnea aN aiie 5 78 High Speed Operation eceeeeeeeeeeeeee tees 5 68 If a Tire Goes Flat ce ceeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeee es 5 86 Inflation Tire Pressure aneneen 5 66 Inspection and Rotation cceeeeee eee 5 73 Installing the Spare Tire cceeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 99 Lifting Your Vehicle 32222222 serverer dernes 5 83 Pressure Monitor Operation 0 eeeeeeee 5 70 Pressure Monitor System 0 eceeeeeeeneee ees 5 68 Removing the Flat Tire cceeeeeeeeeeeeee es 5 99 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 5 98 Run Flat ecce rr an aen raden 5 65 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools 5 104 Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit 005 5 87 Tire Sidewall Labeling ccceeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 59 Tire Terminology and Definitions 5 62 Uniform Tire Quality Grading cee 5 79 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance 5 80 Wheel Replacement
231. eeeeeeeeeeea eee ees 5 25 Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap 0 5 29 Engine Overheating ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee ees 5 29 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode 5 31 Cooling System ccceeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeenes 5 32 Power Steering Fluid csceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 39 Windshield Washer Fluid eeeeeeeeee eee es 5 40 Brakes hocan arenae a E E E 5 41 Battery ereen E E EN E E A te 5 44 JUMP Starting s eiiis 5 45 All Wheel Drive 0 5 50 Rear AX pae ciai uses nen 5 51 Front Axle oi a E De 5 52 Headlamp Aiming ceceeeeeeenee eee ee een es 5 53 Bulb Replacement annn 5 54 High Intensity Discharge HID Lighting 5 54 Halogen BUDS siisccecncetucscecs ebbede 5 54 Back Up kampstil inng menona binds 5 54 Replacement Bulbs ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 55 Windshield Replacement eee 5 55 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 5 55 MIKES ccccdecGecatceeeets E a O AE Ae 5 57 Winter THN S roscoe eieaa 5 58 Tire Sidewall Labeling cceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 59 Tire Terminology and Definitions 0 5 62 Run Flat Tires STS V ccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 65 Inflation Tire Pressure sieci 5 66 High Speed Operation ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 68 Section 5 Tire Pressure Monitor System u sseseeeeee 5 68 Tire Pressure Monitor Operation 5 70 Tire Inspec
232. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeee 5 114 Panic Brake Assist sssiccsrccsclaversiscaventiecaseavouanes 4 12 Parade DIMMING eticii E 3 41 Pak Aid eedonia renane aaeeio aa i EEN 2 45 Park Brake ccccccccec cee eee eee eeeeeeeneeeeneeneeneeass 2 35 Park P SANING NO sanne derne nonne 2 36 Shifting OUt Of api rar ae eres id 2 37 Parking ASSIST sanae a a aces 2 45 Over Things That Burn sis saaledes 2 38 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 005 3 61 Passenger Compartment Air Filter 05 3 55 Passenger Sensing System eeeeeeeeneee ees 1 60 PASSING T 4 16 Perchlorate Materials Requirements California 5 4 Power Door LOCKS toiaren enw Marder 2 14 Electrical SySteM viren resni nisn e ait 5 117 Inadvertent Battery Saver W u sssseeeererree 3 43 Lumbar Controls iik ran 1 2 Reclining Seatbacks ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee renee 1 4 Retained Accessory RAP l c 2 29 Seala E O Fer SEER ERE RL testes 1 2 Steering Fluid cece eeee eee eee eee eee renen sene 5 39 Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering Column 3 7 WINGOWS misan a e E R RR 2 20 PYIVECY 55 sagens ser AD Es Er nere RAS 7 16 Event Data Recorders X ssssseeereerneren ennen 7 16 Navigation System c ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee ees 7 17 ONS tal ssisicseessisseveas cide E EEEE EATE Rat 7 17 Radio Frequency Identification 5 7 17 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 15 R
233. eeeeeeeeees 5 110 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses 0055 5 111 Finish Care danserinde hed aaae 5 111 Windshield and Wiper Blades 08 5 112 Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels and Trim 5 112 UN TE HR Se ER ERE DE ENE ERE ERE SED ER PERSERNE 5 113 Sheet Metal Damage seeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 113 FINISH Damage s iis Acenateenecwcnn dexeatuadatuinsnenend 5 114 Underbody Maintenance eeeeeeeee es 5 114 Chemical Paint Spotting eeeeeeeeee eee 5 114 Vehicle Care Appearance Materials 5 115 Vehicle Identification eee 5 116 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 5 116 Service Parts Identification Label 5 116 Electrical System cceeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeees 5 116 Add On Electrical Equipment 6 eeee 5 116 Headlamp Wiring sscscscissseseser ees ore 5 117 Windshield Wiper FUSES seeeeeeeeenee ees 5 117 Power Windows and Other Power Options 5 117 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 5 117 Underhood Fuse Block aineeseen 5 118 Rear Underseat Fuse Block caiac 5 121 Capacities and Specifications 5 128 Service For service and parts needs visit your dealer retailer You will receive genuine GM parts and GM trained and supported service people Genuine GM parts have one of these marks ACDelco E Parts GM e Goodwrench EM Accessories
234. eeeeenees Universal Home Remote System Universal Home Remote System 0 00e Universal Home Remote System Operation With Three Round LED Storage Areas 0 ccc eee eect renere renerne 2 58 GIOVE BOX ou siden cae Relat hes salen EE 2 58 Cupholder s ses renren AEE EEES 2 58 Center Console Storage ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 58 Convenience Net cceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 58 SUMMON siisii nein o ai eeann RE HERAn 2 58 Vehicle Personalization nnn 2 60 Memory Seat Mirrors and Steering Wheel 2 77 Keys ACAUTION Leaving children in a vehicle with the keyless access transmitter is dangerous for many reasons children or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move The windows will function with the keyless access transmitter in the vehicle and they could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window Do not leave the keyless access transmitter in a vehicle with children This key located inside the keyless access transmitter can be used for all locks Press the button A near the bottom of the keyless access transmitter to remove the key Never pull the key without pressing the button Your vehicle has a Keyless Access System with pushbutton start See gnition Positions on page 2 28 for information on starting the
235. eeeeneee ees 3 7 Entry Lighting eesccividcevies ce nccuinet de SeaiGneddes ceeds 3 41 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever eeee 3 8 Parade Dimming seirian iar uneori i 3 41 Turn and Lane Change Signals u dseseree 3 8 Reading LAMPS cssacicactasatenctiereteienieetseteeatienss 3 42 Headlamp High Low Beam Changer 5 3 9 Battery Load Management 0 0eeeeee 3 42 Forward Collision Alert FCA System 3 10 Electric Power Management 0 0 0eeee 3 42 Flash to Pass irienn nina ae 3 13 Inadvertent Power Battery Saver 3 43 Windshield Wipers issirsiiircissiiacsssiirereiii rres 3 14 Head Up Display HUD eee rese 3 43 Rainsense Wipers eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 15 Accessory Power Outlet S e eeeeeeeeeeees 3 46 Windshield Washer eceeeeeeeeneeeeeee tenes 3 16 Ashtray s and Cigarette Lighter 8 3 47 Headlamp Washer Gu 3 16 Climate Controls 0 0ccccceccecceeeeseseeeeseeeees 3 48 Cruise Control Er ERE KER are 3 17 Dual Climate Control System 3 48 Adaptive Cruise Control 2 3 20 Outlet Adjustment 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 54 Headlamps ii doiph wissen eae daoenn ataiehenNeabieaesaee 3 33 Rear Climate Control System 2 3 54 Wiper Activated Headlamps eeeeeeees 3 37 Passenger Compartment Air Filter 0000 3 55 3 1 Section 3 Instrument Panel
236. eld cont Washer Fluid arenie e o A 5 40 Wiper Blade Replacement c ae 5 55 Wiper Blades Cleaning 0 seeeeeeeneees 5 112 Wiper FUSES 0c cccecsewinedenaettenssined babes 5 117 WIDGIS ars ae de Serta N AET 3 14 Winter DIVINO lt sscncncsecworatend e a naaa 4 22 Winter TIS serae ninina E N E aes 5 58 Wiper Activated Headlamps eee 3 37 XM Radio Messages cseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 3 116 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 3 124 Your Vehicle and the Environment 0 0 6 2
237. elp avoid personal injury do not let someone else use it and use it only for the seat it is made to fit The extender has been designed for adults Never use it for securing child seats To wear it attach it to the regular safety belt For more information see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender 1 27 Child Restraints The manufacturer s instructions that come with the booster seat state the weight and height limitations for i that booster Use a booster seat with a lap shoulder Older Children belt until the child passes the below fit test Sit all the way back on the seat Do the knees bend at the seat edge If yes continue If no return to the booster seat Buckle the lap shoulder belt Does the shoulder belt rest on the shoulder If yes continue If no try using the rear safety belt comfort guide See Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides under Lap Shoulder Belt on page 1 21 for more information If the shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder then return to the booster seat Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips touching the thighs If yes continue If no return to the booster seat Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the length of the trip If yes continue If no return Older children who have outgrown booster seats should to the booster seat wear the vehicle s safety belts 1 28 Q What is the proper way to wear safety belts An older child
238. elp to free a stuck vehicle Refer to your vehicle s traction system in the Index If the stuck condition is too severe for the traction system to free the vehicle turn the traction system off and use the rocking method A CAUTION If you let your vehicle s tires spin at high speed they can explode and you or others could be injured The vehicle can overheat causing an engine compartment fire or other damage Spin the wheels as little as possible and avoid going above 35 mph 55 km h as shown on the speedometer For information about using tire chains on your vehicle see Tire Chains on page 5 82 4 25 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out First turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area around the front wheels Turn off any traction or stability system See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 6 and StabiliTrak System on page 4 8 or Enhanced StabiliTrak on page 4 9 Then shift back and forth between REVERSE R and a forward gear spinning the wheels as little as possible To prevent transmission wear wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears Release the accelerator pedal while you shift and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear By slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse directions you will cause a rocking motion that could free your vehicle If that does not get your vehicle out after a few tries it might need to be towed out If yo
239. elt is already buckled neither the chime nor the light will come on The safety belt light will also come on and stay on for several seconds then it will flash for several more 3 59 Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light Several seconds after the engine is started a chime will sound for several seconds to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety belt This would only occur if the passenger airbag is enabled See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 60 for more information The passenger safety belt light will also come on and stay on for several seconds then it will flash for several more This chime and light are repeated if the passenger remains unbuckled and 27 the vehicle is in motion If the passenger s safety belt is buckled neither the chime nor the light will come on 3 60 Airbag Readiness Light There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel cluster which shows the airbag symbol The system checks the airbag s electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem The system check includes the airbag sensor the pretensioners the airbag modules the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module For more information on the airbag system see Airbag System on page 1 51 This light will come on when you start your vehicle and it will flash for a few seconds The light should go out and the system is ready e rl If the airbag
240. em Your vehicle has the following airbags A frontal airbag for the driver A frontal airbag for the right front passenger A seat mounted side impact airbag for the driver Aseat mounted side impact airbag for the right front passenger A roof rail airbag for the driver and the passenger seated directly behind the driver A roof rail airbag for the right front passenger and the passenger seated directly behind the right front passenger All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label near the deployment opening For frontal airbags the word AIRBAG will appear on the middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and on the instrument panel for the right front passenger With seat mounted side impact airbags the word AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest to the door With roof rail airbags the word AIRBAG will appear along the headliner or trim Airbags are designed to supplement the protection provided by safety belts Even though today s airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating bag all airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system A CAUTION You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your safety belt even if you have airbags Wearing your safety belt during a crash help
241. em on page 5 21 for information on the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message appears the following services checks and inspections are required Q Change engine oil and filter See Engine Oil on page 5 18 Reset oil life system See Engine Oil Life System on page 5 21 An Emission Control Service Q Visually check for any leaks or damage See footnote k Q Inspect engine air cleaner filter If necessary replace filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 23 See footnote m Check tires for inflation pressures and wear See Tires on page 5 57 If tire rotation is recommended for your vehicle rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 73 and Tire Wear Inspection in At Least Once a Month on page 6 10 Inspect brake system See footnote a Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels If you have the 4 4L V8 supercharged engine check intercooler fluid level Add fluid as needed Perform any needed additional services See Additional Required Services in this section Inspect suspension and steering components See footnote b Inspect engine cooling system See footnote c Inspect wiper blades See footnote d Inspect restraint system components See footnote e Lubricate body components See footnote f Additional Required Services The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service after t
242. em separately For more information on resetting the engine oil life system see Engine Oil Life System on page 5 21 CHECK BRAKE FLUID This message displays if the ignition is on to inform the driver that the brake fluid level is low Have the brake system serviced by your dealer retailer as soon as possible See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 64 for more information CHECK GAS CAP This message displays when the fuel cap has not been fully tightened Recheck the fuel cap to ensure that it is on and tightened properly CHECK TIRE PRESSURE This message displays when the pressure in one or more of the vehicle s tires needs to be checked If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC stop as soon as you can Have the tire pressures checked and set to those shown on the Tire Loading Information label See Tires on page 5 57 Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 26 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 66 The DIC also shows the tire pressure values See DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 74 If the tire pressure is low the low tire pressure warning light comes on See Tire Pressure Light on page 3 67 CHECK WASHER FLUID This symbol appears with this message This message displays when the windshield washer fluid is low Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir as soon as possible See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 40 for more information 3 83 CLEAN RADAR This message displays when the Adaptive Cruise C
243. emperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Warning The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure 5 80 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis However if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other the alignment might need to be checked If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road the tires and wheels might nee
244. en or melted replace the fuse Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating If you ever have a problem on the road and don t have a spare fuse you can borrow one that has the same amperage Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without like the radio or cigarette lighter and use its fuse if it is the correct amperage Replace it as soon as you can 5 117 Underhood Fuse Block NOTE RELAYS TO BE INSERTED AS PER LABEL AND WITH THE CORRECT ORIENTATION AS INDICATED BY THE NOTCH AN ORIENTATION DIFFERENCE OF 180 IS ACCEPTABLE FOR 4 TERMINAL RELAYS ECM TOM IGN HTD WASH AQS aod FoG LaMP spare RUN CRNK RLY J aad NOTE INSERER LES RELAIS D APRES LES INDICATIONS SUR L ETIQUETTE L INDENTATION INDIQUE L ORIENTATION CORRECTE UNE DIFFERENCE D ORIENTATION OF 180 EST ACCEPTABLE POUR LES RELAYS A 4 BORNES LTHIBEAM SPARE RAIN SNSR TPM CJ CJ CO RT HI BEAM g5 FOG LAMP o SPARE L fom Ge BEAM CO 2 Ladi idias i CO WPR 5 118 The underhood fuse block is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger s side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 11 for more information on location and removal procedure for the front compartment underhood sights shields To access the fuses push in the tabs located on each side of the fuse block cover then lift the cover off Notice Spillin
245. ence Cadillac Technician Roadside Service U S only Cadillac s exceptional Roadside Service is more than an auto club or towing service It provides every Cadillac owner in the United States with the advantage of contacting a Cadillac advisor and where available a Cadillac trained dealer technician who can provide on site service A dealer technician will travel to your location within a 30 mile radius of a participating Cadillac dealership If beyond this radius we will arrange to have your car towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership Each technician travels with a specially equipped service vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac parts and tools required to handle most roadside repairs Calling for Assistance For prompt and efficient assistance when calling please provide the following to the Roadside Service Representative Your name home address and home telephone number Telephone number of your location e Location of the vehicle Model year color and license plate number of the vehicle e Odometer reading Vehicle Identification Number VIN and delivery date of the vehicle Description of the problem Towing and Road Service Exclusions Specifically excluded from Roadside Service coverage are towing or services for vehicles operated on a non public roadway or highway fines impound towing caused by a violation of local Municipal State Provincial or Federal law and mounting dism
246. er degree of steering wheel input at high vehicle speeds may be required Stability Secure Mode will be activated if you are using a compact spare tire See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 and Compact Spare Tire on page 5 106 Persistent operation of your vehicle in the STABILITY SECURE MODE may be an indication that your vehicle needs to be serviced by the dealer retailer When certain faults are present the vehicle s speed may be limited and the SPEED LIMITED TO XXX message will be displayed on the DIC See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 When the vehicle s speed is limited you may see other messages such as SERVICE STABILITY SYS SERVICE STEERING SYS or SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS on the DIC Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer Enhanced StabiliTrak and Traction Control Mode Selection Enhanced StabiliTrak can be operated in Touring Mode or Competitive Mode It can also be turned off The traction control button is used to change stability control modes Touring Competitive or Off as well as to turn traction control on or off See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 6 The following information describes the operation of the traction control button for changing Traction Control and Stability Control Modes When you start your vehicle Stability control comes on automatically in the Stability Touring Mode To change from Stability Touring Mode to Stability Competitive Mode press and hold t
247. er Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users To assist customers who are deaf hard of hearing or speech impaired and who use Text Telephones TTYs Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center Any TTY user can communicate with Cadillac by dialing 1 800 833 CMCC 2622 TTY users in Canada can dial 1 800 263 3830 Customer Assistance Offices Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll free number for assistance However if a customer wishes to write or e mail Cadillac the letter should be addressed to United States Customer Assistance Cadillac Customer Assistance Center Cadillac Motor Car Division P O Box 33169 Detroit MI 48232 5169 www Cadillac com 1 800 458 8006 1 800 833 2622 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 882 1112 Fax Number 313 381 0022 From Puerto Rico 1 800 496 9992 English 1 800 496 9993 Spanish Fax Number 313 381 0022 From U S Virgin Islands 1 800 496 9994 Fax Number 313 381 0022 Canada Customer Assistance General Motors of Canada Limited Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 www gmcanada com 1 888 446 2000 1 800 263 3830 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 882 1112 Overseas Customer Assistance Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit Mexico Central America and Caribbean Islands Countri
248. er fluid Fill the washer fluid tank only three quarters full when it is very cold This allows for fluid expansion if freezing occurs which could damage the tank if it is completely full Do not use engine coolant antifreeze in your windshield washer It can damage the vehicle s windshield washer system and paint Brakes Brake Fluid The brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 11 for reservoir location and access DOT 3 AR There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear When new linings are put in the fluid level goes back up The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake hydraulic system If it is you should have the brake hydraulic system fixed since a leak means that sooner or later the brakes will not work well It is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak If fluid is added when the linings are worn there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are installed Add or remove brake fluid as necessary only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system A CAUTION If your vehicle has too much brake fluid it can spill on the engine The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough You or others could be burned and your vehicl
249. er for our trailering information or advice or you can write us at our Customer Assistance Offices See Customer Assistance Offices on page 7 5 for more information 4 35 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load A of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle The Gross Vehicle Weight GVW includes the curb weight of the vehicle any cargo you may carry in it and the people who will be riding in the vehicle If you have a lot of options equipment passengers or cargo in your vehicle it will reduce the tongue weight your vehicle can carry which will also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow And if you tow a trailer you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight too See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 26 for more information about your vehicle s maximum load capacity 4 36 If you are using a weight carrying hitch the trailer tongue A should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight B After you have loaded your trailer weigh the trailer and then the tongue separately to see if the weights are proper If they are not you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer Total Weight on Your Vehicle s Tires Be sure your vehicle s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires You will find these numbers on the Tire Loading Inform
250. er parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 800 km that you tow a trailer do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads e Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer Do not drive faster than the maximum posted speed for trailers or no more than 55 mph 90 km h to save wear on your vehicle s parts Three important considerations have to do with weight The weight of the trailer The weight of the trailer tongue The total weight on your vehicle s tires Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be It should never weigh more than 1 000 Ibs 450 kg But even that can be too heavy It depends on how you plan to use your rig For example speed altitude road grades outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important It can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry See Weight of the Trailer Tongue later in this section for more information Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required trailering equipment The weight of additional optional equipment passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted form the maximum trailer weight You can ask your dealer retail
251. er vehicles And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with other wheels or tires They will not fit Keep the spare tire and its wheel together Notice Tire chains will not fit your compact spare Using them can damage your vehicle and can damage the chains too Do not use tire chains on your compact spare Appearance Care Interior Cleaning Your vehicle s interior will continue to look its best if it is cleaned often Although not always visible dust and dirt can accumulate on your upholstery Dirt can damage carpet fabric leather and plastic surfaces Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from your upholstery It is important to keep your upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled Soils should be removed as quickly as possible Your vehicle s interior may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains to set rapidly Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent cleaning Use care because newspapers and garments that transfer color to your home furnishings may also transfer color to your vehicle s interior When cleaning your vehicle s interior only use cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on surfaces for which they were not intended Use glass cleaner only on glass Remove any accidental over spray from other surfaces immediately To prevent over spray apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth
252. ers 0 cceeeeeeeeeeees 7 5 Customer Assistance Offices 0 eeeees 7 5 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 065 7 2 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program 7 6 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors 7 14 Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government eceeeeeeeee ees 7 14 Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government 2 7 14 Customer Assistance Information cont Roadside Service W u sssseeeeeeeeeeere erener 7 6 Service Publications Ordering Information 7 15 Daytime Running Lamps 22 22222 sen irissen 3 37 Defensive Driving ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 2 Disc MPS ssctecctesceest iene rier AEEA EEEE 3 112 Doing Your Own Service Work sseseeeerererereee 5 4 Door LOCKS ta ts snes sne E 2 14 Power Door LOCKS 5 23 snert seeren ande 2 14 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 15 Rear Door Security LOCKS 2 15 Driver Information Center DIC eeeeeee 3 74 DIC Operation and Displays ceeeeeeee 3 74 DIC Warnings and Messages 0seeeeeeee 3 80 Other Messages ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeenes 3 97 Driving RENEE ssid en er ninaa E EENE 4 18 Before a Long THP use bnd 4 20 Detensie cereri aena pee r ele bre 4 2 Drunke mM rosee e a E S 4 2 Highway Hypnosis 222252 brian brlnbngre ebbede 4 20 Hill and Mountain Roads 4 21 In Rain and on Wet Roads
253. ers may contain perchlorate materials Special handling may be necessary For additional information see www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Doing Your Own Service Work A CAUTION You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it Be sure you have sufficient knowledge experience the proper replacement parts and tools before you attempt any vehicle maintenance task Be sure to use the proper nuts bolts and other fasteners English and metric fasteners can be easily confused If you use the wrong fasteners parts can later break or fall off You could be hurt If you want to do some of your own service work you should use the proper service manual It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this manual can To order the proper service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 15 Your vehicle has an airbag system Before attempting to do your own service work see Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 64 You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform See Maintenance Record on page 6 18 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it This can cause wind noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance Che
254. es Except Puerto Rico and U S Virgin Islands Customer Assistance General Motors de Mexico S de R L de C V Customer Assistance Center Paseo de la Reforma 2740 Col Lomas de Bezares C P 11910 Mexico D F 01 800 508 0000 Long Distance 011 52 53 29 0 800 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program FIMOBILITY This program available to qualified applicants can reimburse you up to 1 000 of the cost of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle such as hand controls or a wheelchair scooter lift The offer is available for a very limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase lease For more details or to determine your vehicle s eligibility visit gmmobility com or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1 800 323 9935 Text telephone TTY users call 1 800 833 9935 General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program Call 1 800 GM DRIVE 463 7483 for details TTY users call 1 800 263 3830 Roadside Service In the United States or Canada call 1 800 882 1112 Text Telephone TTY U S only call 1 888 889 2438 Service is available 24 hours a day 365 days a year As the owner of a new Cadillac vehicle you are automatically enrolled in the Cadillac Roadside Service program Who Is Covered Roadside Service coverage is for the vehicle operator regardless of ownership In Canada a person driving this vehicle without the consent of the owner is not eligible for c
255. es If the warnings do not come back on drive normally If the warnings continue and you have not stopped pull over stop and park the vehicle right away If there is still no sign of steam idle the engine for three minutes while parked If the warnings are still indicated turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down Also see Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode later in this section You might decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode This operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency Should an overheated engine condition exist an overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage In this mode you will notice a loss in power and engine performance An engine overheat warning will indicate that an overheat condition exists Driving extended miles km and or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be avoided Notice After driving in the overheated engine protection operating mode to avoid engine damage allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair The engine oil will be severely degraded Repair the cause of coolant loss and change the oil See Engine Oil on page 5 18 5 31 Cooling System When you decide it is safe to lift the hood this is what you will see 3 6L V6 Engine shown 4 6L V8 and
256. es on while you are driving pull off the road as soon as possible and stop carefully Turn your engine off and then restart it If the light still stays on or comes back on again while you are driving your vehicle needs service Have the TCS inspected as soon as possible See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 6 and StabiliTrak System on page 4 8 for more information Also see Competitive Driving Mode STS V on page 4 7 for more information 3 65 Lane Departure Warning Light Your vehicle may have the lane departure warning system This light will come on green briefly when the vehicle is started to show that it is working This light will also come on green if the system detects a left or right lane marking This light will change to amber and flash and three beeps will sound if you cross a detected lane marking without using your turn signal For more information see the Index in the Navigation Manual 3 66 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light The engine coolant temperature warning light will come on when the engine is very hot A N This light will also come on briefly when the vehicle is started If the light does not go out or comes on and stays on while driving there may be a problem with the cooling system Driving with engine coolant temperature light on could cause your vehicle to overheat see Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5 31 See Engine Overheating on p
257. eserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the appearance and feel of your interior and are not recommended Do not use silicone or wax based products or those containing organic solvents to clean your vehicle s interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non uniform manner Some commercial products may increase gloss on your instrument panel The increase in gloss may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions 5 109 Wood Panels Use a clean cloth moistened in warm soapy water use mild dish washing soap Dry the wood immediately with a clean cloth Speaker Covers Vacuum around a speaker cover gently so that the speaker will not be damaged Clean spots with just water and mild soap Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry A CAUTION Do not bleach or dye safety belts If you do it may severely weaken them In a crash they might not be able to provide adequate protection Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water 5 110 Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth During very cold damp weather frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 Washing Your Vehicle The best way to preserve your
258. esis 5 99 REMOVING soja rande gelse ones 5 98 SIONO sent vse rr Een Melos re er DE ne Ses 5 104 Specifications Capacities u sssseeeererereree 5 128 speedometer ci scticeisancaceenay caaetacsmedtyesaceauntcenenecten 3 59 StabiliTrak Systemics sorberne 4 8 Start Vehicle Remote ssssssseeeeeeeerrerrrrnee 2 12 Starting the Engine 322522 stn hbn recane 2 29 SEEING al aana eE Ea N E 4 13 Steering Wheel Controls Audio 3 121 Steering Wheel Controls Memory 2 2 77 Steering Wheel Heated cceceeeeeeeeeee eres 3 7 Steering Wheel Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering Column eeeeeeeeeees 3 7 Storage Areas Center Console Storage Area W u ssseeeree 2 58 Convenience Net c ecceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 58 Cupholder S earen munaan oa BED ERA Elen 2 58 GIOVE BOX oera e E E nese EES 2 58 Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow 1 4 25 SUN VISOIS ccecceceeec eee ee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 2 22 SUNS sess iivdes eiar an EEO E eters es cs 2 58 Tachometer iinne e a EEE 3 59 TCS Warning Lig harer areenaan 3 65 Telescopic Steering Column Power Tilt Wheel 3 7 Theft Deterrent Radio ccccceceeeeeeee eee eee 3 121 Theft Deterrent System cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ee 2 22 Theft Deterrent Systems 0ceeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 2 22 lMMODINIZER seisine n ER TR 2 26 Immobilizer Operation u sssseeererereerer
259. ever get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack A CAUTION Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle or the vehicle may fall and cause your or others injury If you ever use a jack to lift your vehicle follow the instructions that came with the jack and be sure to use the correct lifting points to avoid damaging your vehicle 5 84 Notice Lifting your vehicle improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by your warranty To lift your vehicle properly follow the advice in this part To help prevent vehicle damage Be sure the jack you are using meets the weight standards for your vehicle and is in good working order Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack and the vehicle Make sure the jack you are using only contacts the jacking location lift points and is not leaning on any other vehicle components such as the rocker panels the floor pan or the stone guard moldings Lift only in the areas shown in the following pictures Lifting From the Front Lifting From the Rear The front lifting points can be accessed from either side The rear lifting points can be accessed from either side of your vehicle behind the front tires of your vehicle in front of the rear tires 1 Locate the front lifting points using the diagram 1 Locate the rear lifting points using the diagram above The front lifting location is abou
260. ew this information perform the following 1 Press the knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn this knob until INFO displays 3 Press the same knob to select INFO The display changes to show the additional MP3 information 4 Press one of the following pushbuttons to view that specific information F1 TTLE Title Displays the title name F2 ATST Artist Displays the artist name F3 ALBM Album Displays the album name F4 FLDR Folder Displays the folder name 5 Press the BACK F6 button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the BACK F6 button or wait for the display to time out 3 115 XM Radio Messages XL Explicit Language Channels These channels or any others can be blocked at a customer s request by calling 1 800 852 XMXM 9696 XM Updating The encryption code in the receiver is being updated and no action is required This process should take no longer than 30 seconds No XM Signal The system is functioning correctly but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM signal When the vehicle is moved into an open area the signal should return Loading XM The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text data No action is needed This message should disappear shortly Channel Off Air This channel is not currently in service Tune in to another channel Channel Unavail This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned T
261. ewborn infants need complete support The body structure of a young child is quite including support for the head and neck unlike that of an adult or older child for whom This is necessary because a newborn infant s the safety belts are designed A young child s neck is weak and its head weighs so much hip bones are still so small that the vehicle s compared with the rest of its body In a crash regular safety belt may not remain low on the an infant in a rear facing seat settles into hip bones as it should Instead it may settle the restraint so the crash forces can be up around the child s abdomen In a crash distributed across the strongest part of an the belt would apply force on a body area infant s body the back and shoulders that is unprotected by any bony structure Infants should always be secured in This alone could cause serious or fatal appropriate infant restraints injuries Young children should always be secured in appropriate child restraints 1 33 Child Restraint Systems A rear facing infant seat A provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant The harness system holds the infant in place and ina crash acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint A forward facing child seat B provides restraint for the child s body with the harness 1 34 A booster seat C D is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle s safety belt system
262. f the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment 2 26 Immobilizer Operation Your vehicle has a passive theft deterrent system The system is automatically armed when the ignition mode transitions to off The immobilization system is disarmed when the ignition mode transitions to OFF ACCESSORY or START and a valid transmitter is found in the vehicle You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system The security light will come on if there is a problem with arming or disarming the theft deterrent system The system has one or more keyless access transmitters that are matched to an immobilizer control unit in your vehicle Only a correctly matched keyless access transmitter will start the vehicle If the keyless access transmitter is ever damaged you may not be able to start your vehicle When trying to start the vehicle if the engin
263. flation the climate control system off can cause pressure using the air pressure gage on the top deadly carbon monoxide CO See Engine of the unit Exhaust on page 2 38 The pressure gage read high while the compressor is running Turn the compressor off to get an accurate reading 6 Start the vehicle See Starting the Engine on page 2 29 for more information The vehicle must be running while using the air compressor 5 94 9 Turn off the air compressor by moving the switch to Removal and Installation of the Sealant the O off position Canister To remove the sealant canister Z CAUTION Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone Store the tire sealant and compressor kit in the proper place 10 Disconnect the compressor inflator hose and wrap the hose in the bottom of the sealant and compressor kit 11 Place the equipment in the original location in the trunk of your vehicle 1 Unlock the air compressor inflator hose from the sealant canister by pulling the lever up 2 Disconnect the air compressor inflator hose from the sealant canister 5 95 3 Unwrap the sealant filling hose from the compressor 4 Turn the sealant canister so the inflator filling hose is aligned with the slot in the compressor 5 Lift the sealant canister from the com
264. for reimbursement of fuel or other transportation costs Courtesy Rental Vehicle Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair If you obtain a rental vehicle on your own please see your dealer for the maximum number of days allowed and the allowance per rental day Rental reimbursement must be supported by original receipts This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state local and rental vehicle provider requirements Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements insurance coverage credit card etc You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes levies usage fees excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair It may not be possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental Additional Program Information All program options such as shuttle service may not be available at every dealer Please contact your dealer for specific information about availability All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion
265. formation about the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found Safety Warnings and Symbols There are a number of safety cautions in this book A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore the warning A CAUTION These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people We tell you what the hazard is and what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard Please read these cautions If you do not you or others could be hurt A circle with a slash through it is a safety symbol which means Do Not Do Not do this or Do Not let this happen Vehicle Damage Warnings You will also find notices in this manual Notice These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle A notice tells about something that can damage the vehicle Many times this damage would not be covered by your vehicle s warranty and it could be costly The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage When you read other manuals you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use the same words CAUTION or NOTICE Vehicle Symbols The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text Symbols are shown along with the text describing the operati
266. fter a power door lock switch or the lock button on the keyless access transmitter is pressed The eight second delay occurs after the last door is closed If the keyless access transmitter is left inside of the vehicle the doors will not lock Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON default Mode 2 OFF To program the vehicle to a different mode 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until LOCK DELAY is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle 2 74 KEYLESS LOCK DELAY This feature allows you to select whether the doors automatically lock during normal vehicle exit When the ignition is turned off and all doors become closed the vehicle will determine how many keyless access transmitters remain in the vehicle interior If at least one keyless access transmitter has been removed from the interior of the vehicle the doors will lock after 10 seconds For example if there are two keyless access transmitters in the vehicle and one is removed the other will be locked in The keyless access transmitter locked i
267. g the Navigation system For vehicles with the Navigation system you can also recall the memory features by using voice recognition if your vehicle has this feature See Voice Recognition in the Index of the Navigation System manual for more information 2 78 Entering the Driver Selection Submenu To enter the memory programming mode for your driver settings 1 Be sure the ignition is either on in ACCESSORY or in RAP and place the transmission in PARK P or make sure that the vehicle speed is less than 6 mph 9 km h 2 Press any button on the appropriate keyless access transmitter to identify yourself as Driver 1 or Driver 2 3 Turn on the radio by pressing the power volume knob 4 Press the CNFG radio button to enter the main menu of the radio 5 Turn the tune select knob and scroll to SETUP 6 Press the tune select knob to enter the SETUP menu 7 Turn the tune select knob and scroll to DRIVER SELECTION 8 Press the tune select knob to enter the DRIVER SELECTION submenu The following items will appear DRIVER 1 DRIVER 2 e RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS e STORE DRIVER SETTINGS Driver Selection Submenu Items DRIVER 1 DRIVER 2 The numbers on the back of each keyless access transmitter correspond to DRIVER 1 and DRIVER 2 If you would like to recall or store driver settings for the driver that does not correspond to the number on the back of the keyless access transmitter that you are using 1
268. g conditions and avoid driving through large puddles and deep standing or flowing water ACAUTION Wet brakes can cause accidents They might not work as well in a quick stop and could cause pulling to one side You could lose control of the vehicle After driving through a large puddle of water or a car vehicle wash lightly apply the brake pedal until the brakes work normally Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces Driving through flowing water could cause your vehicle to be carried away If this happens you and other vehicle occupants could drown Do not ignore police warnings and be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous Water can build up under your vehicle s tires so they actually ride on the water This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough When your vehicle is hydroplaning it has little or no contact with the road There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet Other Rainy Weather Tips Besides slowing down other wet weather driving tips include Allow extra following distance Pass with caution Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled Have good tires with proper tread depth See Tires on page 5 57 Before Leaving on a Long Trip To prepare your vehicle for a long trip consi
269. g flashers are on your turn signals will not work Other Warning Devices If you carry reflective triangles you can set them up at the side of the road about 300 feet 100 m behind your vehicle Horn Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering wheel pad to sound the horn Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering Column AT AN LA The power tilt and telescope wheel control is located on the outboard side of the steering column To operate the power tilt feature push the control up and the steering wheel tilts up Push the control down and the steering wheel goes down Push the control forward and the steering wheel moves toward the front of the vehicle Push the control rearward and the steering wheel moves toward the rear of the vehicle To set the memory position see Vehicle Personalization on page 2 60 and Memory Seat Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2 77 Heated Steering Wheel Your vehicle may have a heated steering wheel The button with this symbol is located on the left side of the steering wheel ss S Press the button to turn the heated steering wheel on or off A light on the button will display when the feature is turned on The steering wheel will take about three minutes to start heating Turn Signal Multifunction Lever e Cruise Control See Cruise Control on page 3 17 e Adaptive Cruise Control If Equipped See Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3 20 Forward Collisio
270. g for that person If a person of adult size is sitting in the right front passenger s seat but the off indicator is lit it could be because that person is not sitting properly in the seat If this happens turn the vehicle off remove any additional material from the seat such as blankets cushions seat covers seat heaters or seat massagers and ask the person to place the seatback in the fully upright position then sit upright in the seat centered on the seat cushion with the person s legs comfortably Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the extended Restart the vehicle and have the person seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking which remain in this position for two to three minutes helps the passenger sensing system maintain the This will allow the system to detect that person and passenger airbag status See Safety Belts and then enable the right front passenger s frontal airbag Child Restraints in the Index for additional information about the importance of proper restraint use A CAUTION If the airbag readiness light in the instrument panel cluster ever comes on and stays on it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system If this ever happens have the vehicle serviced promptly because an adult size person sitting in the right front passenger s seat may not have the protection of the airbag s See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 60 for more on this including importan
271. g liquid on any electrical components on your vehicle may damage it Always keep the covers on any electrical component Fuses JCase i Usage ABS Module ABS ABS MTR Module StabiliTrak Active Front Steering BLWR Blower Motor FAN 1 Cooling Fan Low Speed FAN 2 Cooling Fan High Speed Fuses Mini Usage BONS Brake Vacuum Pump Climate Control Panel Climate Control Panel Headlamp ei Level Control Active Cruise Control Relay Coils Starter Front Blower ECM 1 Engine Control Module ECM ECM TCM ECM Transmission Control BATT Module TCM ECM TCM Instrument Panel Easy Key Module EKM Instrument EKM V P MDL Banel Module 1 P MDL Even Ignition Coils Even Fuel FOG LAMP Front Fog Lamps TET Front Accessory Power Outlet FUEL COOL Fuel Cooling HORN HTD Heated Headlamp Washer Air WASH AQS Quality Sensor 5 119 HUD Heads Up Display Steering Column Switch BEAM IntelliBeam Relay Instrument Panel Module Assembly WP MDL ALDL Line Data Link Connector License Plate Instrument Panel LT HI BEAM Driver Side High Beam Headlamp LT LO BEAM Driver Side Low Beam Headlamp Driver Side Park Lamp Driver Side ETPRK Taillamp Odd Ignition Coils Odd Fuel BE NR Post Oxygen Sensor PRE O2 SNSR Pre Oxygen Sensor CAM Sensors RAIN Rain Sensor Relay Coil SNSR TPM Headlamp Wash Passenger Side High Beam RT HI BEAM Headlamp Passenger Side Low Beam RT LO BEAM Headlamp Passenger Side Park Lam
272. ge 3 100 for more information TA Traffic Announcement This menu item lets you turn the TA feature on and off See TA Traffic Announcement under Radio s MP3 on page 3 100 for more information RECALL RDS MESSAGE This menu item lets you view an RDS radio station message broadcast by a radio station See MSG Message under Radio s MP3 on page 3 100 for more information amp SEEK LOCAL DISTANT This feature instructs the audio system to seek only local radio stations with the strongest signal or to seek all radio stations with a strong signal in a large area Use LOCAL while in urban areas where there are several strong radio station signals and you want to limit the number of stations to those with the strongest signals only Use DISTANT while in rural areas where there are fewer radio station signals available See Local Distant Selection under Radio s MP3 on page 3 100 for more information SET CLOCK Use this menu item to set the time See Setting the Time on page 3 99 for more information 31 SET DATE Use this menu item to set the date See Setting the Time on page 3 99 for more information i Information This menu item is used to display XM satellite radio service and CD MP3 playback information See i Information under Radio s MP3 on page 3 100 for more information LANG Language To change the language displayed on the radio select LANGUAGE by pressing the
273. ge 5 66 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 for more information Press the information button to scroll through the following displays LF TIRE This display shows the pressure in the driver side front tire RF TIRE This display shows the pressure in the passenger side front tire LR TIRE This display shows the pressure in the driver side rear tire RR TIRE This display shows the pressure in the passenger side rear tire If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a value there may be a problem with your vehicle If this consistently occurs see your dealer retailer for service ENGINE OIL LIFE lf your vehicle has this display it shows the estimated oil life remaining If you see 99 ENGINE OIL LIFE on the display that means that 99 of the current oil life remains When the oil life is depleted the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display Change the oil as soon as possible In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life additional maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 and Engine Oil on page 5 18 After an oil change reset the ENGINE OIL LIFE display To reset see Engine Oil Life System on page 5 21 The display will show 100 ENGINE OIL LIFE after it has been reset Also clear the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message from the display ENGLISH DISPLAY UNITS METRIC DISPLAY UNITS This disp
274. ght That is normal If the light does not come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem If the ABS light stays on turn the ignition off if the light comes on when you are driving stop as soon as it is safely possible and turn the ignition off Then start the engine again to reset the system If the ABS light still stays on or comes on again while you are driving your vehicle needs service If the regular brake system warning light is not on you still have brakes but you do not have antilock brakes If the regular brake system warning light is also on you do not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with your regular brakes See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 64 For vehicles with a Driver Information Center DIC see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 for all brake related DIC messages For vehicles with the Antilock Brake System ABS this light will come on briefly when you start the engine Traction Control System TCS Warning Light If the Traction Control System TCS warning light comes on and stays on there may be a problem with the TCS The TCS warning light will come on briefly when the engine is started If it does not come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem The light will also come on if you turn the TCS off using the traction control on off button located on the console If this light stays on or com
275. gnal Indicators e High Beam Indicator Symbol Driver Shift Control Transmission Feature see Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2 32 e Check Gages Icon Adaptive Cruise Control Features and Indicators If Equipped see Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3 20 Forward Collision Alert Features and Indicators If Equipped see Forward Collision Alert FCA System on page 3 10 e Radio Features 3 44 United States version shown Canada similar Be sure to continue scanning your displays controls and driving environment just as you would in a vehicle without HUD If you never look at your instrument panel cluster you may not see something important such as a warning light Under important warning conditions the CHECK GAGES message will display in the HUD View your Driver Information Center DIC for more information The HUD controls are located to the left of the steering wheel on the DIC control panel EH E amp Head Up Display Press to change the position of the HUD on the windshield To adjust the brightness of the HUD image press the knob on the center of the DIC control panel in until it pops out and then pull the knob until is completely extended Turn the knob clockwise or counter clockwise to increase or decrease the brightness Turn the knob all the way to the left to turn off the HUD image To adjust the HUD so you can see it properly do the following 1 Adjust the seat to
276. gned to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification TPC Spec system rating If you need replacement tires GM strongly recommends that you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating This way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give the same performance and vehicle safety during normal use as the original tires GM s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a dozen critical specifications that impact the overall performance of your vehicle including brake system performance ride and handling traction control and tire pressure monitoring performance GM s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire s sidewall near the tire size If the tires have an all season tread design 5 76 the TPC Spec number will be followed by an MS for mud and snow See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 5 59 for additional information GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four This is because uniform tread depth on all tires will help keep your vehicle performing most like it did when the tires were new Replacing less than a full set of tires can affect the braking and handling performance of your vehicle The optional 18 inch performance tires size 255 45ZR18 99Y used on some vehicles meets the General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification TPC Spec rating but the TPC Spec code has not been molded onto the tire s sidewall If your vehicle has these tires and you need to replace them you can stil
277. gnosis and repair information on engines transmission axle suspension brakes electrical steering body etc Service Bulletins Service Bulletins give additional technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle Owner Information Owner publications are written specifically for owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle The owner manual includes the Maintenance Schedule for all models In Portfolio Includes a Portfolio Owner Manual and Warranty Booklet RETAIL SELL PRICE 35 00 U S plus processing fee Without Portfolio Owner Manual only RETAIL SELL PRICE 25 00 U S plus processing fee Current and Past Model Order Forms Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available for current and past model GM vehicles To request an order form specify year and model name of the vehicle ORDER TOLL FREE 1 800 551 4123 Monday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM Eastern Time For Credit Card Orders Only VISA MasterCard Discover visit Helm Inc on the World Wide Web at www helminc com Or you can write to Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation Allow ample time for delivery Note to Canadian Customers All listed prices are quoted in U S funds Cana
278. go to the previous track Press and hold to reverse quickly within the track Release to play the passage The elapsed time of the track displays F4 CD FWD gt Forward Press to go to the next track Press and hold to advance quickly within the track Release to play the passage The elapsed time of the track displays 3 109 F5 MODE Press to select from NORMAL RPT TRCK Repeat Track RPT DISC Repeat CD RDM TRCK Random Track and RDM ALL Random All CDs e NORMAL Sets the system for normal play of the CD s NORMAL does not display while in this mode RPT TRCK Repeat Track Repeats the track over again RPT TRCK displays Press the MODE pushbutton again to turn off repeat play RPT TRCK disappears from the display RPT DISC Repeat CD Repeats the CD over again RPT DISC displays Press the MODE pushbutton again to turn off repeat play RPT DISC disappears from the display RDM TRCK Random Track Plays the tracks on the current CD in random rather than sequential order RDM TRCK displays Press the MODE pushbutton again to turn off random play RDM TRCK disappears from the display RDM ALL Random All CDs Plays all of the CDs loaded in random rather than sequential order RDM ALL displays Press the MODE pushbutton again to turn off random play RDM ALL disappears from the display 3 110 F6 DISP Display Press to display the time of the track Press again to display CD PLAY MODE K I See
279. h back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear in the box next to the feature name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle 2 66 AUTO EXIT COLUMN If your vehicle has the optional memory package you will have this feature When this feature is turned on you can recall any previously programmed exit position for the steering column when the vehicle is off the shift lever is in PARK P and the driver s door is opened Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF default To program the vehicle to a different mode 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until AUTO EXIT COLUMN is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear in the box next to the feature name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle LIGHTS FLASH AT UNLOCK To program the vehicle to a different mode This feature allows the exterior lamps to flash when 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by the keyless access transmi
280. has these features does not mute Press and release this button again to turn the sound on lf your vehicle has the navigation system press and hold this button for longer than one second to initiate voice recognition See Voice Recognition in the Navigation System manual for more information If your vehicle has OnStar press and hold this button for longer than one second to interact with the OnStar system If your vehicle also has the navigation system press and hold this button for longer than one second to initiate voice recognition and say OnStar to enter OnStar mode See the OnStar System on page 2 48 in this manual for more information Radio Reception Frequency interference and static can occur during normal radio reception if items such as cell phone chargers vehicle convenience accessories and external electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power outlet If there is interference or static unplug the item from the accessory power outlet AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM especially at night The longer range can cause station frequencies to interfere with each other For better radio reception most AM radio stations boost the power levels during the day and then reduce these levels during the night Static can also occur when things like storms and power lines interfere with radio reception When this happens try reducing the treble on your radio FM Stereo
281. he most of available tire and road conditions This can help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard As you brake the computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly Remember ABS does not change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you you will not have time to apply the brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops Always leave enough room up ahead to stop even though you have ABS Using ABS Do not pump the brakes Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let antilock work for you You might hear the antilock pump or motor operate and feel the brake pedal pulsate but this is normal Braking in Emergencies With ABS you can steer and brake at the same time In many emergencies steering can help you more than even the very best braking Traction Control System TCS Your vehicle has a traction control system that limits wheel spin This is especially useful in slippery road conditions On a rear wheel drive vehicle the system operates if it senses that one or both of the rear wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction On an All Wheel Drive AWD vehicle the system will operate if it senses that any of the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction When this happens the system brakes the spinning wheel s and or reduces engine power to limit
282. he indicated miles kilometers shown for each item Additional Required Services TEE 25 000 50 000 75 000 100 000 125 000 150 000 Service and Miles Kilometers 40 000 80000 120000 160 000 200 000 240 000 Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks Inspect exhaust system for loose or damaged components Replace passenger compartment air filter See footnote g Change automatic transmission fluid and filter Severe service See footnote h Change automatic transmission fluid and filter normal service Replace engine air cleaner filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 23 Additional Required Services cont d 25 000 50 000 75 000 100 000 125 000 150 000 Service and Miles Kilometers 40000 g0 000 120 000 160 000 200 000 240 000 For all wheel drive vehicles used for trailer towing Change transfer case fluid Replace spark plugs An Emission Control Service Engine cooling system service or every five years whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote j 4 4L Supercharged Engine Intercooler system service or every five years whichever occurs first See footnote I Inspect engine accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service See footnote n If using DOT 4 brake fluid change brake fluid at a regular maintenance service every two years See footnote i Maintenance Footnotes a Visually
283. he reading lamps are located on the overhead console These lamps come on automatically when any door is opened For manual operation press the button next to each lamp to turn it on or off If the reading lamps are left on they automatically shut off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off Battery Load Management The battery load management feature is designed to monitor the vehicle s electrical load and determine when the battery is in a heavy discharge condition During times of high electrical loading the engine may idle at a higher revolutions per minute rpm setting than normal to make sure the battery charges High electrical loads may occur when several of the following are on headlamps high beams fog lamps rear window defogger the climate control fan at high speeds heated seats and engine cooling fans 3 42 If the battery continues to discharge even with the engine idling at a higher rpm setting some electrical loads will automatically be reduced When this occurs the rear window defogger may take slightly longer to clear the glass and the fan may cut back to a lower speed For more battery saving information see Battery Saver Active Message under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 Electric Power Management The vehicle has Electric Power Management EPM that estimates the battery s temperature and state of charge It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and extended
284. he traction control button for about three seconds until the STABILITY COMPETITIVE MODE message is displayed on the DIC To change from Stability Touring Mode to Stability Off Mode press and hold the traction control button for about five seconds until the STABILITY SYS OFF message is displayed on the DIC The DIC will temporarily display the STABILITY COMPETITIVE MODE message prior to displaying the STABILITY SYS OFF message To change from Stability Competitive Mode to Stability Touring Mode press the traction control button briefly and the STABILITY TOURING MODE message will be displayed on the DIC To change from Stability Competitive Mode to Stability Off Mode press and hold the traction control button for approximately five seconds until the STABILITY SYS OFF message is displayed on the DIC The DIC will temporarily display the STABILITY TOURING MODE message and then the STABILITY COMPETITIVE MODE message prior to displaying the STABILITY SYS OFF message To change from Stability Off Mode to Stability Touring Mode press the traction control button briefly and the STABILITY TOURING MODE message will be displayed on the DIC To change from Stability Off Mode to Stability Competitive Mode press and hold the traction control button for about three seconds until the STABILITY COMPETITIVE MODE message is displayed on the DIC The DIC will temporarily display the STABILITY TOURING MODE message prior to displaying the
285. he vehicle in accessory mode Press the button again to return to RAP Starting the Engine To place the transmission in the proper gear Move the shift lever to PARK P or NEUTRAL N To restart when you are already moving use NEUTRAL N Notice Do not try to shift to PARK P if your vehicle is moving If you do you could damage the transmission Shift to PARK P only when your vehicle is stopped The keyless access transmitter must be inside the vehicle for the ignition to work Cell phone chargers can interfere with the operation of the Keyless Access System Battery chargers should not be plugged in when starting or turning off the engine To start your vehicle do the following Starting Procedure 1 With your foot on the brake pedal press the START button located on the instrument panel If there is not a keyless access transmitter in the vehicle or if there is something causing interference with it the DIC will display NO FOBS DETECTED See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 for more information 2 When the engine begins cranking let go of the button and the engine cranks automatically until it starts If the battery in the keyless access transmitter is weak the DIC displays KEY FOB BATTERY LOW You can still drive the vehicle See Battery Replacement under Keyless Access System Operation on page 2 6 for more information If the fob battery is dead you need to insert the fob into the fob
286. hing on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering Do not use seat accessories that block the inflation path of a seat mounted side impact airbag If your vehicle has roof rail airbags never secure anything to the roof of your vehicle by routing the rope or tie down through any door or window opening If you do the path of an inflating roof rail airbag will be blocked The roof rail airbags for the driver right front passenger and second row outboard passengers are in the ceiling above the side windows 1 55 When Should an Airbag Inflate Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crashes to help reduce the potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver s or right front passenger s head and chest However they are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment threshold Deployment thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is traveling It depends largely on what you hit the direction of the impact and how quickly your vehicle slows down Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds For example e If the vehicle hits a stationary object the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a moving obj
287. hoice take your vehicle there or have it towed there Specify to the facility that any required replacement collision parts be original equipment parts either new Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts Remember recycled parts will not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty Insurance pays the bill for the repair but you must live with the repair Depending on your policy limits your insurance company may initially value the repair using aftermarket parts Discuss this with your repair professional and insist on Genuine GM parts Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts even if your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost If another party s insurance company is paying for the repairs you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation based on that insurance company s collision policy repair limits as you have no contractual limits with that company In such cases you can have control of the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within reasonable limits Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government lf you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA immediately in addition to notifying General Motors If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation If it fin
288. hood down and close it firmly Engine Compartment Overview Your vehicle may be equipped with front compartment underhood sight shields which surround the vehicle s engine cover These sight shields will need to be removed in order to access some of the underhood components in your vehicle To remove the sight shields turn the fasteners on each shield to the left until they pop out Then remove the fasteners and lift the shields up and away from the tower to tower brace 3 6L V6 Engine After you have removed the sight shields if equipped on the 3 6L V6 engine here is what you will see A B Underhood Fuse Block See Underhood Fuse Block on page 5 118 Remote Negative Terminal See Jump Starting on page 5 45 Remote Positive Terminal See Jump Starting on page 5 45 Battery See Battery on page 5 44 Passenger Compartment Air Filter See Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3 55 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir See Power Steering Fluid on page 5 39 Engine Oil Fill Cap See When to Add Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 18 H Engine Oil Dipstick Out of View See Checking Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 18 Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir See Brake Fluid under Brakes on page 5 41 Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap See Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5 29 and Cooling System on page 5 32 Engine Air Cleaner Filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on
289. ht oe 1 000 Ibs load capacity of your vehicle Example 1 453 kg See Towing a Trailer Vehicles With Heavy Duty Cooling on page 4 34 or Towing a Trailer Vehicles Without Heavy Duty Cooling on Subtract Occupant Weight 150 Ibs 300 Ibs 136 kg 68 kg x2 page 4 40 for important information on towing a Available Occupant trailer towing safety rules and trailering tips and Cargo Weight 700 Ibs 317 kg 4 28 Example 2 Item Description Total Vehicle Capacity A Weight for 483 kay 750 Ibs 340 kg Example 2 Subtract Occupant Weight 150 Ibs 68 kg x5 Available Cargo Weight 250 Ibs 113 kg Example 3 Item Description Total Vehicle Capacity A Weight for 1 000 Ibs Example 3 453 kg Subtract Occupant 1 000 Ibs h 2 Case 453 kg Available Cargo EJ Weight 0 Ibs 0 kg Refer to your vehicle s Tire and Loading Information label for specific information about your vehicle s capacity weight and seating positions The combined weight of the driver passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle s capacity weight 4 29 Certification Label CM MFD BY GENERAL MOTORS CORP DATE GWR GAWR FRT LJ Lo LC THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL iigl OTOR NTI WN ANDARDS IN S 0 VEHICLE SAFETY BUMPER 10 F ABOVE EFFECT ON THE D 200 ASS CAR A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to either the driver s door
290. htness see nstrument Panel Brightness on page 3 41 1 Reset Press this button to reset certain DIC features and to acknowledge DIC warning messages and clear them from the DIC display 7S Trip Information Press this button to scroll through the odometer trip odometer A and trip odometer B To reset each trip odometer either press the reset button or press and hold the trip information button until the trip odometer displayed returns to zero Information Display Menu Items The following display menu items can be displayed by pressing the information button MPH km h lf your vehicle has this display it shows the vehicle s speed digitally in either miles per hour mph or kilometers per hour km h MILES RANGE km RANGE This display shows the approximate number of remaining miles mi or kilometers km you can drive without refilling the fuel tank This estimate is based on the current driving conditions and will change if the driving conditions change For example if you are driving in traffic making frequent stops the display may read one number but if you enter the freeway the number may change even though you still have the same amount of fuel in the fuel tank This is because different driving conditions produce different fuel economies Generally freeway driving produces better fuel economy than city driving Once the range drops below about 40 miles 64 km remaining the display will show LOW RAN
291. htness on page 3 41 for more information You can idle the vehicle with the lamps off even when it is dark outside First set the parking brake while the ignition is in OFF ACCESSORY Then start the vehicle The lamps will stay off until the parking brake is released Twilight Sentinel also provides exterior illumination as you leave the vehicle If Twilight Sentinel has turned on the lamps when you turn off the ignition the lamps will remain on until The exterior lamp switch is moved from off to the parking lamp position A delay time that you select has elapsed 3 40 See Vehicle Personalization on page 2 60 to select the delay time that you want You can also select no delay time If the ignition is turned off with the exterior lamp switch in the parking lamp or headlamp position the Twilight Sentinel delay will not occur The lamps will turn off as soon as the switch is turned off As with any vehicle the regular headlamp system should be turned on when needed Exterior Lighting Battery Saver If the parking lamps or headlamps have been left on the exterior lamps will turn off about 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off This protects against draining the battery in case you have accidentally left the headlamps or parking lamps on The battery saver does not work if the headlamps are turned on after the ignition is turned off If you need to leave the lamps on for more than 10 minutes use the exteri
292. iety of programming and commercial free music coast to coast and in digital quality sound During your trial or when you subscribe you will get unlimited access to XM Radio Online for when you are not in your vehicle A service fee is required to receive the XM service For more information contact XM at www xmradio com or call 1 800 929 2100 in the U S and www xmradio ca or call 1 877 438 9677 in Canada Radio Messages for XM Only See XM Radio Messages on page 3 116 later in this section for further detail Using the Single CD Player Insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player pulls it in If the ignition and the radio are on the CD begins playing A CD can be loaded with the radio off but it does not start playing until the radio is on If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the player it stays in the player While the ignition or radio is turned on the CD starts to play where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source When the CD is inserted CD displays As each new track starts to play the track number displays The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch 8 cm single CDs with an adapter ring Full size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner When a CD is inserted the CD functions display above the pushbuttons in place of the preset stations if programmed F1 lt Reverse Press and hold to reverse quickly within a track Release to p
293. ific vehicle design Seat mounted side impact and roof rail airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal impacts near frontal impacts rollovers or rear impacts A seat mounted side impact airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck A roof rail airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck In any particular crash no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were For frontal airbags inflation is determined by what the vehicle hits the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down For seat mounted side impact and roof rail airbags deployment is determined by the location and severity of the side impact What Makes an Airbag Inflate In a deployment event the sensing system sends an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the inflator Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the bag to break out of the cover and deploy The inflator the airbag and related hardware are all part of the airbag module Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering wheel and instrument panel For vehicles with seat mounted side impact airbags there are airbag modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to the door For vehicles with roof rail airbags there are airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle near the side windows that have occupant seating positio
294. ift lever into another gear See Shifting Out of PARK P on page 2 37 Notice Shifting to REVERSE R while your vehicle is moving forward could damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Shift to REVERSE R only after your vehicle is stopped REVERSE R Use this gear to back up At low vehicle speeds you can also use REVERSE R to rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow ice or sand without damaging your transmission See f Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 4 25 for additional information NEUTRAL N In this position the engine does not connect with the wheels To restart when you are already moving use NEUTRAL N only You can also use NEUTRAL N when your vehicle is being towed ACAUTION Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed is dangerous Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal your vehicle could move very rapidly You could lose control and hit people or objects Do not shift into a drive gear while your engine is running at high speed Notice Shifting out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Be sure the engine is not running at high speed when shifting your vehicle DRIVE D This position is for normal driving It provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle If you need more power for
295. igh beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster comes on as soon as the high beams start to come on and remains on until the high beams have completely turned off All vehicles that have IntelliBeam however quickly turn off the high beams if the system detects the sudden presence of vehicle lights ahead Driving with IntelliBeam IntelliBeam only activates the high beams when driving over 20 mph 32 km h The high beam headlamps remain on under the control of IntelliBeam until any of the following situations occur The system detects an approaching vehicle s headlamps The system detects a preceding vehicle s taillamps The outside light is bright enough that high beam headlamps are not required The high beam headlamps are manually turned on or you use the flash to pass feature See Headlamp High Low Beam Changer on page 3 9 and Flash to Pass on page 3 13 When either of these conditions occur the IntelliBeam feature is temporarily disabled until the high beam stalk is returned to the neutral position If either of these conditions occur and IntelliBeam already has the high beam headlamps on the IntelliBeam feature is disabled and the IntelliBeam light in the mirror turns off The exterior lamp control is turned to any setting except AUTO When this occurs IntelliBeam is disabled until the control is turned back to the AUTO position and the AUTOMATIC LIGHTS ON message displays on
296. iginal position To turn the fog lamps off turn the fog lamp band up to the dot and release it The band will return to its original position and the fog lamps will turn off If the high beam headlamps are turned on the fog lamps will also turn off They will turn back on again when you switch back to low beam headlamps Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps Twilight Sentinel Twilight Sentinel can turn your lamps on and off for you A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the Twilight Sentinel work so be sure it is not covered With Twilight Sentinel the following will happen When it is dark enough outside the front turn signal lamps DRL will go off and the headlamps and parking lamps will come on The other lamps that come on with headlamps will also come on When it is bright enough outside the headlamps will go off and the front turn signal lamps DRL will come on as long as the exterior lamp switch is in the off position 3 39 If you start your vehicle in a dark garage the automatic headlamp system will come on immediately Once you leave the garage it will take about one minute for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is light outside During that delay the instrument panel cluster might not be as bright as usual Make sure the instrument panel brightness control is in full bright position See nstrument Panel Brig
297. il airbags Where Are the Airbags ACAUTION Airbags plus lap shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Always secure children properly in your vehicle To read how see Older Children on page 1 28 or Infants and Young Children on page 1 30 There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel cluster which shows the airbag symbol The driver s frontal airbag is in the middle of the steering wheel The system checks the airbag electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 60 for more information 1 53 Driver Side shown Passenger Side similar The right front passenger s frontal airbag is in the instrument panel on the passenger s side The seat mounted side impact airbags for the driver and right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks closest to the door 1 54 ACAUTION If something is between an occupant and an airbag the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag and do not attach or put anyt
298. imate Control System Air Filter Passenger Compartment 3 55 D al K RES Rss ERNE SE SERENE EDR SEE SEERE BE SEE SE ES ESTERE SEES 3 48 Outlet Adjustment W W G ssssseneeereere renerne 3 54 Rear ceceo E aa E SEE 3 54 COCK aoan e aul das E E a S E 3 99 Collision Damage Repair W u dsssseeererererrrree 7 11 Compact Spare Tire ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 106 COMPASS 6 ee renerne r iE 1 7 2 41 Competitive Driving ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee kors 4 18 Competitive Driving Mode ccceeeeeeeeeeeee eee 4 7 Compressor Kit Tire Sealant 2 5 87 Control of a Vehicle ccccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 4 3 Convenience Net ccceceeeeeneceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 58 Coolant Engine Temperature Gage 0 eeeeeeeeee es 3 67 Engine Temperature Warning Light 3 66 Heater Engine cccecersciciietenseecadsneyiiig orale 2 31 Surge Tank Pressure Cap cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 29 Cooling SYSTEM issand inenten coger see eiiean 5 32 Cruise Control sssesereeeeeeeere renen n nere 3 17 Cruise Control Forward Collision Alert FAC System cceeeeeeeeneeeee eee eeaes 3 10 Cruise Control Light ceeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeenes 3 72 Glpholdet sS iyidir cinn nnii ni iar pb tts 2 58 Customer Assistance Information Courtesy Transportation ceeeeeeneeeeeeee ees 7 9 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Us
299. ine Overheating on page 5 29 for more information This message displays when the engine has overheated Immediately look for a safe place to pull your vehicle over and turn the engine off right away to avoid severe engine damage See Engine Overheating on page 5 29 and Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5 31 A chime also sounds when this message is displayed 3 85 ENGINE POWER REDUCED This message displays when the engine power is being reduced to protect the engine from damage There could be several malfunctions that might cause this message Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle s ability to accelerate If this message is on but there is no reduction in performance proceed to your destination The performance may be reduced the next time the vehicle is driven The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed while this message is on but acceleration and speed may be reduced Anytime this message stays on take the vehicle to your dealer retailer for service as soon as possible ENGINE PROTECTION REDUCED RPM S Revolutions Per Minute This message displays when your vehicle is in an overheated engine operating mode If this message appears the vehicle has determined that continued operation at the existing engine speed may lead to engine overheating The vehicle automatically limits engine RPMs to prevent engine overheating 3 86 You may notice the vehicle upshifting early or reduced speeds whil
300. inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5 70 for additional information Federal Communications Commission FCC and Industry and Science Canada The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS operates on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must ac
301. ingS disri eaa iv KO Fe Yo Hare F nss sneen senere nere see Ens Er re eee iA 4 26 SYMB AS HEER nen aa aaa ia a iv Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy 1 1 1 W 7 16 Vehicle Identification Number VIN ca raderer leende 5 116 Service Parts Identification Label 5 116 Vehicle Personalization ceeeeeeeeeeeees 2 60 Memory Seat Mirrors and Steering Wheel 2 77 Vehicle Remote Start c ccccccecceseeeeeeeeeees 2 12 Ventilated Seats somsicmaisi arotan 1 3 Ventilation Adjustment eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eees 3 54 VIS DES eea a E E E EE 2 22 13 W Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 3 57 Warnings DIC Warnings and Messages 0 1eeeeee 3 80 Hazard Warning Flashers iccse 3 6 Other Warning Devices ccceeeeeeneee eee ees 3 6 Safety and Symbols 0c sceeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeenes iii Vehicle Damage siita adspredelse Dhaka Rebel iv Washer Headlamps eeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeerees 3 16 Wheels Alignment and Tire Balance 1 5 80 Different Sige cic shsalueicinesievesssaeeeceatenesecemenees 5 78 Replacement iseci usanii ni pi ani 5 80 Where to Put the Restraint 1 1 W1 1 1 W ssssseseeereersee 1 36 WINdOWS His keh ee eee 2 19 POWER siinne aaa a 2 20 Windshield Rainsense Wipers eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 15 Replacement cscs rrine ak 5 55 Washer eee ERE SE LSD KEE Ea SE E A 3 16 14 Windshi
302. ings that you wrote down in Step 2 will now become the button strokes you Left Middle Right enter into the Universal Home Remote in o Step 4 Be sure to enter the switch settings that On Neutral Off you wrote down in Step 2 in order from left to right into the Universal Home Remote when completing Step 4 4 The indicator lights will blink slowly Enter each 3 From inside your vehicle first firmly press all three switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle s buttons at the same time for about three seconds Universal Home Remote You will have Release the buttons to put the Universal Home two and one half minutes to complete Step 4 Remote into programming mode Now press one button on the Universal Home Remote for each switch setting as follows e If you wrote Left press the left button in the vehicle e If you wrote Right press the right button in the vehicle e If you wrote Middle press the middle button in the vehicle 2 56 5 After entering all of the switch positions again firmly press and release all three buttons at the same time The indicator lights will turn on 6 Press and hold the button you would like to use to control the garage door until the garage door moves The indicator light above the selected button should slowly blink You may need to hold the button from five to 55 seconds 7 Immediately release the button when the garage door moves The indicator light will
303. instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until KEYLESS FT DOOR UNLOCK is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle KEYLESS DOORS UNLOCK This feature automatically unlocks all of the doors when you approach the vehicle with the keyless access transmitter and pull either front door handle See Door Locks on page 2 14 for more information Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON default Mode 2 OFF To program the vehicle to a different mode 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until KEYLESS DOORS UNLOCK is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle 2 73 LOCK DELAY This feature delays the locking of the vehicle s doors for eight seconds a
304. io System The following descriptions are for the Base audio system For information pertaining to the Navigation audio system see Audio System in the Index of the Navigation System manual supplied with your vehicle d BASS MID Midrange TREBLE This menu item lets you adjust the levels for the bass midrange and treble features of the audio system See Setting the Tone Bass Treble under Radio s MP3 on page 3 100 for more information BALANCE FADER This menu item lets you adjust the levels for the balance and fader features of the audio system See Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade under Radio s MP3 on page 3 100 for more information a EQ Equalizer This menu item lets you choose among five preset equalizations for the audio system See Audio Equalizer under Radio s MP3 on page 3 100 for more information 3 118 H A Home Away PRESETS This menu item lets you switch back and forth between your home and away preset radio stations See Presets Home Away under Radio s MP3 on page 3 100 for more information AUTOSTORE PRESETS This menu item lets you automatically store radio stations with the strongest signals as presets See Autostore Presets under Radio s MP3 on page 3 100 for more information CAT Category This menu item lets you select radio stations based on preset categories See Activating Program Type PTY Stations under Radio s MP3 on pa
305. irror The IntelliBeam indicator turns off and does not come back on until the IntelliBeam button is pressed again When IntelliBeam has turned on the high beams pull or push the high beam stalk This disables IntelliBeam and the IntelliBeam indicator on the rearview mirror turns off To re enable IntelliBeam press the IntelliBeam button on the mirror A different sensitivity setting is available for dealer diagnostics This is done by pushing and holding this button for 20 seconds until the light flashes three times If you accidentally activate this the vehicle s setting automatically resets each time the ignition is turned off and then on again otherwise refer to the text above for resetting the system 3 36 Cleaning the IntelliBeam Light Sensor The light sensor is located on the inside g of the vehicle at the back of the rearview a mirror t Clean the light sensor window periodically using glass cleaner on a soft cloth Gently wipe the sensor window Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the surface of the sensor window Wiper Activated Headlamps This feature activates the headlamps and parking lamps after the windshield wipers have been in use for about six seconds For this feature to work automatic lighting must be enabled See Headlamps on page 3 33 for additional information When the ignition is turned off the wiper activated headlamps will immediately turn off They wil
306. irrors are heated to help clear them of ice snow or condensation See Rear Window Defogger under Dual Climate Control System on page 3 48 2 43 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror The driver s side mirror will adjust for the glare of headlamps behind you This feature is controlled by the on and off settings on the automatic dimming rearview mirror Outside Convex Mirror A CAUTION A convex mirror can make things like other vehicles look farther away than they really are If you cut too sharply into the right lane you could hit a vehicle on your right Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes The passenger side mirror is convex A convex mirror s surface is curved so more can be seen from the driver s seat This mirror does not have a dimming feature 2 44 Outside Parallel Park Assist Mirror This feature assists the driver by improving rear obstacle detection and is useful in viewing the curb when parallel parking Press the left or right mirror symbol on the selector control to choose the driver or passenger outside mirror When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE R the selected mirror will tilt to a factory programmed position If further mirror adjustment is needed press the arrows located on the outside mirror control pad If the outside mirror selector switch is in the middle position neither outside mirror will move When the vehicle is shifted out of REVE
307. is message This message displays when the passenger side front door is not closed completely Make sure that the door is closed completely PRESS START AND BRAKE TO START ENGINE This message displays when you need to press down on the brake pedal while pressing the start button on the electronic keyless ignition when trying to start your vehicle See Starting the Engine on page 2 29 for more information 3 89 RADAR CRUISE NOT READY This message displays when the Adaptive Cruise Control system is not activating due to a temporary condition Your vehicle does not require service This message also displays when either of the following conditions occur The driver turns off the head up display HUD while the Adaptive Cruise Control is engaged The driver attempts to engage the Adaptive Cruise Control while the HUD is off If this message appears when attempting to activate the system continue driving for several minutes and then try activating the system again RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR This symbol appears with this message 3 90 This message displays when the passenger side rear door is not closed completely Make sure that the door is closed completely SERVICE AC Air Conditioning SYSTEM This message displays when the electronic sensors that control the air conditioning and heating systems are no longer working Have the climate control system serviced by your dealer retailer if a drop in heating and air
308. is pushed turn this feature on If this feature is left off the window lockout button located on the door will deactivate only the rear windows See Power Windows on page 2 20 for more information Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF default To program the vehicle to a different mode 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until FRONT PASS WINDOW LOCK is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle 2 75 CHIME VOLUME HIGH This feature allows you to adjust the volume level of the vehicle s warning chimes The chime volume cannot be turned off only adjusted Programmable Modes Mode 1 NORMAL default Mode 2 HIGH To program the vehicle to a different mode 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until CHIME VOLUME HIGH is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth between the normal and high settings A check mark indicates that the chime volume
309. itch to off to disengage the system Adaptive Cruise Control information does not appear on the HUD while the system is not engaged 3 32 Erasing Set Speed Memory When the Adaptive Cruise Control switch or the ignition is turned off the set speed memory is erased Other Messages There are three messages that may appear on the DIC They are SERVICE RADAR CRUISE RADAR CRUISE NOT READY and CLEAN RADAR These messages will appear to indicate a problem with the Adaptive Cruise Control See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 for more information Cleaning the System The radar can become blocked by snow ice or dirt If so you may need to turn off the engine and clean the emblem lens located in the center of the front outside grille Remember do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in icy conditions or when visibility is low such as in fog rain or snow To clean the emblem lens wipe the surface with a soft cloth After cleaning the emblem lens engage the Adaptive Cruise Control If you are unable to do so see your dealer retailer Headlamps The exterior lamp control is located in the middle of the turn signal multifunction lever Exterior Lamp Control Turn the control with this symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps The exterior lamp control has four positions D On Off Turn the control to this position to turn off all lamps and automatic lighting features including Daytime Running Lamps DRL a
310. k Press the left arrow to go to the previous or press the right arrow button to go to the next track on the CD K l Scan Press the arrows to listen to each track for 10 seconds The CD goes to a track plays for 10 seconds then goes to the next track Press the arrows again to stop scanning A Eject Press to eject the CD that is currently playing or press and hold to eject all of the CDs loaded A beep sounds Eject can be activated with the ignition or radio off Playing an MP3 CD R Disc The vehicle s radio system could have the MP3 feature If it has this feature it is capable of playing an MP3 CD R disc For more information on how to play an MP3 CD R disc see Using an MP3 on page 3 112 later in this section CD Messages If the CD comes out it could be for one of the following reasons If it is very hot When the temperature returns to normal the CD should play e If you are driving on a very rough road When the road becomes smoother the CD should play The CD is dirty scratched wet or upside down The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again The format of the CD might not be compatible See Using an MP3 on page 3 112 later in this section There could have been a problem while burning the CD The label could be caught in the CD player If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good CD If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
311. kg force on a person s arms A baby should be secured in an appropriate restraint 1 31 A CAUTION Children who are up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Airbags plus lap shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide 1 32 Q What are the different types of add on child restraints Add on child restraints which are purchased by the vehicle s owner are available in four basic types Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child s weight height and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used For most basic types of child restraints there are many different models available When purchasing a child restraint be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle If it is the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards The restraint manufacturer s instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint In addition there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs ACAUTION ACAUTION N
312. king automatically stops after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage 2 30 To prevent gear damage this system also prevents cranking if the engine is already running Notice The engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle If you add electrical parts or accessories you could change the way the engine operates Before adding electrical equipment check with your dealer retailer If you do not your engine might not perform properly Any resulting damage would not be covered by your vehicle s warranty Stopping Your Engine Move the shift lever to PARK P and press the Acc button located on the instrument panel If the shifter is not in PARK P the engine shuts off and the vehicle goes into the Accessory Mode The DIC displays SHIFT TO PARK Once the shifter is moved to PARK P the vehicle turns off The DIC displays NO FOB OFF OR RUN if the keyless access transmitter is not detected inside the vehicle when it is turned off See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 for more information Engine Coolant Heater The engine coolant heater if available can help in cold weather conditions at or below 0 F 18 C for easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm up Plug in the coolant heater at least four hours before starting your vehicle An internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord may exist which will prevent engine coolant heater operation at temperatures abov
313. l Side Blind Zone Splice Pack Blue Alert Option Relays Usage SSS 5 127 Capacities and Specifications The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 for more information Application m n mee For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge amount see the refrigerant caution label located under the hood See your dealer retailer for more information TSU TET Intercooler System 4 4L V Series Engine 2 5L ToL 4 4L V Series Engine Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a 5 128 Application Engen O Transmission Pan Removal and Filter Replacement 6 Speed Automatic 6 7 qt 6 Speed Automatic V Series 6 5 qt Wheel Nut Torque 100 Ib ft 140 Nem All capacities are approximate When adding be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in this manual Recheck the fluid level after filling Engine Specifications COO Enge ViNCode Transmission SparkPlug Gap AL DOHC V8 V Series D O Automate 0 040 inches 1 02 mm STS V Engine Data Engine Horsepower Torque Displacement Compression Ratio p3p 469hp 350 kW 439 Ib ft 595 Nm 4 4L V8 V Series PAT n 4 4L 9 0 1 5 129 4 NOTES 5 130 Section 6 Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Schedule 0 eeeeeeeeeneees 6 2 Owner Checks and Services 6 9 IMMOGUCHON 0 sort E bende dan sek decane 6 2
314. l not move even when you are on fairly level ground use the steps that follow If you are pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer Vehicles With Heavy Duty Cooling on page 4 34 or Towing a Trailer Vehicles Without Heavy Duty Cooling on page 4 40 To shift into PARK P use the following steps 1 Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot 2 Move the shift lever into PARK P by pressing the button on the front of the shift lever while pushing the lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle Release the button 2 36 3 With your right foot still holding the brake pedal down set the parking brake with your left foot See Parking Brake on page 2 35 for more information 4 Turn the ignition off Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running A CAUTION It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set And if you leave the vehicle with the engine running it could overheat and even catch fire You or others could be injured Do not leave your vehicle with the engine running If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running be sure your vehicle is in PARK P and your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it After you have moved the shift lever into PARK P hold the regular brake pedal down Then see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK P witho
315. l also turn off if the windshield wiper control is turned off Headlamps on Reminder A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp control is left on in either the headlamp or parking lamp position and the driver s door is opened with the ignition off See Lights On Reminder on page 3 72 for additional information Daytime Running Lamps DRL Daytime Running Lamps DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada The DRL system will make the turn signal lamps come on when the following conditions are met Itis still daylight and the ignition is on the automatic lights are enabled and the transmission is not in PARK P When DRL are on only the front turn signal lamps will be on No other exterior lamps will be on when the DRL are being used The instrument panel will not be lit When the automatic lights are enabled and it is dark enough outside the DRL will turn off and the low beam headlamps will turn on When it is bright enough outside the low beam headlamps will go off and the DRL will turn back on If the vehicle is started in a dark garage the automatic headlamp system will come on immediately Once the vehicle leaves the garage it will t
316. l get these TPC Spec rated tires by asking your GM dealer Your GM dealer can order these tires by part number This way your vehicle will continue to give the proper endurance handling traction and ride as the original tires Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original equipment tires may not be available for H V W Y and ZR speed rated tires If you choose snow tires with a lower speed rating never exceed the tire s maximum speed capability ACAUTION Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving If you mix tires of different sizes other than those originally installed on your vehicle brands or types radial and bias belted tires the vehicle may not handle properly and you could have a crash Using tires of different sizes other than those originally installed on your vehicle brands or types may also cause damage to your vehicle Be sure to use the correct size brand and type of tires on all wheels It is all right to drive with your vehicle s compact spare temporarily it was developed for use on your vehicle See Compact Spare Tire on page 5 106 ACAUTION If you use bias ply tires on your vehicle the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving A tire and or wheel could fail suddenly causing a crash Use only radial ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle If you must replace your vehicle s tires with those that do not have a TPC Spec num
317. l necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle We recommend the use of genuine parts from your dealer retailer Scheduled Maintenance To maintain the ride handling and performance of your vehicle it is important that the first tire rotation service be performed when the vehicle has 5 000 to 8 000 miles 8 000 to 13 000 km Check tires for inflation pressures and wear See Tires on page 5 57 If tire rotation is recommended for your vehicle rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 73 and Tire Wear Inspection in At Least Once a Month on page 6 10 When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message in the Driver Information Center DIC comes on it means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 600 miles 1 000 km It is possible that if you are driving under the best conditions the engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a year However the engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset Your dealer retailer has trained service technicians who will perform this work using genuine parts and reset the system lf the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally you must service your vehicle within 3 000 miles 5 000 km since your last service Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed See Engine Oil Life Syst
318. lashing A misfire condition has been detected A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could damage the emission control system on your vehicle Diagnosis and service might be required Light On Steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle Diagnosis and service might be required If the Light Is Flashing The following can prevent more serious damage to your vehicle e Reduce vehicle speed Avoid hard accelerations Avoid steep uphill grades If the light stops flashing and remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light continues to flash when it is safe to do so stop the vehicle Find a safe place to park the vehicle Turn the engine off wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine If the light remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light is still flashing follow the previous steps and see your dealer retailer for service as soon as possible If the Light Is On Steady You might be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle If so reinstall the fuel cap making sure to fully install the cap See Filling the Tank on page 5 7 The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the c
319. lass antenna due to metallic tinting materials will not be covered by your warranty If static is heard on the radio when the rear window defogger is turned on it could mean that a defogger grid line has been damaged If this is true the grid line must be repaired 3 124 If adding a cellular telephone to your vehicle and the antenna needs to be attached to the glass make sure that the grid lines for the AM FM antenna are not damaged There is enough space between the grid lines to attach a cellular telephone antenna without interfering with radio reception XM Satellite Radio Antenna System The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of your vehicle Keep this antenna clear of snow and ice build up for clear radio reception If your vehicle has a sunroof the performance of the XM system may be affected if the sunroof is open Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere with the performance of the XM system Make sure the XM Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed Section 4 Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle 4 2 Defensive Driving ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 2 Drunk DIVINO essene ankelen ye bose E EEN 4 2 Control of a Vehicle W W W sssseeererererenennee 4 3 Braking zeiss oer eaan o he este anaes 4 4 Antilock Brake System ABS i c 4 5 Braking in Emergencies u sssscserererreseersene 4 6 Traction Control System TCS
320. lay When the manual mode is active an M will appear on the DIC display When the normal mode is active only the shift position indicator will appear While the Driver Shift Control DSC feature is active the DIC will change to show the selected gear See Driver Shift Control DSC under Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2 32 for more information If a problem is detected a warning message will appear on the display Be sure to take any message that appears on the display seriously and remember that clearing the message will only make the message disappear not correct the problem DIC Operation and Displays The Driver Information Center DIC has different modes which can be accessed by pressing the four DIC buttons located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel DIC Buttons Base Level If your vehicle does not have a Head Up Display HUD these are the buttons for the DIC Ae AAV Information Press the top or bottom of this button to scroll through the available vehicle information displays which include digital speed display if your vehicle has this feature fuel range fuel economy fuel used average speed timer battery voltage tire pressure and engine oil life if your vehicle has this feature If you have an STS V the DIC also has additional vehicle information displays which include engine boost engine oil temperature oil pressure and transmission fluid tempera
321. lay allows you to select between English and metric units of measurement if your vehicle has the uplevel DIC Press the reset button to switch between English and metric units Blank Line This display shows no information ENGINE BOOST STS V Only This display shows a graphic that indicates the amount of boost the engine is receiving in either pounds per square inch psi or kilopascals kPa ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE STS V Only This display shows the engine oil temperature in either degrees Fahrenheit F or degrees Celsius C OIL PRESSURE STS V Only This display shows the oil pressure in either pounds per square inch psi or kilopascals kPa TRANS Transmission FLUID TEMP Temperature STS V Only This display shows the transmission fluid temperature in either degrees Fahrenheit F or degrees Celsius C Trip Information Display Menu Items The following display menu items can be displayed by pressing the trip Information button Odometer Press the trip information button until the odometer appears on the DIC display The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles mi or kilometers km Trip Odometer Press the trip information button until trip odometer A or B appears on the DIC display The trip odometer shows the current distance traveled since the last reset for each trip odometer in either miles mi or kilometers km Both odometers can be used at the
322. lay the passage The elapsed time of the track displays F2 gt Forward Press and hold to advance quickly within a track Release to play the passage The elapsed time of the track displays 3 107 F3 RDM Random Press to listen to the tracks in random rather than sequential order RANDOM displays Press again to turn off random play RANDOM disappears from the display F4 RPT Repeat Press to hear a track over again REPEAT displays Press again to turn off repeat play REPEAT disappears from the display F6 DISP Display Press to display the time of the track Press again to remove the time of the track from the display K dl Seek Press the left arrow to go to the previous or press the right arrow button to go to the next track on the CD K l Scan Press the arrows to listen to each track for 10 seconds The CD goes to a track plays for 10 seconds then goes to the next track Press the arrows again to stop scanning SRCE Source Press to select a source either radio or CD The CD must be loaded to select the source and to play CD displays if a CD is loaded If a CD is not loaded the display does not change from the radio source A Eject Press to stop a CD when it is playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing Eject can be activated with the ignition and the radio off 3 108 Using the Six Disc CD Changer Load Press to load CDs into the CD player This CD player holds up to six CDs
323. life of the battery When the battery s state of charge is low the voltage is raised slightly to quickly put the charge back in When the state of charge is high the voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or a voltage display on the Driver Information Center DIC you may see the voltage move up or down This is normal If there is a problem an alert will be displayed The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical loads are very high This is true for all vehicles This is because the generator alternator may not be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is needed for very high electrical loads A high electrical load occurs when several of the following loads are on headlamps high beams fog lamps rear window defogger climate control fan at high speed heated seats engine cooling fans trailer loads and loads plugged into accessory power outlets EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery It does this by balancing the generator s output and the vehicle s electrical needs It can increase engine idle speed to generate more power whenever needed It can temporarily reduce the power demands of some accessories Normally these actions occur in steps or levels without being noticeable In rare cases at the highest levels of corrective action this action may be noticeable to the driver If so a Driver Information Center DIC
324. limate Control System The heating cooling and ventilation can be controlled for the vehicle with this system Automatic Operation Vehicles With Heated and Ventilated Seats Shown Vehicles Without Similar AUTO Automatic When this button is pressed and the temperature is set the system automatically controls the inside temperature the air delivery mode the air conditioning compressor and the fan speed AUTO will appear on the display next to the fan mode indicators and recirculation indicator if the vehicle has a air quality sensor 1 Press the AUTO button 2 Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting generally between 70 F 21 C and 80 F 27 C Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature setting will not cause the system to heat or cool any faster If the system is set at the warmest temperature setting the system will try to continuously heat the vehicle and will not adjust the system down as the vehicle warms up In cold weather the system can start at reduced fan speeds to avoid blowing cold air into the vehicle until warmer air is available The system starts out blowing air at the floor but can automatically change modes as the vehicle warms up to maintain the chosen temperature setting The length of time needed for warm up depends on the outside temperature and the length of time that has elapsed since the vehicle was last driven 3 Wait for the system to regulate This may take from
325. ll light either ON or OFF or either the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the right front passenger s frontal airbag If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator it means that the right front passenger s frontal airbag is enabled may inflate A CAUTION If the on indicator comes on when you have a rear facing child restraint installed in the right front passenger s seat it means that the passenger sensing system has not turned off the passenger s frontal airbag A child ina rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag Do not use a rear facing child restraint in the right front passenger s seat if the airbag is turned on 3 62 A CAUTION Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger s frontal airbag if the system detects a rear facing child restraint no system is fail safe and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off We recommend that rear facing child restraints be secured in the rear seat even if the airbag is off If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag status indicator it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger
326. ll neck until the coolant reaches the COLD FILL line on the fill neck With the Intercooler System pressure cap off start the engine and let it run for a couple of minutes Then turn the engine off By this time the coolant level inside the fill neck may be lower If the level drops to where coolant is no longer visible in the horizontal tube section of the fill neck with the engine off add more of the DEX COOL coolant mixture to the fill neck until the level is again visible in the horizontal tube section Then replace the pressure cap Be sure the pressure cap is hand tight and fully seated If the coolant is not at the proper level when the system cools down again see your dealer Power Steering Fluid See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 11 for reservoir location AR When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired How to Check Power Steering Fluid To check the power steering fluid do the following 1 Turn the ignition off and let the engine compartment cool down 2 Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean 3 Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag 4 Replace the cap and completely tighten it 5 Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level
327. llow it to idle until the transmission cools down or until this message is removed TRUNK OPEN This symbol appears with this message This message displays when the trunk is not closed completely Make sure that the trunk is closed completely TURN SIGNAL ON This message displays and a chime sounds if a turn signal is left on for about 1 mile 1 6 km Turn off the turn signal Other Messages Here are more messages that you can receive on your Driver Information Center DIC To acknowledge a message and read another message that may have come on at the same time press the reset button e ACCESSORY ACTIVE See Ignition Positions on page 2 28 e KNOWN FOB See Matching Transmitter s to Your Vehicle under Keyless Access System Operation on page 2 6 MAX FOBS LEARNED See Matching Transmitter s to Your Vehicle under Keyless Access System Operation on page 2 6 e OFF ACC Accessory TO LEARN See Matching Transmitter s to Your Vehicle under Keyless Access System Operation on page 2 6 e READY FOR FOB X See Matching Transmitter s to Your Vehicle under Keyless Access System Operation on page 2 6 e SHIFT TO PARK See Starting the Engine on page 2 29 and Shifting Into PARK P on page 2 36 WAIT XX MIN Minutes See Matching Transmitter s to Your Vehicle under Keyless Access System Operation on page 2 6 3 97 Audio System s Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read the pages
328. llow greater following distance on any slippery road Watch for slippery spots The road might be fine until you hit a spot that is covered with ice On an otherwise clear road ice patches can appear in shaded areas where the sun cannot reach such as around clumps of trees behind buildings or under bridges Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear If you see a patch of ice ahead of you brake before you are on it Try not to brake while you are actually on the ice and avoid sudden steering maneuvers If You Are Caught in a Blizzard If you are stopped by heavy snow you could be in a serious situation You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe Turn on the hazard warning flashers Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you have been stopped by the snow Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you If you do not have blankets or extra clothing make body insulators from newspapers burlap bags rags floor mats anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm 4 23 A CAUTION Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle This can cause deadly CO carbon monoxide gas to get inside CO could overcome you and kill you You cannot see it
329. ln eks Grantee atten 5 44 Electric Power Management 0eeeeeee 3 42 Exterior Lighting Battery Saver 08 3 40 Inadvertent Power Saver ceceeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 43 Load Management eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 42 Brake Emergencies crierai eie o T 4 6 Brakes ennet isunari an e pea anain 5 41 Panic ASSIS irina sonnden an ian 4 12 System Warning Light W u u dssseseeeeeererererer 3 64 BiaKinG Saeron re EE ETSE 4 4 Braking in Emergencies 22 sabeer ends 4 6 Break In New Vehicle cccececeeeeeeeeaeeeeeees 2 27 Bulb Replacement eceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 54 Back Up Lamp Sessan enaner 5 54 Halogen BUDS torsos iessu 5 54 Headlamp Aiming vers klerk 5 53 Bulb Replacement cont High Intensity Discharge HID Lighting 5 54 Replacement Bulbs eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 55 Buying New TireS cceceeeeeeeeeeneceeeeeeeeeeeees 5 76 Calibration seerne eee ege nere 1 7 2 41 California Fuel W u seseeserererereeee renerne nerne 5 6 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements 5 4 California Proposition 65 Warning 5 3 Canadian OWNe S cceeceeeeee eee eeeeeee tease aiin ii Capacities and Specifications eeeee 5 128 Carbon Monoxide 2 16 2 38 4 22 4 34 4 40 Care of Safety BMS siini ince nania aii 5 110 CD MPS iris seje EENE EAEE EREN 3 112 Center Console Storage Area
330. ls can be viewed by the driver For additional information and details about the DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 74 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool weather when the vehicle is first started and then turn off as you start to drive This could be an early indicator that the air pressure in the tire s are getting low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure A Tire and Loading Information label attached to your vehicle shows the size of your vehicle s original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for your vehicle s tires when they are cold See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 26 for an example of the Tire and Loading Information label and its location on your vehicle Also see Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 66 Your vehicle s TPMS can warn you about a low tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire maintenance See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 73 and Tires on page 5 57 Your vehicle when new may have included a factory installed Tire Inflator Kit This kit uses a GM approved liquid tire sealant See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 5 87 Notice Using non approved tire sealants could damage the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS sensors TPMS sensor damage caused by using an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the vehicle warranty Always use the GM approved tire
331. ls for the life of the vehicle helping to produce a cleaner environment The check engine light comes on to indicate that there is an OBD II problem and service is required Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before any problem is apparent This can prevent more serious damage to your vehicle This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction Notice If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on after a while the emission controls might not work as well your vehicle s fuel economy might not be as good and the engine might not run as smoothly This could lead to costly repairs that might not be covered by your warranty 3 68 Notice Modifications made to the engine transmission exhaust intake or fuel system of your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria TPC can affect your vehicle s emission controls and can cause this light to come on Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty This could also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection Maintenance test See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 This light comes on briefly as a check to show it is working as you start the engine If the light does not come on have it repaired This light also comes on during a malfunction in one of two ways Light F
332. lsviediesewedenttaxesieatlaaveracess 2 40 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement _ 5 55 Object Detection Systems cccceeeee 2 45 TIKES henaioucsa cheered ductors Aaaa a 5 57 OnStar System oo eeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 48 Appearance Care on ee ccc ec cccecceceeeeeee eee es 5 107 Universal Home Remote System _ 2 51 Vehicle Identification eee eeeeee eee ee neces 5 116 Storage Areas ooo eee cece ee ae ee EiS 2 58 Electrical System oo eee ecc ec cc eee ee eee eee eee 5 116 OUMMOON oser RSA 2 58 Capacities and Specifications 5 128 Vehicle Personalization oo cece cece ec ec cece eens 2 60 Maintenance Schedule eseeseeeeenee eres 6 1 Instrument Panel 0ceceeceseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 3 1 Maintenance Schedule cc ceeeeee cece eens ees 6 2 Instrument Panel Overview cc ceeeeeeeee eee 3 4 Customer Assistance Information 7 1 Climate Controls sesiresiiererarrononsr iiai 3 48 Customer Assistance and Information 7 2 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators _ 3 57 Reporting Safety Defects oo 7 14 Driver Information Center DIC eee 3 74 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy _ 7 16 Audio SysteMm S oo ccc cec ccc eceec cence iinn 3 98 AGO 255 dc et E E en ede 1 Canadian Owners A French language copy of this manual can be obtained from your dealer retailer
333. m that continuously adjusts the effort you feel when steering at all vehicle speeds It provides ease when parking yet a firm solid feel at highway speeds Active Steering All wheel drive vehicles with the Active Steering with Enhanced StabiliTrak option have an electronically controlled active steering system The active steering system uses the steering actuator to automatically adjust the front road wheel turning angle based on vehicle speed and how much you turn the steering wheel This system reduces steering effort at low speeds improves steering feel at moderate speeds and reduces steering sensitivity at higher speeds During some operating conditions the active steering might deactivate to protect the system from damage You might notice that the center position of the steering wheel is changed Unless there is a SERVICE STEERING SYS message the system will return to normal operation as soon as the condition ceases usually within a very short period of time At low speeds the active steering system requires less movement of the steering wheel to change vehicle direction than the normal power steering system Adjust your driving accordingly When certain steering faults are present the active steering deactivates and vehicle speed might be limited The SERVICE STEERING SYS and SPEED LIMITED TO XXX messages will be displayed See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 The normal power steering system is still operatio
334. mable items in the ashtray hot cigarettes or other smoking materials could ignite them and possibly damage your vehicle Never put flammable items in the ashtray Ashtray For vehicles with an ashtray it is located under the climate control panel on the center console Press on the door to release the ashtray The ashtray automatically slides open for use To empty the ashtray with the ashtray in full open position locate the release button to the right of the ash receiver and slide it to the right in the direction of the arrow The ash receiver will unlock and lift slightly and can then be easily removed from the housing To replace the ash receiver place it into position in the ashtray housing and push down firmly until it locks into place 3 47 Cigarette Lighter Notice Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is heating will not allow the lighter to back away from the heating element when it is hot Damage from overheating may occur to the lighter or heating element or a fuse could be blown Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while it is heating Do not use equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of 15 amperes The cigarette lighter is located next to the ashtray The vehicle does not have any cigarette lighters for the rear seat passengers To activate the cigarette lighter push it into the heating element and let go When the lighter is ready it will pop back out by itself 3 48 Climate Controls Dual C
335. mission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment Adaptive Cruise Control is an enhancement to traditional cruise control and is not a safety system It allows you to keep cruise control engaged in moderate traffic conditions without having to constantly be reset 3 20 Adaptive Cruise Control uses radar to detect a vehicle directly ahead in your path within a distance of 328 ft 100 m and operates at speeds above 30 mph 48 km h When it is engaged by the driver the system can apply limited braking or acceleration of the vehicle automatically to maintain a selected following distance to the vehicle ahead The vehicle s braking during Adaptive Cruise Control is comparable to a person applying moderate pressure to the vehicle s brake pedal To disengage Ad
336. move the cruise control switch briefly from on to resume accelerate The vehicle will go right back up to your chosen speed and stay there If you hold the switch at resume accelerate the vehicle will keep going faster until you release the switch or apply the brake Do not hold the switch at resume accelerate unless you want the vehicle to go faster Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to go to a higher speed Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed Press the set button at the end of the lever then release the button and the accelerator pedal You will now cruise at the higher speed Move the cruise switch from on to resume accelerate Hold it there until the desired speed is reached and then release the switch To increase your speed in very small amounts move the switch briefly to resume accelerate Each time this is done your vehicle goes about 1 mph 1 6 km h faster If using the accelerator pedal and the set button at end of the lever to increase cruise set speed your new set speed must be at least 5 mph higher than current speed for this method to work If it is not 5 mph higher switch cruise switch off then on and then reset your speed using the set button Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to reduce your speed while using cruise control Press in the button at the end of the lever until you reach the lower speed desired then release it
337. mp Bulb Number 3157K For replacement bulbs not listed here contact your dealer retailer Windshield Replacement Your windshield is part of the Head Up Display HUD system If you ever have to get your windshield replaced get one that is designed for HUD or your HUD image may look out of focus Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear or cracking See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 It s a good idea to clean or replace the wiper blade assembly on a regular basis or when worn For proper windshield wiper blade length and type see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6 15 STS V models will automatically move the windshield wipers to the park position if the hood is open Make sure the hood is closed before replacing your windshield wiper blades To replace the wiper blade assembly do the following 1 Pull the windshield wiper assembly away from the windshield 3 Replace the blade assembly with a new one Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield when no wiper blade is installed could damage the windshield Any damage that occurs would not be covered by your warranty Do not allow the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield 4 Repeat the steps for the other wiper 2 Squeeze the tabs on each side of the wiper blade assembly and slide the assembly off the end of the wiper arm 5 56 Tires CAUTION Continued Your new vehicle c
338. mp and can be seen by looking over your right shoulder URPA uses three color coded lights to provide distance and system information 2 45 How the System Works URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is moved into REVERSE R The rear display will then briefly illuminate to let you know the system is working URPA operates only at speeds less than 3 mph 5 km h If you are above this speed the red light on the rear display will flash To be detected objects must be at least 10 inches 25 4 cm off the ground and below trunk level Objects must also be within 5 feet 1 5 m from your rear bumper This distance may be less during warmer or humid weather A single beep will sound the first time an object is detected between 20 inches 0 5 m and 5 feet 1 5 m away Repeated beeping will occur when you are closer than 20 inches 0 5 m from the object 2 46 The following describes what will occur with the URPA display as you get closer to a detected object Description Engish Memic amber amber lights amber amber red 20 in lights continuous beep amber amber red lights flashing and 1 ft continuous beep When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly The ultrasonic sensors are not clean a red URPA display light may illuminate when the vehicle is in REVERSE R Keep your rear bumper free of mud dirt snow ice and slush For cleaning instructions see Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 11
339. mps or hills Also when another vehicle enters the same lane as you the FCA system will not detect the vehicle until it is completely in your driving lane A CAUTION When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar is blocked by snow ice or dirt it may not detect a vehicle ahead FCA may not help you avoid a collision under these conditions Do not use FCA when the radar is blocked by snow ice or dirt Keep your radar clean See Cleaning the System under Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3 20 ACAUTION FCA may not detect and warn soon enough to stationary or slow moving vehicles or other objects ahead of you You could crash into an object ahead of you Do not rely on FCA when approaching stationary or slow moving vehicles or other objects Unnecessary Warnings FCA may occasionally provide an unnecessary warning to guard rails signs and other stationary objects This is normal operation your vehicle does not need service Other Messages There are three messages that may appear on the Driver Information Center DIC They are CLEAN RADAR RADAR CRUISE NOT READY and SERVICE RADAR CRUISE See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 Cleaning the System The radar can become blocked by snow ice or dirt If so you may need to turn off the engine and clean the lens See Cleaning the System under Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3 20 Flash to Pass This feature allows you to use the high beam headlam
340. n Here are some things you need to know to help your vehicle pass an inspection Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check engine light is on or not working properly To perform a check engine light bulb check with the keyless ignition make sure the transmitter fob is in the passenger compartment See Ignition Positions on page 2 28 Press the bottom of the Acc button on the instrument panel and hold the button down for five seconds The instrument panel including the check engine light will light up and the ignition will be on but the engine will not start if you press the bottom of the Acc button only briefly less than five seconds the accessory power mode will be turned on but not the ignition After the bulb check be sure to press and release the Acc button again to turn the ignition off and avoid draining the vehicle s battery 3 70 Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD on board diagnostic system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection This can happen if you have recently replaced the battery or if the battery has run down The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving This may take several days of routine driving If you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system
341. n Alert FCA If Equipped See Forward Collision Alert FCA System on page 3 10 Turn and Lane Change Signals The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following To signal a turn move the lever all the way up or i down The lever returns automatically when the Turn and Lane Change Signals See Turn turn is complete and Lane Change Signals on page 3 8 An arrow on the Headlamps See Headlamps on page 3 33 instrument panel cluster D Headlamp High Low Beam Changer See flashes in the direction Headlamp High Low Beam Changer on page 3 9 A the turn or lane change e Flash To Pass Feature See Flash to Pass on page 3 13 40 Fog Lamps See Fog Lamps on page 3 39 Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to signal a lane change Hold it briefly until the lane change is complete The arrow will automatically flash three times The lever returns to its original position when it is released Rapid flashing of arrows when signaling for a turn or lane change can be caused by a burned out signal bulb Other drivers will not see the signal Replace burned out bulbs to help avoid possible accidents Check the fuse for burned out bulbs if the arrow fails to work when signaling a turn See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5 117 for more information Turn Signal On Chime If the turn signal is left on for about 1 mile 1 6 km a warning chime will sound and the TURN SIGN
342. n Center DIC on page 3 74 for more information 3 57 Instrument Panel Cluster The instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running You will know how fast you are going how much fuel you are using and many of the other things you will need to know to drive safely and economically United States Base version shown Canada and Uplevel similar 3 58 Speedometer and Odometer Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour mph and kilometers per hour km h See MPH km under DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 74 for more information The odometer mileage can be checked without the vehicle running Your vehicle s odometer works together with the driver information center You can set a Trip A and a Trip B odometer See Trip Information under DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 74 for more information If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed the new one will be set to the correct mileage total of the old odometer Tachometer This gage indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute rpm Safety Belt Reminders Safety Belt Reminder Light When the engine is started a chime will come on for several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts unless the driver s safety belt is already buckled LZ This chime and light is repeated if the driver remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion If the driver s b
343. n from the bottom of the air compressor 10 psi 68 kPa from the recommended inflation pressure you can inflate the tire back up to the recommended inflation pressure 19 Wipe off any sealant from the wheel tire and vehicle with a rag 20 Dispose of the sealant canister at a local dealer retailer or in accordance with your local state codes and practices After using the sealant canister replace it with a new canister from your dealer retailer 21 After temporarily sealing a tire with the tire sealant and compressor kit take your vehicle to your dealer retailer to have the tire inspected and repaired 2 Unlock the air compressor hose from the sealant canister by pulling up on the lever 5 93 3 Pull the air compressor inflator hose from the sealant canister AUTION 4 Push the air compressor inflator hose onto the tire valve stem and push the lever down to secure in place 5 Plug the air compressor accessory plug into an accessory power outlet in the vehicle See Accessory Power Outlet s on page 3 46 for more information Inflating something too much can make it explode and you or others could be injured Be sure to read the inflator instructions and inflate the tire to its recommended pressure Do not exceed 36 psi 248 kPa N CAUTION 7 Move the sealant and compressor kit switch to the I on position Idling the engine in a closed in place or with 8 Inflate the tire up to the recommended in
344. n or partially open position To express close the power sunroof fully press the driver s side switch forward once To stop the sunroof glass in a desired position other than closed press the switch again in either direction The sunshade must be closed manually Close To close the power sunroof operate the controls according to one of the following From the open position press and hold the driver s side sunroof switch forward The sunshade must be closed manually From the vent position press and hold the passenger s side sunroof switch rearward Anti Pinch If an object is in the path of the sunroof while it is closing the anti pinch feature will detect the object and stop the sunroof from closing at the point of the obstruction The sunroof will then return to the full open or vent position To close the sunroof once it has re opened refer to the two options previously described under the Close feature instructions 2 59 Vehicle Personalization Your vehicle has personalization that allows you to program certain features to a preferred setting for up to two drivers The back of the keyless access transmitters are labelled 1 or 2 Additional keyless access transmitters programmed to the vehicle as 3 and or 4 do not have a number on the back and are not capable of being personalized The number of programmable features varies depending upon which vehicle options are purchased On all vehicles features su
345. n slippery roads When weather limits visibility such as when in fog rain or snow conditions Adaptive Cruise Control performance is limited There may not be enough distance to adapt to the changing traffic conditions Do not use cruise control when visibility is low 3 21 The cruise controls are located on the end of the multifunction lever The Adaptive Cruise controls are located on the outboard side of the steering wheel C Off This position turns the system off On This position turns the system on Resume Increase Push the switch to this symbol to make the vehicle resume the speed set previously or to increase the set speed when Adaptive Cruise Control is already active GG Set Decrease Press this button to set the speed or to decrease the set speed when Adaptive Cruise Control is already active amp Cancel Press this button located on the steering wheel to cancel adaptive cruise control 3 22 Engaging Adaptive Cruise Control With the Set Button A CAUTION If you leave your Adaptive Cruise Conirol switch on when you are not using cruise you might hit a button and go into cruise when you do not want to You could be startled and even lose control Keep the Adaptive Cruise Control switch off until you want to use cruise control A CAUTION If you operate Adaptive Cruise Control without your Head up Display HUD properly adjusted your Adaptive Cruise Control settings may
346. n the vehicle can still be used to start the vehicle or unlock the doors if needed A person approaching the outside of the locked vehicle without an authorized keyless access transmitter however will not be able to open the door even with a transmitter in the vehicle You may temporarily disable the passive door locking feature by pressing the door unlock switch for three seconds on an open door Passive door locking will then remain disabled until a door lock switch is pressed or until the power mode transitions from the off power mode Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF default To program the vehicle to a different mode 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until KEYLESS LOCK DELAY is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle FRONT PASS Passenger WINDOW LOCK This feature allows you to choose whether or not to have the front passenger window deactivated as part of the window lockout button If you would like the front passenger window to be deactivated when the window lockout button
347. n your vehicle you will need to do the following to store the flat tire in your trunk 1 Open the trunk See Trunk on page 2 16 2 Store the jack and wheel wrench in the jack container in the trunk When storing the jack in the container it must be raised until the screw end is flush with the edge of the jack 3 Store the flat tire as far forward in the trunk as possible The compact spare is for temporary use only Replace the compact spare tire with a full size tire as soon A Compact D Jack Container as you can Spare Tire Package With Wheel s Cover Wrench and Jack Compact Spare Tire and Tools B Plastic Wing E Compact Spare Tire Use the following diagram as a guide for storing the Nut F Foam Support compact spare tire and tools in the trunk C Retainer G Bolt 1 Open the trunk See Trunk on page 2 16 2 Make sure the foam support F is in place in the trunk area 5 105 3 Reinstall the compact spare tire E making sure to line up the wheel center hole with the bolt G and place on the compartment floor 4 Insert the jack container D with wheel wrench and jack into the center of the compact spare tire making sure to line up the wheel nut hole with the bolt G on the compartment floor 5 Secure the tire and wheel with the retainer C and wing nut B 6 Reinstall the compact spare tire cover A Compact Spare Tire Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when the vehicle was new
348. n your vehicle is in PARK P the vehicle is off and the driver s door is opened see AUTO EXIT SEAT and AUTO EXIT COLUMN under Vehicle Personalization on page 2 60 rearview mirrors and the steering column to a comfortable exit position Enter the memory programming mode for your exit settings by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Driver Exit Settings Submenu From the DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS submenu turn the tune select knob to scroll to STORE EXIT SETTINGS and press in the knob Two beeps will sound to confirm that your new exit settings are saved Repeat the procedure for a second driver by programming the other driver number 2 81 4 NOTES 2 82 Section 3 Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Overview sssseseerene 3 4 Headlamps on Reminder W u sssseeeeeseererenes 3 37 Hazard Warning Flashers u usssseserereereerrrseser 3 6 Daytime Running Lamps DRL 0 3 37 Other Warning Devices ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 3 6 FOG LAMPS eieiei annan aan 3 39 5 4 1 oo eecccceseecccceeeececeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeees 3 6 Twilight Sentinel seeren 3 39 Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Exterior Lighting Battery Saver 3 40 Steering Column cceceeeeeee tee eee renerne rene 3 7 Instrument Panel Brightness cee 3 41 Heated Steering Wheel ceeeeeeee
349. nal You might notice that the center position of the steering wheel is changed and that more steering effort at low speeds and less steering effort at high speeds is required You can continue to drive your vehicle with normal power steering but you should have your dealer retailer inspect the steering system as soon as possible in order to have the problem corrected and the steering wheel position centered When stability control activates the system automatically adjusts the front road wheel steering angle modifies the suspension stiffness and selectively applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle s brakes to help maintain directional control of the vehicle Adjustments to the steering will not be felt in the steering wheel See Enhanced StabiliTrak on page 4 9 It is recommended that the battery not be disconnected when the steering wheel is turned from the center position If this occurs the center position of the steering wheel could be temporarily changed a small amount You can continue to operate your vehicle and after a short time the center position of the steering wheel will return to normal Steering Tips It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed A lot of the driver lost control accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves Here is why Experienced driver or beginner each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves The traction of the tires against the roa
350. nced StabiliTrak option have a stability enhancement system called Enhanced StabiliTrak This message displays if there has been a problem detected with the stability system If this message comes on while driving pull off the road as soon as possible and stop carefully Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off then back on If this message still stays on or comes back on again while driving your vehicle needs service Have the stability system inspected by your dealer retailer as soon as possible See StabiliTrak System on page 4 8 or Enhanced StabiliTrak on page 4 9 for more information For vehicles with the Active Steering with Enhanced StabiliTrak option in some cases when the SERVICE STABILITY SYS message is displayed a larger degree of steering wheel input at low vehicle speeds and a smaller degree of steering wheel input at higher vehicle speeds may be required 3 91 SERVICE STEERING SYS System Your vehicle has a speed variable assist steering system Your All Wheel Drive AWD vehicle may have the Active Steering with Enhanced StabiliTrak option See Active Steering under Steering on page 4 13 This message displays if a problem is detected with the speed variable assist steering system or the Active Steering system When this message is displayed you may notice that the effort required to steer the vehicle increases or feels heavier but you will still be able to steer the vehicle See
351. nd IntelliBeam This is a momentary switch that springs back to the AUTO position when released An AUTOMATIC LIGHTS ON message appears on the DIC when automatic lights are enabled or an AUTOMATIC LIGHTS OFF message appears on the DIC when the automatic lights are disabled AUTO Automatic Turn the control to this position to put the headlamps in automatic mode AUTO mode turns the exterior lamps on and off depending upon how much light is available outside of the vehicle Due to the switch design the automatic lights may be disabled even if the control is in the AUTO position To enable automatic lighting do any of the following Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to off and release the switch It returns back to the AUTO position by itself Turn the headlamp control from the parking lamp position to AUTO Turn the headlamp control from the headlamp position to AUTO To disable automatic lighting do any of the following Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to off and release the switch It returns back to the AUTO position by itself Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to the parking lamp position Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to the headlamp position Disabling automatic lighting disables the automatic headlamp operation DRL and IntelliBeam High Beams if the vehicle has them 3 33 300 Parking Lamps Turn the control to this position to turn on the parking lamps together with the
352. nd Tools 5 5 98 Replacement Bulbs c eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 55 Replacement Windshield eeeeeeeeeeeee ee 5 55 Reporting Safety Defects Canadian Government cceeeneeeeeeeeeenee 7 14 General Motors ccceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeenes 7 14 United States Government seceeeeeee eee 7 14 Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems 08 1 66 Replacing Restraint System Parts Aiter a Crash serpi moren reale 1 67 Retained Accessory Power RAP accenn 2 29 Roadside SENSE soere nri e EE a EEE ETEA ER ESEE TE 7 6 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out 4 26 Routing Engine Drive Belt ecne 6 16 Ru un Flat 16S ses ienien at an a ernaia 5 65 Running the Engine While Parked sacc 2 39 Safety Belt Reminder Light 3522505 a 3 59 Safety Belts Care Of ae re rr en a EERS 5 110 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 13 Lap Shoulder Belt ccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 1 21 Safety Belt Extender cc eeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 1 27 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 1 27 Safety Belts Are for Everyone 0 ceeeeeeeees 1 8 Safety Warnings and Symbols eceeeeeeeeeeees iii Scheduled Maintenance eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 6 4 Seats Head Restraints cccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 6 Heated and Ventilated Seats cece 1 3 Heated Seat
353. nds off Mode 2 0 05 seconds default Mode 3 0 15 seconds Mode 4 0 30 seconds Mode 5 1 30 minutes Mode 6 2 00 minutes Mode 7 3 00 minutes Mode 8 4 00 minutes 2 70 To determine the mode to which the vehicle is programmed or to program the vehicle to a different mode 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until TWILIGHT DELAY is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to scroll through the available delay settings and set your selection If you choose Mode 1 the exterior lamps will not illuminate when you exit the vehicle Only one mode can be selected at a time The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle DRIVER UNLOCK AT OFF This feature allows the driver s door to automatically unlock when the ignition is turned off Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF default To program the vehicle to a different mode 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until DRIVER UNLOCK AT OFF is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switch between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the fea
354. nds the turn signal indicators will flash twice and the horn will sound once If the engine is off the windows may be closed from outside the vehicle using the lock button on the keyless access transmitter Press and hold the lock button for more than two seconds to close any window If any window is unable to close completely it will reverse and the horn will chirp See Anti Pinch Feature under Power Windows on page 2 20 for more information See Lights Flash at Lock and Horn Chirps at Lock under Vehicle Personalization on page 2 60 to change the feedback feature m Unlock Press m once to unlock the driver s door The turn signal indicators will flash twice Press n twice within five seconds to unlock all the doors If it is dark enough outside your interior lamps will come on See Lights Flash at Unlock and Ext Exterior Lights at Unlock under Vehicle Personalization on page 2 60 to change the feedback feature If your vehicle has the memory feature you can program and recall memory settings when you press the unlock button on the keyless access transmitter See Memory Seat Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2 77 for more information Q Remote Start Press Qto operate the remote start feature See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2 12 ef Trunk Press and hold sft for about one second to open the trunk while the engine is turned off or the shift lever is in PARK P 2 Vehicle Locator P
355. nformation you will need from the other driver Things like name address phone number driver s license number vehicle license plate vehicle make model and model year Vehicle Identification Number VIN insurance company and policy number and a general description of the damage to the other vehicle If possible call your insurance company from the scene of the crash They will walk you through the information they will need If they ask for a police report phone or go to the police department headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of the report for a nominal fee In some states provinces with no fault insurance laws a report may not be necessary This is especially true if there are no injuries and both vehicles are driveable Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your vehicle Whether you select a GM dealer retailer or a private collision repair facility to fix the damage make sure you are comfortable with them Remember you will have to feel comfortable with their work for a long time Once you have an estimate read it carefully and make sure you understand what work will be performed on your vehicle If you have a question ask for an explanation Reputable shops welcome this opportunity Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Process In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair If you have a pre determined repair facility of c
356. ng the engine may use more oil than it would with normal use Low oil levels can damage the engine Be sure to check the oil level often during competitive driving and keep the level at or near the upper mark that shows the proper operating range on the engine oil dipstick For information on how to add oil see Engine Oil on page 5 18 Driving at Night Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because some drivers are likely to be impaired by alcohol or drugs with night vision problems or by fatigue Night driving tips include Drive defensively Do not drink and drive e Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside rearview mirror Slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles because your headlamps can only light up so much road ahead e Watch for animals e When tired pull off the road Do not wear sunglasses Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle clean inside and out e Keep your eyes moving especially during turns or curves No one can see as well at night as in the daytime But as we get older these differences increase A 50 year old driver might need at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20 year old Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and affect your ability to stop and accelerate Always drive slower in these types of drivin
357. ng steps 2 1 Find the top tether anchor 2 2 Open the top tether anchor cover to expose the anchor 2 3 If you have an adjustable headrest or head restraint raise the headrest or head restraint If the position you are using has an adjustable headrest or head restraint 2 4 Route attach and tighten the top tether according to your child restraint instructions and the following instructions If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether route the tether over the seatback If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether route the tether over the seatback and you are using a dual tether route the tether under the head restraint and in between the head restraint posts If the position you are using has an adjustable headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether route the tether under the headrest or head restraint and in between the headrest or head restraint posts 3 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure 1 43 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position study the instructions that came with your child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle If your child restraint has the LATCH system see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
358. ng the thighs A The lap belt is too loose It will not give as much protection this way 1 15 Q What is wrong with this A CAUTION You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this In a crash the belt would go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not on the pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A The belt is buckled in the wrong place Q What is wrong with this A CAUTION You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest like this The belt would be much too high In a crash you can slide under the belt The belt force would then be applied on the abdomen not on the pelvic bones and that could cause serious or fatal injuries Be sure the belt goes under the armrests The belt is over an armrest Q What is wrong with this A CAUTION V itt You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm In a crash your body would move too far forward which would increase the chance of head and neck injury Also the belt would apply too much force to the ribs which are not as strong as shoulder bones You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest
359. ng with Enhanced StabiliTrak the Traction Control button is used to turn traction control on and off and to select between three stability control modes Touring Competitive and Off See Enhanced StabiliTrak on page 4 9 for Traction Control button operating instructions If you press the TC button once the Traction Control System will turn off and the Traction Control System Warning Light will come on Press the TC button again to turn the system back on If you press and hold the TC button for five seconds the StabiliTrak system and the Traction Control System will turn off Press the TC button again to turn StabiliTrak back on For more information see StabiliTrak System on page 4 8 Adding non GM accessories can affect your vehicle s performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 for more information Competitive Driving Mode STS V The driver can select this optional handling mode by pressing the Traction Control button located near the shift lever twice within five seconds Competitive driving mode allows the driver to have control of the power applied to the rear wheels while the StabiliTrak system helps steer the vehicle by selective brake application In competitive mode the levels at which StabiliTrak is engaged have been modified to better suit a performance driving environment When the traction control warning light is on the Traction Control System will not be operating Adjust your
360. nition switch again The DIC will again read WAIT 10 MINUTES and will count down to zero one minute at a time The DIC will display OFF ACC TO LEARN again Press the Acc button ignition switch again The DIC will again read WAIT 10 MINUTES and will count down to zero one minute at a time 14 15 16 A beep will sound and the DIC will read READY FOR FOB 1 At this time all previously known transmitters have been erased Once the transmitter is recognized and programmed a beep will sound and the DIC will display READY FOR FOB 2 Remove the keyless access transmitter and press the unlock button twice to initialize it If you have additional transmitters to program this process can be repeated until four transmitters have been programmed The DIC will then display MAX FOBS LEARNED and will exit the programming mode When you are done programming transmitters press the unlock button on each keyless access transmitter twice After performing this process transmitters previously programmed will no longer work with your vehicle and must be reprogrammed Battery Replacement Under normal use the battery in your keyless access transmitter should last about three years The battery is weak if the transmitter will not work at the normal range in any location If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works it is probably time to change the battery The DIC may display KEY FOB BATTERY
361. ns 1 57 How Does an Airbag Restrain In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel In moderate to severe side collisions even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety belts Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body stopping the occupant more gradually Seat mounted side impact and roof rail airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body But airbags would not help in many types of collisions primarily because the occupant s motion is not toward those airbags See When Should an Airbag Inflate on page 1 56 for more information Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts 1 58 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates After the frontal airbags and seat mounted side impact airbags inflate they quickly deflate so quickly that some people may not even realize an airbag inflated Roof rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for some time after they deploy Some components of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes For location of the airbag modules see What Makes an Airbag Inflate on page 1 57 The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you may be warm but not too hot to touch There may be som
362. nstructions in this manual When installing a child restraint with a top tether you must also use either the lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the child restraint A child restraint must never be installed using only the top tether and anchor In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its attachments The following explains how to attach a child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors and attachments 1 37 Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor Lower anchors A are metal bars built into the vehicle A top tether A C anchors the top of the child restraint There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating to the vehicle A top tether anchor is built into the position that will accommodate a child restraint with vehicle The top tether attachment B on the child lower attachments B restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash 1 38 Your child restraint may have a single tether A or a dual tether C Either will have a single attachment B to secure the top tether to the anchor Some child restraints tha
363. ntly brake to a stop well off the road if possible If a tire goes flat and your vehicle has a compact spare tire see Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 96 This information shows you how to use your vehicle s tire changing equipment and how to change a flat tire safely 5 86 A CAUTION Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training The jack provided with your vehicle is designed only for changing a flat tire If it is used for anything else you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack Use the jack provided with your vehicle only for changing a flat tire If your vehicle has 255 45ZR18 size tires there is no spare tire jack or tire changing equipment A tire inflator kit included with your vehicle may be used to seal small punctures in the tread area of the tire See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 5 87 Run Flat Tires STS V If your vehicle has run flat tires there is no spare tire and no tire changing equipment Run flat tires can operate effectively with no air pressure for a limited distance and speed These tires perform so well without any air pressure that a Tire Pressure Monitor TPM is used to alert you when there is a low tire condition A CAUTION When the low tire warning light is displayed on the instrument panel cluster your vehicle s handling capabilities will b
364. nu turn the tune select knob and scroll to the feature you want to change then press the tune select knob to turn the feature on or off 2 61 Personal Settings Menu Items The PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU must be selected with a check mark to program the personalization features If it is not selected press the tune select knob until the check mark appears If it is selected the entire list of features will be available to program DRIVER GREETING This feature allows you to type in a customized name or greeting that will appear on the display whenever the corresponding keyless access transmitter 1 or 2 is used or Driver 1 or Driver 2 is selected on the radio display If a customized name or greeting is not programmed the system will show Driver 1 or Driver 2 to correspond with the numbers on the back of the keyless access transmitters In this case the customized driver greeting feature is factory shipped as off To turn the driver greeting feature on and to program a customized name or greeting 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until DRIVER GREETING is highlighted 2 62 Press the tune select knob to turn on the DRIVER GREETING feature You will see a cursor on the screen Turn the tune select knob until you reach the first letter you want the letter will be highlighted There is
365. nuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer OEM parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts Read your lease carefully as you may be charged at the end of your lease for poor quality repairs If a Crash Occurs Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash Try to relax and then check to make sure you are all right If you are uninjured make sure that no one else in your vehicle or the other vehicle is injured If there has been an injury call emergency services for help Do not leave the scene of a crash until all matters have been taken care of Move your vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you are instructed to move it by a police officer Give only the necessary and requested information to police and other parties involved in the crash Do not discuss your personal condition mental frame of mind or anything unrelated to the crash This will help guard against post crash legal action e Ifyou need roadside assistance call GM Roadside Assistance See Roadside Service on page 7 6 for more information e If your vehicle cannot be driven know where the towing service will be taking it Get a card from the tow truck operator or write down the driver s name the service s name and the phone number e Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is towed away Make sure this includes your insurance information and registration if you keep these items in your vehicle Gather the important i
366. o ae 4 6 Competitive Driving Mode STS V u dsseveree 4 7 Magnetic Ride Control 1 1 W u ssssessreeerersersennnes 4 8 Limited Slip Rear Axle n se 4 8 StabiliTrak System cccccccccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeenes 4 8 Enhanced StabiliTrak o oo 4 9 Panic Brake ASSist eeeeeeeeeee seer 4 12 All Wheel Drive AWD System n 4 13 SLET o MEE E E se ceunueccatasleales 4 13 Off Road Recovery sssseeeeeeeeerreere renerne 4 16 PASSING ain Ras slebne aE IE aE AERA 4 16 Loss of COWON eirinen gesida 4 16 Driving Your Vehicle Competitive Driving sssseeeeeeererenrenener 4 18 Driving at Night 22255 me be ebdre be er 4 18 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads 4 19 Before Leaving on a Long Trip ascese 4 20 Highway Hypnosis 5 eee eceek 4 20 Hill and Mountain Roads W W ssseeeererereerree 4 21 Winter Driving aan lanser rss eeina 4 22 lf Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud lce Or SNOW aeei anea e 4 25 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out 4 26 Loading Your Vehicle eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 26 TOWING 2222 25 cestode ei eels hae eee 4 31 Towing Your Vehicle eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 31 Recreational Vehicle Towing eeeeeeeeee 4 31 Towing a Trailer Vehicles With Heavy Duty Cooling eeeeeeeeeee eee ees 4 34 Towing a Trailer Vehicles Without Heavy Duty Cooling eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 4 40
367. ockwise to lower the jack lift head until the jack fits under the vehicle positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle 5 100 6 Raise the jack by turning the wheel wrench clockwise until the slots in the jack head fit into the metal flange located behind the triangle on the plastic molding as shown 7 Put the compact spare tire near you Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground for the compact spare tire to fit under the vehicle 5 101 9 Remove all the wheel nuts and the flat tire CAUTION Continued In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if needed to get all the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 96 A CAUTION A CAUTION Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts Because the nuts might come loose The vehicle s wheel could fall off causing a crash Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle CAUTION Continued 5 102 11 12 13 10 Remove any rust or dirt f
368. odium chloride These chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as ice and dust Always wash your vehicle s chrome with soap and water after exposure Notice If you use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes cleaners brushes or cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or chrome plated wheels you could damage the surface of the wheel s The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or chrome plated wheels The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle Do not use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes abrasive cleaners cleaners with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels Notice Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels could damage the wheels The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only Use chrome polish only on chrome plated wheels but avoid any painted surface of the wheel and buff off immediately after application Notice If you drive your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes you could damage the aluminum or chrome plated wheels The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminum or chrome plated wheels through an automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes Tires To clean the ti
369. oes to the previous or to the next random track Press and release this pushbutton until NORMAL displays to turn off random play F4 RPT Repeat To repeat the current track press and release this pushbutton until RPT TRCK displays To repeat the tracks in the current folder press and release this pushbutton until RPT FLDR displays Press and release this pushbutton until NORMAL displays to turn off repeated play F6 DISP Display Press this pushbutton to switch between the elapsed time of the track and the MP3 playback information K l Seek Press the left seek arrow to go to the start of the previous track Press the right seek arrow to go to the start of the next track Pressing either seek arrow for more than two seconds searches the previous or next tracks at two tracks per second Release the seek arrows to stop searching and to play the track K l Scan Press the scan arrows to scan the tracks in each folder The radio goes to the next track plays for 10 seconds then goes to the next track Press the scan arrows again to stop scanning Tune Turning this knob fast tracks reverse or advance through the tracks in all folders or playlists The track number and file name displays for each track Turning this knob while in random fast tracks reverse or advances the tracks in sequential order i Information Press this button while an MP3 CD is loaded to view the Title Artist Album or Folder names To vi
370. off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle 2 72 DOORS UNLOCK IN PARK The feature allows all of the doors to automatically unlock when the transmission is shifted into PARK P Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON default Mode 2 OFF To program the vehicle to a different mode 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until DOORS UNLOCK IN PARK is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle KEYLESS FT Front DOOR UNLOCK This feature automatically unlocks the appropriate front door when you approach the vehicle with the keyless access transmitter and pull the respective door handle See Door Locks on page 2 14 for more information Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF default To program the vehicle to a different mode 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the
371. old the regular brake pedal down with your right foot and push the parking brake pedal down with your left foot If the ignition is on the brake system warning light on the instrument panel cluster should come on If it does not you need to have your vehicle serviced See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 64 for more information To release the parking brake hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and push the parking brake pedal with your left foot When you lift your left foot the parking brake releases Notice Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts Make sure that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is set the ignition is on and the vehicle begins to move To stop the chime fully release the parking brake If you are towing a trailer and parking on a hill see Towing a Trailer Vehicles With Heavy Duty Cooling on page 4 34 or Towing a Trailer Vehicles Without Heavy Duty Cooling on page 4 40 for more information 2 35 Shifting Into PARK P A CAUTION It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle wil
372. ols away from any underhood electric fan 5 47 A CAUTION Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running 5 Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation If they do you could get a shock The vehicles could be damaged too Before you connect the cables here are some basic things you should know Positive will go to positive or to a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Negative will go to a heavy 6 Connect the red positive cable to the positive unpainted metal engine part or to a remote terminal of the dead battery Use a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one positive terminal if the vehicle has one Do not connect positive to negative or you will get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too And do not connect the negative cable to the negative terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks 5 48 7 Do not let the other end touch metal Connect it to the positive terminal of the good battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one 8 Now connect the black negative cable to the negative terminal of the good battery Use a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Do not let the other end touch anything until the next step The other end of the negative cable
373. ome unusual circumstance even though it is turned off We recommend that rear facing child restraints be secured in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 60 for additional information When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position study the instructions that came with your child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle Wherever you install a child restraint be sure to secure the child restraint properly Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle even when no child is in it Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving or in acrash This system is designed to make installation of a child restraint easier The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system Make sure that a LATCH compatible child restraint is properly installed using the anchors or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint following the instructions that came with that restraint and also the i
374. omes with high quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer If you ever g have questions about your tire warranty and where cha pra eee al ig to Soe S NS lS vehicle Warranty resulting accident could cause serious booklet for details injury Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 66 Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut punctured or broken by a sudden impact such as when you hit a pothole Keep tires at the recommended pressure Worn old tires can cause accidents If your tread is badly worn or if your tires have been damaged replace them See High Speed Operation on page 5 68 for inflation pressure adjustment for high speed driving A CAUTION Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much flexing You could have an air out and a serious accident See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 26 CAUTION Continued 5 57 Low Profile Performance Tires If your vehicle has 255 45ZR18 P255 45R18 or P275 40R19 size tires they are classified as low profile performance tires These tires are designed for very responsive driving on wet or dry pavement You may also notice more road noise with low profile performance tires and that they tend to wear faster These performance tires are not rated as all s
375. on Never cross a solid or double solid line on your side of the lane Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass Doing so can reduce your visibility Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle When you are being passed ease to the right Loss of Control Let us review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems brakes steering and acceleration do not have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked In any emergency do not give up Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger Skidding In a skid a driver can lose control of the vehicle Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions and by not overdriving those conditions But skids are always possible The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle s three control systems In the braking skid the wheels are not rolling In the steering or cornering skid too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force And in the acceleration skid too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal Remember Any traction control system helps avoid only the acceleration skid If your traction control system is off then an acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator
376. on a second time to select outside air SS Outside Air This mode forces the system to pull air from outside the vehicle It can be used to bring fresh air into the vehicle Air Quality Sensor Your vehicle could have an air quality sensor to help limit the climate control system from pulling in some harmful exhaust fumes from older poorly running or diesel equipped vehicles that are driving near you This sensor when active monitors the air quality in front of your vehicle and switches to air recirculation when poor quality air is detected outside your vehicle Press the AUTO button on the climate control to activate the air quality sensor The word AUTO comes on the center of the climate control display While the air quality sensor senses poor quality air the recirculation graphic displays Under some conditions the air quality sensor system does not operate In cold weather the system might not be active even if AUTO is displayed because of concerns of fogging your windows which may occur by activating recirculation mode Also the air quality sensor system does not remain in recirculation mode for extended periods of time that could cause stuffy or very dry conditions in the vehicle Following a poorly running vehicle for an extended period of time may not keep recirculation active indefinitely The air quality sensor does not activate due to organic odors like skunk and may not activate on many chemical related odors
377. on and the radio are on the CD begins playing A CD can be loaded with the radio off but it does not start playing until the radio is on Fi Previous Folder Press this button to go to the first track in the previous folder Press and hold this button to reverse quickly within a track Release this button to play the passage REV and the elapsed time of the track displays Pressing this button while in folder random mode goes to the previous folder and plays the tracks in that folder in random order 3 114 F2 gt Next Folder Press this button to go to the first track in the next folder Press and hold this button to advance quickly within a track Release this button to play the passage FWD and the elapsed time of the track displays Pressing this button while in folder random mode takes you to the next folder and plays the tracks in that folder in random order F3 RDM Random To play the tracks on the CD in random rather than sequential order press and release this pushbutton until RDM TRCK displays Once all of the tracks in the current folder or playlist have played the system moves on to the next folder or playlist and plays all of the tracks in random order To play the tracks in the current folder in random rather than sequential order press and release this button until RDM FLDR displays This feature does not work with playlists While in random pressing and releasing either KX l seek arrow g
378. on mode will change to off if a front door is opened See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 29 for more information If the shifter is not in PARK P the ignition mode will change to Acc See Shifting Into PARK P on page 2 36 When the engine is off press this button to place the vehicle in accessory mode ACCESSORY ACTIVE will display on the Driver Information Center DIC This mode allows you to use things like the radio and the windshield wipers while the engine is off Use accessory mode if you must have your vehicle in motion while the engine is off for example if your vehicle is being towed If the door is open while in accessory mode the key in reminder chime will sound continuously If the push button start is not working your vehicle may be near a strong radio antenna signal causing interference to the keyless access system See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 for more information After being in Acc for about 20 minutes the vehicle will automatically enter RAP or will turn off depending on if the doors are opened or closed Retained Accessory Power RAP These vehicle accessories can be used for up to 20 minutes after the engine is turned off Audio System Audio Steering Wheel Controls Power Windows Power to these accessories will work up to 20 minutes or until one of the front doors is opened For an additional 20 minutes of operation close all the doors and press Acc to place t
379. on or information relating to a specific component control message gage or indicator Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems Front Seats ecann eeaeeaeea een eeaeeas 1 2 Power Seats 0 e cccdsciseesstdcimenaesactiodaedisk eek dessins 1 2 Power Lumbar cscececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 2 Heated Seats 0 0 00 ccececeeeeeeeee nese hanne na 1 3 Heated and Ventilated Seats ccceeeeeeeeees 1 3 Power Reclining Seatbacks ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 4 Head Restraints cececeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 6 Rear Seats irona ena cane ccameieeadeteceasas 1 7 Heated Seats jeccscccewercccsbsone marenana prainiana 1 7 Rear Seat Pass Through Door 0eeeeeees 1 7 Safety Belts usssssseeeeeerere eee erreneren 1 8 Safety Belts They Are for Everyone 5 1 8 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 13 Lap Shoulder Belt cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 1 21 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 1 27 Safety Belt Extender cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 1 27 Child Restraints ccceeeeeeeeeeeeee eee een ees 1 28 Older Children cccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 28 Infants and Young Children ceeeeeee ees 1 30 Child Restraint Systems cceeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 1 34 Where to Put the Restraint eee 1 36 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH
380. on to speak with an advisor Some OnStar services such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance may not be available until you register with OnStar Available Services with Safe amp Sound Plan Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment Advanced Automatic Crash Notification AACN If equipped Link to Emergency Services Roadside Assistance Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance e AccidentAssist e Remote Door Unlock Vehicle Alert OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics OnStar Hands Free Calling with 30 complimentary minutes OnStar Virtual Advisor U S Only Available Services included with Directions amp Connections Plan All Safe and Sound Plan Services Driving Directions Advisor delivered or OnStar Turn by Turn Navigation If equipped e RideAssist e Information and Convenience Services OnStar Hands Free Calling OnStar Hands Free Calling allows eligible OnStar subscribers to make and receive calls using voice commands Hands Free Calling is fully integrated into the vehicle and can be used with OnStar Pre Paid Minute Packages Hands Free Calling may also be linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U S or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada depending on eligibility To find out more refer to the OnStar Owner s Guide in the vehicle s glove box visit www onstar com or www onstar ca or speak with an OnStar advisor by pressing the On
381. ontrol system is disabled because the radar is blocked and cannot detect vehicles in your path It may also activate during heavy rain or due to road spray To clean the system see Cleaning the System under Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3 20 CLEAN SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA system this message displays when the SBZA system is disabled because the sensor is blocked and cannot detect vehicles in your blind zone The sensor may be blocked by mud dirt snow ice or slush This message may also display during heavy rain or due to road spray Your vehicle does not need service For cleaning instructions see Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 110 See the Index in the Navigation manual for more information 3 84 COMPETITIVE DRIVING STS V Only This message displays when the competitive driving mode is turned on with the TC traction control button The TC traction control light comes on when the competitive driving mode is on The Traction Control System TCS will not operate while in competitive driving mode Adjust your driving accordingly See Competitive Driving Mode STS V on page 4 7 for more information DRIVER DOOR AJAR This symbol appears with this message This message displays when the driver door is not closed completely Make sure that the door is closed completely ENGINE COOLANT HOT IDLE ENGINE Notice If you drive your vehicle while the engin
382. oosened before being flushed Your dealer retailer or an underbody car washing system can do this for you 5 114 Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the vehicle This damage can take two forms blotchy ring shaped discolorations and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface Although no defect in the paint job causes this we will repair at no charge to the owner the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km of purchase whichever occurs first Vehicle Care Appearance Materials Polishing Cloth Tar and Road Oil Remover Chrome Cleaner and Polish White Sidewall Tire Cleaner Vinyl Cleaner Glass Cleaner Chrome Wheel Cleaner Finish Enhancer Interior and exterior polishing cloth Removes tar road oil and asphalt Use on chrome or stainless steel Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls and raised white lettering Cleans vinyl Removes dirt grime smoke and fingerprints Removes dirt and grime from chrome wheels Removes dust fingerprints and surface contaminants Spray on and wipe off C Description Usage Swirl Remover Polish Cleaner Wax Foaming Tire Shine Low Gloss Wash Wax Concentrate Spot Lifter Odor Eliminator Removes swirl marks fine scratches and other light
383. operly and should be checked by your dealer retailer If the light appears clear no light is appearing your OnStar subscription has expired You can always press the OnStar button to confirm that your OnStar equipment is active Universal Home Remote System Universal Home Remote System The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to replace up to three hand held Radio Frequency RF transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers security systems and home lighting This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment 2 51 Universal Home Remote System Operation With Three Round LED Your vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote System If there are three round Light Emitting Diode LED indicator lights above the Universal Home Remote buttons follow the instructions bel
384. or o 3 4 5 6 7 8 head and hand held transmitter are different or if N Ea E the dip switch settings are different use the T ED Ea dip switch settings on the motor head unit to Ea Ea Ea Ea program your Universal Home Remote The motor head dip switch settings can also be used when you do not have the original hand held transmitter Switch Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 78 Switch Position On On NeutralNeutrall Off Off Off Off Your Universal Home i i 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 N is e i i i i j Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions Ea Ea The panel of switches may not appear exactly as they do in the examples above but they should be similar Switch furhel 2 3 id se The switch positions on your hand held transmitter Switch Position On On Off may be labeled as follows ee Ee ee A switch in the up position may be labeled as Up or On Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions A switch in the down position may be labeled as Down Heit or Off A switch in the middle position may be labeled as Middle 0 or Neutral 2 55 2 Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left to right as follows When a switch is in the up position e e e write Left When a switch is in the down position write Right If a switch is set between the up and down position write Middle The switch sett
385. or lamp control to turn the lamps back on Instrument Panel Brightness amp Base Level Shown Uplevel Similar Press the center knob on the DIC control panel until the knob pops out Then turn the knob clockwise to brighten the lights or counterclockwise to dim them If the knob is turned completely clockwise the interior lamps turn on Entry Lighting The entry lighting system turns on the reading and dome lamps and the backlighting to the exterior lamp control when a door is opened or if you press the remote keyless entry transmitter unlock button If activated by the transmitter the lighting will remain active for about 25 seconds The entry lighting system uses the light sensor it must be dark outside in order for the lamps to turn on The lamps turn off about 25 seconds after the last door is closed They will dim to off if the ignition is on or immediately deactivate if the power locks are activated Parade Dimming This feature prohibits dimming of the instrument panel displays and backlighting during daylight hours when the key is in the ignition and the headlamps are on This feature operates with the light sensor and is fully automatic When the light sensor reads darkness outside and the parking lamps are active the instrument panel displays can be adjusted by turning the instrument panel brightness knob See Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3 41 for additional information 3 41 Reading Lamps T
386. orarily overheat during severe operating conditions See Engine Overheating on page 5 29 Towing a Trailer Vehicles Without Heavy Duty Cooling Vehicles without heavy duty cooling are neither designed nor intended to tow a trailer Section 5 Service and Appearance Care SEVICE sianie apaiia riai 5 3 Accessories and Modifications ececceee 5 3 California Proposition 65 Warning 1 5 3 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements 5 4 Doing Your Own Service Work 08 5 4 Adding Equipment to the Outside Of YOUR Vehicle 2 ccdeescntsecate tate cnetde ce boda 5 4 FUE LEES E eee acc E 5 5 Gasoline Octane v siessrurienmoie ieas neri nanas 5 5 Gasoline Specifications u ssssserererereneennee 5 6 California Fuel 4222 need deines 5 6 Additives se ere dane nate rare Sonar 5 6 Fuels in Foreign Countries ssssseeeeeeerree 5 7 Filling the TANK wcsccccesccuctecsdcventoneaddecendeadendestaxe 5 7 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 0 08 5 9 Checking Things Under the Hood 5 10 Hood Release cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 10 Engine Compartment Overview 5 5 11 Engine Oil cctschcteoiosatatsaenemdeddencumeneuacnecgwceed 5 18 Engine Oil Life System W Wu u sssseeeeereereneee 5 21 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 0 5 23 Automatic Transmission Fluid ceecee 5 25 Engine Coolant cceeeeeeee
387. ore information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5 57 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 66 There is also important loading information on the Certification label It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR and the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for the front and rear axle see Certification Label later in this section Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX Ibs 4 27 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ibs 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 Example 1 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer the load from your trailer will be transferred to your Item Description vehicle Consult this manual to determine how Vehicl this reduces the available cargo and luggage A Weig
388. ounting or changing of snow tires chains or other traction devices Roadside Service is not part of or included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue the Roadside Service program at any time without notification Scheduling Service Appointments When your vehicle requires warranty service contact your dealer retailer and request an appointment By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs your dealer retailer can help minimize your inconvenience If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service unless of course the problem is safety related If it is please call your dealership retailer let them know this and ask for instructions If the dealer retailer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off for service you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for the same day repair Courtesy Transportation To enhance your ownership experience we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation a customer support program for vehicles with the Bumper to Bumper Base Warranty Coverage period in Canada and extended powertrain warranty in both the U S and Canada Several courtesy transportation options are available to
389. out 20 drops per gallon 3 78 L of water is a good guide Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while cleaning Damage to your vehicle s interior may result from the use of many organic solvents such as naptha alcohol etc 5 108 Fabric Carpet Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment frequently to remove dust and loose dirt A canister vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats For soils always try to remove them first with plain water or club soda Before cleaning gently remove as much of the soil as possible using one of the following techniques e For liquids gently blot the remaining soil with a paper towel Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel until no more can be removed For solid dry soils remove as much as possible and then vacuum To clean use the following instructions 1 Saturate a lint free clean white cloth with water or club soda 2 Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture 3 Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub toward the center Continue cleaning using a clean area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled 4 Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the cleaning cloth remains clean 5 If the soil is not completely removed use a mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning process that was used with plain water lf any of the soil remains a commercial fabric cleaner or spot lifter may be ne
390. overage Cadillac Owner Privileges The following services are provided in the U S and Canada up to 5 years 100 000 miles 160 000 km whichever occurs first and in Canada only up to a maximum coverage of 100 These services are provided at a nominal charge if the vehicle is no longer within the Powertrain warranty Roadside Service provides several Cadillac Owner Privileges at no charge throughout your Cadillac Powertrain Warranty 5 years 100 000 miles 160 000 km Emergency Road Service is performed on site for the following situations Fuel Delivery Delivery of enough fuel for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station approximately 5 in Canada In Canada for safety reasons propane and other alternative fuels will not be provided through this service Lock out Service Lock out service will be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain entry into your vehicle A remote unlock may be available if you have an active OnStar subscription To ensure security the driver must present personal identification before lock out service is provided In Canada the vehicle registration is also required Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway or Highway Tow to the nearest dealership for warranty service or in the event of a vehicle disabling crash Winch out assistance is provided when the vehicle is mired in sand mud or snow Flat Tire Change Installation of a spare tire in good condition when
391. ow This system provides a way to replace up to three remote control transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers security systems and home automation devices 2 52 Do not use this system with any garage door opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the transmitter Because of the steps involved it may be helpful to have another person available to assist you in programming the transmitter Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future programming You only need the original remote control transmitter for Fixed Code programming It is also recommended that upon the sale or lease termination of the vehicle the programmed buttons should be erased for security purposes See Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons later in this section When programming a garage door it is advised to park outside of the garage Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or security device you are programming Programming Universal Home Remote Rolling Code lf you have questions or need help programming the Universal Home Remote System call 1 866 572 2728 or go to www learcar2u com Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling Code units Programming a garage door opener in
392. p ATERS Passenger Side Taillamp SPARE SPARE 5 120 Fuses Mini Uge Instrument Panel Module Voltage Wipe Wash Module Assembly WPR SW VICS Rain Sensor Wiper Switch Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch Relays A C CMPRSR CLTCH Accessory Rain Sensor Headlamp Washer Relay Coil Windshield Wiper Washer Module ae ANP Brake Vacuum Pump ACCY FAN S P FOG LAMP FRT BLWR FUEL COOL HI BEAM HI FAN SPD HORN Relays Use Rear Underseat Fuse Block LO FAN SPD Cooling Fan Low Speed A LOW BEAM Low Beam Headlamp High Intensity Removing the Rear Seat Cushion WO HID HID Discharge HID Notice If you touch the exposed wires with the Parking Lamps Instrument Panel i l hor PRK LAMP Dimming Rear License Plate Lamps metal on the seat cushion you could cause a short PWR TRN Engine Controls that could damage the battery and or wires Avoid contact between the rear seat and the fuse Heated Washer Nozzle Air Quality center whenever you remove or reinstall the rear Antilock Brake System Climate seat Do not remove covers from any of the covered RUN CRNK Control Panel TCM ECM parts and do not store anything under the seats Instrument Control Panel Instrument i Control Panel Cluster To remove the rear seat cushion do the following 1 Pull up on the front of the cushion to release the front ROOKS 2 Pull the cushion up and out toward the front of the venice Circuit Breakers Hea
393. p avoid injury to you and others Dispense fuel only into approved containers Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle in a vehicle s trunk pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete Do not smoke while pumping fuel Do not use a cellular phone while pumping fuel Checking Things Under Hood Release the Hood To open the hood do the following 1 Pull the hood release Z CAUTION lever with this symbol on it It is located inside the vehicle on the lower An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even when the engine is not running Keep hands clothing and tools away left side of the instrument panel from any underhood electric fan Z CAUTION Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire These include liquids like fuel oil coolant brake fluid windshield washer and other fluids and plastic or rubber You or others could be burned Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine 2 Then go to the front of the vehicle and find the secondary hood release lever The lever is located under the front edge of the grille near the center Push the release lever up and raise the hood Before closing the hood be sure all the filler caps are on properly Then pull the
394. page 5 23 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir See Adding Washer Fluid under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 40 e EN SS CS Wi E AU aa 4 6L V8 Engine 5 14 After you have removed the sight shields if equipped on the 4 6L V8 engine here is what you will see A Remote Negative Terminal See Jump Starting on page 5 45 Remote Positive Terminal See Jump Starting on page 5 45 Battery See Battery on page 5 44 Passenger Compartment Air Filter See Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3 55 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir See Power Steering Fluid on page 5 39 Engine Oil Fill Cap See When to Add Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 18 Engine Oil Dipstick Out of View See Checking Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 18 H Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir See Brake Fluid under Brakes on page 5 41 Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap See Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5 29 and Cooling System on page 5 32 Engine Air Cleaner Filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 23 Underhood Fuse Block See Underhood Fuse Block on page 5 118 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir See Adding Washer Fluid under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 40 DMA 4 4L V8 STS V Engine 5 16 After you have removed the sight shields if equipped on the 4 4L V8 STS V engine here is what you will see
395. passenger s seat The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the right front passenger s frontal airbag should be enabled may inflate or not Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat including an infant or a child riding in a rear facing child restraint a child riding in a forward facing child seat an older child riding in a booster seat and children who are large enough using safety belts A label on your sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys ACAUTION A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger s frontal airbag if the system detects a rear facing child restraint no system is fail safe and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off We recommend that rear facing child restraints be secured in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right
396. plays if a CD is loaded If a CD is not loaded the display does not change from the radio source Finding a Station BAND Press to select FM1 FM2 AM or XM1 or XM2 if equipped Tune Turn to select radio stations K pl Seek Press the left arrow to go to the previous station and stay there Press the right arrow to go to the next station and stay there The sound mutes while seeking The radio seeks stations only with a strong signal that are in the selected band K l Scan Press the arrows to enter scan mode SCAN displays Press the arrows to scan the next station The radio goes to a station plays for five seconds then goes to the next station Press the arrows again to stop scanning To scan preset stations press and hold the arrows for more than two seconds until a beep sounds and PSCAN displays The radio goes to the first preset station plays for five seconds then goes to the next preset station Press the arrows again to stop scanning presets The radio only scans stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band AF Alternate Frequency This feature lets you turn the Alternate Frequency feature on or off See Alternate Frequency under Activating Program Type PTY Stations later in this section for more information LOCAL DISTANT Selection With this feature the radio can be set to search for local stations or stations that are further away for a larger selection 3 101
397. portation code is the Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code tire size and date the tire was manufactured The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire although only one side may have the date of manufacture 5 59 E Tire Ply Material The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread F Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors treadwear traction and temperature resistance For more information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5 79 G Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load 5 60 E Se Mrez a l PS pe o e my re S 8 g im o o ks ve i By a 0 OL JIAN Compact Spare Tire Example A Temporary Use Only The compact spare tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately 3 000 miles 5 000 km and should not be driven at speeds over 65 mph 105 km h The compact spare tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat If your vehicle has a compact spare tire see Compact Spare Tire on page 5 106 and lf a Tire Goes Flat on page 5 86 B Tire Ply Material The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread C Tire Identification Number TIN The letters and numbers
398. pressor and replace with a new sealant canister See your dealer retailer for more information 5 96 To install a new sealant canister 1 Align the sealant filling hose with the slot in the air compressor 2 Push the sealant canister down and turn it clockwise 3 Wrap the sealant filling hose around the air compressor channel to stow it in its original location 4 Push the air compressor inflator hose onto the sealant canister inlet and push the lever down Changing a Flat Tire If you have an STS V model there is no spare tire and no tire changing equipment Your vehicle is equipped with run flat tires See Run Flat Tires STS V on page 5 65 for more information If you have an STS model your vehicle may be equipped with a tire inflator kit See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 5 87 for more information If your vehicle is not equipped with a tire inflator kit follow the directions for changing a flat tire in this section If a tire goes flat avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place Turn on your vehicle s hazard warning flashers See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3 6 for more information When your vehicle has a flat tire use the following a example as a guide to assist you in the placement of A CAUTION wheel blocks Changing a tire can be dangerous The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or other people You and they could be badly injured o
399. provides access to the trunk from the rear seats See Rear Seat Pass Through Door under Trunk on page 2 16 Safety Belts Safety Belts They Are for Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts A CAUTION Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot wear a Safety belt properly If you are ina crash and you are not wearing a safety belt your injuries can be much worse You can hit things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from it and be seriously injured or killed In the same crash you might not be if you are buckled up Always fasten your safety belt and check that your passenger s are restrained properly too 1 8 A CAUTION It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly Your vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle your safety belts See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3 59 In most states and in all Canadian provinces the law requires wearing safety belts Here is why You never know if you will be in a crash If you do have a crash you do not know if it will be a serious one
400. ps to signal the driver in front of you that you want to pass Pull and hold the turn signal multifunction lever toward you to use this feature When this is done the following will occur If the headlamps are off in low beam or in Daytime Running Lamps DRL mode the high beam headlamps will turn on They will stay on as long as the lever is held there Release the lever to turn them off If the headlamps are in high beam mode they will switch to low beam To return to high beam push the lever forward 3 13 Windshield Wipers The lever on the right side of the steering column operates the windshield wipers w Mist Pull the lever down and release it for a single wiping cycle The lever will return to its original position For more cycles hold the lever down before releasing it O Off Put the lever in this position to turn off the wipers J Delay Put the lever in this position to set a delay between wipes Turn the delay adjustment band to set the length of the delay 402 Delay Adjustment Use this band to set the length of the delay between wipes when using the delay feature The closer you move the band toward mist the longer the delay The windshield wiper lever must be in delay for this feature to work 3 14 GERD Low Speed Put the lever in this position for slow steady wiping cycles High Speed Put the lever in this position for rapid wiping cycles If the windshield wiper
401. puter Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a CD R disc Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on one disc Make sure playlists have a mp3 or wpl extension other file extensions might not work Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or variable bit rates Song title artist name and album are available for display by the radio when recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2 3 112 Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find songs while driving Organize songs by albums using one folder for each album Each folder or album should contain 18 songs or less Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an MP3 disc using multiple sessions It is usually better to burn the disc all at once The player is able to read and play a maximum of 50 folders 50 playlists 10 sessions and 255 files Long file names folder names or playlist names might use more disc memory space than necessary To conserve space on the disc minimize the length of the file folder or playlist names You can also play an MP3 CD that was recorded using no file folders The system can support up to 11 folders in depth though keep the depth of the folders to a minimum in order to keep down the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a particular folder during playback If a CD contains more than the maximum of 50 folders 50 playlists 10 sessions and 255 files the player lets you access and navigate up to the maximum
402. r Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until EXT LIGHTS AT UNLOCK is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle HORN CHIRPS AT LOCK This feature sounds the horn once when the keyless access transmitter is used to lock the vehicle All doors must be closed for this feature to work Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF default To program the vehicle to a different mode 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until HORN CHIRPS AT LOCK is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle 2 69 TWILIGHT DELAY This feature allows you to set the amount of time you want the exterior lamps to remain on after you exit the vehicle Programmable Modes Mode 1 0 00 seco
403. r In heavy rain or snow wipes will occur more frequently The Rainsense wipers operate in a delay mode as well as a continuous low or high speed as needed If the system is left on for long periods of time occasional wipes may occur without any moisture on the windshield This is normal and indicates that the Rainsense system is activated To activate the Rainsense system turn the wiper band to delay mode and select one of the four sensitivity levels indicated on the wiper stalk The position closest to off is the lowest sensitivity setting level one This allows more rain or snow to collect on the windshield between wipes Turning the wiper band away from you to higher sensitivity levels increases the sensitivity of the system and frequency of wipes The highest sensitivity setting level four is closest to low A single wipe will occur each time you turn the wiper stalk to a higher sensitivity level to indicate that the sensitivity level has been increased Notice Going through an automatic car wash with the wipers on can damage them Turn the wipers off when going through an automatic car wash The mist and wash cycles operate as normal and are not affected by the Rainsense function The Rainsense system can be overridden at any time by manually turning the wiper band to low or high speed When Rainsense is active the headlamps will turn on automatically The headlamps will turn off again once the wipers turn
404. r Malfunction Indicator Light cont Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 3 61 Safety Belt Reminders cceeeeeeeeeeneees 3 59 OCUNILY poiran a E A donee 3 71 TCS Warning Light secensirsnsnoissni renis 3 65 Tike Pressure 73 sities nauetealae tices 3 67 Traction Control System TCS Warning 3 65 Lighting in j dtcce st ensanuenstannanabacegae A T 3 41 Parade Dimming 0e eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 3 41 Eights ieies nA E 4 NEEE 3 33 Fl shto PaaS Senine r lee 3 13 High Low Beam Changer W u u u ds sseeerererrerenene 3 9 On Reminder orse sanear nan area a 3 37 Limited Slip Rear Axle n 4 8 Loading Your Vehicle sissisodan 4 26 LOCKOUT ProtectoM sr ere eee eder Ree 2 16 Locks OOK sige ds us eae a E LEE ENE ERE EEN STER 2 14 Lockout Protection 222222 urene LE ELEG 2 16 Power DOOP sink bane awovnase lei vata ees 2 14 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 15 Rear Door Security LOCKS eeeeeeeeeee ees 2 15 Loss Of Control cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeneees 4 16 Lumbar Power Controls iceren oent ei anaa 1 2 Magnetic Ride Control aececi 4 8 Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services eeeeeeeee 6 6 At Each Fuel Fill asec nectcieeldctine nein 6 9 At Least Once a Month cceeeeeeeneee nena 6 10 At Least Once a Year ccceeeeeeeneeeeeeee tenes 6 11 INMFOOUGUON pataan re E nghaaciacsaasa 6 2 Maintenan
405. r even killed Find a level place to change your tire To help prevent the vehicle l ee ee JSS Set the parking brake firmly Put the shift lever in PARK P Turn off the engine and do not restart while the vehicle is raised Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle To be even more certain the vehicle will not The following information will tell you next how to use move you should put blocks at the front and the jack and change a tire rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed That would be the tire on the other side at the opposite end of the vehicle 5 97 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 4 Remove the compact spare tire See Compact Spare Tire on page 5 106 for more information The equipment you will need is located in the trunk about the compact spare tire To gain access to the compact spare tire and jacking equipment 1 Open the trunk See Trunk on page 2 16 for more information 2 Remove the compact spare tire cover The tools you will be using include the jack A and the wheel wrench B 3 Turn the nut holding the jack package container counterclockwise and remove it Then remove the jack and wheel wrench 5 98 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire 1 Do a safety check before proceeding See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 96 for more information 3 Find the vehicle s jacking location using the diagram above and
406. r in heavy traffic Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads On such roads fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip and you could lose control Do not use cruise control on slippery roads If your vehicle is in cruise control when the Traction Control System TCS begins to limit wheel spin or the stability control system activates the cruise control automatically disengages See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 6 and StabiliTrak System on page 4 8 or Enhanced StabiliTrak on page 4 9 When road conditions allow you to safely use it again you may turn the cruise control back on 3 17 Setting Cruise Control A CAUTION If you leave your cruise control on when you are not using cruise you might hit a button and go into cruise when you do not want to You could be startled and even lose control Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control 1 Move the cruise control switch to on 2 Get up to the speed desired 3 Press in the set button at the end of the lever and release it 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal This light on the instrument d panel cluster comes on while cruise control is on Resuming a Set Speed If the cruise control is at the set speed desired and then the brake is applied the cruise control is disengaged But it does not need to be reset Once the vehicle speed reaches about 25 mph 40 km h or more you can
407. r is still lit check to make sure that the vehicle s seatback is not pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion If this happens slightly recline the vehicle s seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint If this happens adjust the head restraint See Head Restraints on page 1 6 Remove any additional material from the seat such as blankets cushions seat covers seat heaters or seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the child restraint If the on indicator is still lit secure the child in the child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and check with your dealer retailer 1 62 The passenger sensing system is designed to enable may inflate the right front passenger s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the right front passenger s seat When the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to be enabled the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active For some children who have outgrown child restraints and for very small adults the passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the right front passenger s frontal airbag depending upon the person s seating posture and body build Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there is an airba
408. r the doors are closed 2 23 If the vehicle is locked using the keyless access transmitter and the trunk lid hood or a door is open or not closed completely the security light will flash for 60 seconds and then turn off At this time the theft deterrent system is armed but the alarm will not sound if the trunk lid hood or door that was not closed completely is tampered with or opened The alarm will sound for the trunk lid hood or a door that was completely closed at the time the vehicle was locked using the keyless access transmitter The vehicle can be programmed to automatically unlock the doors and disarm the theft deterrent system when you approach the vehicle and the keyless access transmitter is with you See Vehicle Personalization on page 2 60 Pressing the unlock button on the keyless access transmitter or using the key to unlock the driver s door disarms the theft deterrent system Unlocking a door any other way while the system is armed will activate the alarm 2 24 Testing the Alarm 1 From inside the vehicle roll down the window then get out of the vehicle keeping the door open 2 From outside of the vehicle with the door open lock the vehicle using the power door lock switch or the keyless access transmitter and close the door Wait about 30 seconds until the security light goes off 3 Reach in and open the door using the inside door handle The horn will sound and the exterior lamps will flash
409. ration of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment The Forward Collision Alert FCA system provides an audible and visual warning if you approach a vehicle too rapidly FCA also provides a visual warning with no audible warning if you are following another vehicle much too closely FCA uses the Adaptive Cruise Control radar to detect a vehicle directly ahead in your path within a distance of 328 ft 100 m and operates at speeds above 20 mph 32 km h A CAUTION FCA is only a warning system and does not apply the brakes When you are approaching a vehicle or object too rapidly or when you are following a vehicle too closely that is ahead of you FCA may not provide you with enough time to avoid a collision FCA is not designed to warn the driver of pedestrians or animals Your complete attention is always required while driving and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes For more information see Defensive Driving on page 4 2 The Forward Collision Alert FCA controls are located on the end of the multifunction lever O Off This position turns the system off On This position turns the system on To enable FCA move the Adaptive Cruise Control switch to on To disable FCA move the switch to off Make sure the Head Up Display is on and properly adjusted If the HUD is not on FCA will
410. re Mode and the STABILITY SECURE MODE message will display See Enhanced StabiliTrak on page 4 9 SERVICE TIRE MONITOR This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS is not working properly The tire pressure light also flashes and then remains on during the same ignition cycle See Tire Pressure Light on page 3 67 Several conditions may cause this message to appear See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5 70 for more information If the warning comes on and stays on there may be a problem with the TPMS See your dealer retailer SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM This message displays when there is a problem with the hood open and closed switches The switches may need to be replaced When this message is displayed the theft deterrent system will still be protecting the interior of the vehicle however the hood area will not be protected at this time Also the remote start function will not work when this message appears See your dealer retailer for service SERVICE TRANSMISSION This message displays when there is a problem with the transmission Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer SERVICE VEHICLE SOON This message displays when a non emissions related malfunction occurs Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer as soon as possible SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM OFF If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA system this message displays when the SBZA system h
411. re Monitor System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under
412. re and loading information label see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 26 How you load your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort Never load your vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry When to Check Check your tires once a month or more Do not forget to check the compact spare tire if your vehicle has one The compact spare should be at 60 psi 420 kPa For additional information regarding the compact spare tire see Compact Spare Tire on page 5 106 How to Check Use a good quality pocket type gage to check tire pressure You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are underinflated Check the tire s inflation pressure when the tires are cold Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile 1 6 km Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label no further adjustment is necessary If the inflation pressure is low add air until you reach the recommended amount If you overfill the tire release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve Re check the tire pressure with the tire gage Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems They help preven
413. re designed to last for 10 years under normal driving conditions See your GM dealer if the TPMS sensors or a wheel ever need replacement Notice Using liquid sealants can damage the tire valves and tire pressure monitor sensors in your vehicle s run flat tires This damage would not be covered by warranty Do not use liquid sealants in your vehicle s run flat tires 5 66 Inflation Tire Pressure Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively Notice Do not let anyone tell you that under inflation or over inflation is all right It is not If your tires do not have enough air under inflation you can get the following Too much flexing Too much heat Tire overloading Premature or irregular wear Poor handling Reduced fuel economy If your tires have too much air over inflation you can get the following Unusual wear Poor handling Rough ride Needless damage from road hazards A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to your vehicle This label lists your vehicle s original equipment tires and shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they are cold The recommended cold tire inflation pressure shown on the label is the minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your vehicle s maximum load carrying capacity For additional information regarding how much weight your vehicle can carry and an example of the ti
414. re entering a highway exit ramp Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control while entering or on exit ramps Adaptive Cruise Control might detect a vehicle that is Other Vehicle Lane Changes not in your lane and apply the brakes Adaptive Cruise Control might occasionally provide a driver alert and or braking that you consider unnecessary It could respond to signs guardrails and other stationary objects when entering or exiting a curve This is normal operation Your vehicle does not need service If another vehicle enters the same lane as you Adaptive Cruise Control will not detect the vehicle until it is completely in the lane Be ready to take action and apply the brakes yourself 3 31 Using Adaptive Cruise Controls on Hills and When Towing a Trailer How well Adaptive Cruise Control works on hills and while a trailer is being towed depends on your vehicle speed vehicle load traffic conditions and the steepness of the hills It might not detect a vehicle in your lane while driving on hills While going up steep hills you might want to use the accelerator pedal to maintain your vehicle speed While going downhill and towing a trailer you might want to brake to keep your vehicle speed down Applying the brake disengages the system You may choose not to use Adaptive Cruise Control on steep hills when towing a trailer Disengaging Adaptive Cruise Control Apply the brake pedal or move the Adaptive Cruise Control sw
415. readiness your dealer retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection Oil Pressure Light Your vehicle may have this feature lf the vehicle has an oil problem this light may stay on after the engine is started or come on while you are driving This light indicates that oil is not going through the engine quickly enough to keep it lubricated The engine could be low on oil or could have some other oil problem Have it fixed right away The oil light could also come on in the following situations The light will come on briefly when the ignition is turned on to show that it is working properly If it does not come on with the ignition on there may be a problem with the fuse or bulb Have it fixed right away Sometimes when the engine is idling at a stop a chime will sound and the light may blink on and off This is normal A CAUTION Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low If you do your engine can become so hot that it catches fire You or others could be burned Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced Notice Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may damage the engine The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always follow the maintenance schedule in this manual for changing engine oil Security Light f For information regarding this light and the vehicle s security system see Theft Deterrent System on page 2 22 3 71 Fog Lamp Light 0
416. rease the fan speed Pressing this switch cancels automatic operation and allows the operator to manually select the amount of airflow Press AUTO to return to automatic operation If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at the highest setting the passenger compartment air filter may need to be replaced For more information see Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3 55 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 lt gt Recirculation Press this button to control the air source for the climate control system If in AUTO mode press this button once to select recirculation This mode keeps outside air from coming in the vehicle and recirculates the air in the vehicle It can be used to prevent outside air and odors from entering the vehicle or to help cool the air inside the vehicle more quickly Recirculation is not available in the defrost mode and shuts off when defog mode is selected Both of these features are designed to limit fogging in the vehicle If recirculation is selected during defog mode it automatically turns off after 10 minutes to limit problems with fogging 3 50 In some conditions using recirculation for long periods of time can cause the air inside the vehicle to become too dry or stuffy To prevent this from happening after the air in the vehicle has cooled select AUTO to return to automatic climate control operation or push the recirculation button again to select outside air Press this butt
417. res use a stiff brush with tire cleaner Notice Using petroleum based tire dressing products on your vehicle may damage the paint finish and or tires When applying a tire dressing always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on your vehicle Sheet Metal Damage If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement make sure the body repair shop applies anti corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty 5 113 Finish Damage Any stone chips fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair expense Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up materials available from your dealer retailer Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer s retailer s body and paint shop Underbody Maintenance Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody If these are not removed corrosion and rust can develop on the underbody parts such as fuel lines frame floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection At least every spring flush these materials from the underbody with plain water Clean any areas where mud and debris can collect Dirt packed in close areas of the frame should be l
418. ress the information button until 00 00 00 TIMER OFF displays To turn on the timer press the reset button until TIMER ON displays The timer will then start To turn off the timer press the reset button again until TIMER OFF displays The timer will stop and display the end timing value To reset the timer press and hold the reset button after the timer has been stopped The display will return to zero BATTERY VOLTS This display shows the current battery voltage If the voltage is in the normal range the value will display For example the display may read 13 2 BATTERY VOLTS If the voltage is low the display will have LOW after it If the voltage is high the display will have HIGH after it Your vehicle s charging system regulates voltage based on the state of the battery The battery voltage may fluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC This is normal See Charging System Light on page 3 63 for more information If there is a problem with the battery charging system the DIC may display a message See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 and Electric Power Management on page 3 42 for more information 3 78 Tire Pressure This display shows the pressure for each tire in either pounds per square inch psi or kilopascals kPa If the tire pressure is normal the value will display If the tire pressure is low or high LOW or HIGH will appear on the display with the value See nflation Tire Pressure on pa
419. right Metal Parts Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their luster Washing with water is all that is usually needed However you may use chrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim if necessary Use special care with aluminum trim To avoid damaging protective trim never use auto or chrome polish steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum A coating of wax rubbed to high polish is recommended for all bright metal parts Windshield and Wiper Blades Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild detergent Wash the windshield thoroughly when cleaning the blades Bugs road grime sap and a buildup of vehicle wash wax treatments may cause wiper streaking Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or damaged Wipers can be damaged by Extreme dusty conditions Sand and salt Heat and sun Snow and ice without proper removal 5 112 Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels and Trim Your vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome plated wheels Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water Rinse with clean water After rinsing thoroughly dry with a soft clean towel A wax may then be applied Notice Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may be damaged if you do not wash your vehicle after driving on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium calcium or s
420. rly or not at all Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it this could damage the surface Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge If the surface of a CD is soiled take a soft lint free cloth or dampen a clean soft cloth in a mild neutral detergent solution mixed with water and clean it Make sure the wiping process starts from the center to the edge Care of Your CD Player Do not add any label to a CD it could get caught in the CD player If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD player mechanism Notice If a label is added to a CD or more than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time or an attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs the CD player could be damaged While using the CD player use only CDs in good condition without any label load one CD at a time and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials liquids and debris If an error displays see CD Messages later in this section If the radio is on the last CD loaded begins to play automatically F1 DISC Down Press to go to the previous CD F2 DISCT Up Press to go to the next CD F3 CD REV lt Reverse Press to
421. rn you and gas that can explode You can be badly hurt if you are not careful See Jump Starting on page 5 45 for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt Infrequent Usage If you drive your vehicle infrequently remove the black negative cable from the battery This will help keep the battery from running down Extended Storage For extended storage of your vehicle remove the black negative cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger This will help maintain the charge of the battery over an extended period of time Jump Starting lf your vehicle s battery has run down you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely ACAUTION Batteries can hurt you They can be dangerous because They contain acid that can burn you They contain gas that can explode or ignite They contain enough electricity to burn you If you do not follow these steps exactly some or all of these things can hurt you Notice Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that would not be covered by your warranty Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it will not work and it could damage your vehicle 1 Check the other vehicle It must have a 12 volt battery with a negative ground system Notice If the other vehicle s system is not a 12 volt system with a negative ground
422. rom running your engine without coolant is not covered by your warranty See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5 31 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency Notice Using coolant other than DEX COOL may cause premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion In addition the engine coolant could require changing sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Any repairs would not be covered by the warranty Always use DEX COOL silicate free coolant in the vehicle 5 33 How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank If you have not found a problem yet check to see if coolant is visible in the surge tank If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at the FULL COLD FROID line on the side of the coolant surge tank add a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant at the coolant surge tank but be sure the cooling system including the coolant surge tank pressure cap is cool before you do it See Engine Coolant on page 5 25 for more information A CAUTION Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly They are under pressure and if you turn the coolant surge tank pressure cap even a little they can come out at high speed Never turn the cap when the cooling system including the coolant surge tank pressure cap is hot Wait for the cooling system and coolant surge tank pressure cap to
423. rom the wheel bolts mounting surfaces and spare wheel Install the spare tire Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel Tighten each wheel nut by turning it clockwise with your hand until the wheel is held against the hub 14 Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise Lower the jack completely 5 103 15 Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross A CAUTION sequence as shown Incorrect or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose and even come off This could lead to a crash If you have to replace them be sure to get new original equipment wheel nuts Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification See Capacities and Specifications on page 5 128 for wheel nut Storing a Flat or Spare Tire torque specification and Tools Notice Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage To avoid expensive brake repairs evenly tighten the wheel ar en AEE AE roper Storing a jack a tire or other equipment in the Specifications on page 5 128 for the wheel nut passenger compartment of the vehicle could torque specification cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone Store all these in the proper place A CAUTION 5 104 Full Size Tire and Tools After you have put the compact spare tire o
424. rs on page 3 59 for more information Keep safety belts clean and dry See Care of Safety Belts on page 5 110 1 66 Airbags The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled maintenance or replacement Make sure the airbag readiness light is working See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 60 for more information Notice If an airbag covering is damaged opened or broken the airbag may not work properly Do not open or break the airbag coverings If there are any opened or broken airbag covers have the airbag covering and or airbag module replaced For the location of the airbag modules see What Makes an Airbag Inflate on page 1 57 See your dealer retailer for service Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash ACAUTION A crash can damage the restraint systems in your vehicle A damaged restraint system may not properly protect the person using it resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash To help make sure your restraint systems are working properly after a crash have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible If you have had a crash do you need new belts or LATCH system if equipped parts After a very minor crash nothing may be necessary But the belt assemblies that were used during any crash may have been stressed or damaged See your dealer retailer to have your safety belt assemblies inspected or replaced If your vehicle has the LATCH system and it wa
425. s ccceceeeeeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 1 3 Heated Seats Rear ccceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeees 1 7 MEMORY ss ere read slender ss hedens 2 77 Power Lumbar 252 Ey ER 1 2 Power Reclining Seatbacks W u ssseeerererereee 1 4 Power Seat cccceceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 2 Securing a Child Restraint Rear Seat Position 525 suse nsten hedde 1 44 Right Front Seat Position ssssseeeeree 1 47 Security Lignieres nnno rener as babs 3 71 SENICE daa ea e rE E E lee EE 5 3 Accessories and Modifications sssssere 5 3 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle 2222 kr here bjerre 5 4 Service cont California Pershlorate Materials Requirements 5 4 California Proposition 65 Warning 0 5 3 Doing Your Own Work ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 5 4 Engine Soon Light c eceeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee ees 3 68 Publications Ordering Information 0 7 15 Service Scheduling Appointments 0608 7 9 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 1 64 Sheet Metal Damage eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 113 Shifting Into Park P ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeaes 2 36 Shifting Out of Park P dccscscccissecccteeceeesiesieeenss 2 37 Side Blind Zone Alert c ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 2 47 Signals Turn and Lane Change 0055 3 8 Spare Tire GOMPACt isis an ku aa A kel 5 106 Wnstalling zaren ae A a a
426. s power seats and air conditioning Aspect Ratio The relationship of a tire s height to its width Belt A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim Bias Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Cold Tire Pressure The amount of air pressure in a tire measured in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascals kPa before a tire has built up heat from driving See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 66 Curb Weight The weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel oil and coolant but without passengers and cargo DOT Markings A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation DOT motor vehicle safety standards The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number TIN an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer production plant brand and date of production GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 26 GAWR FRT Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front axle See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 26 GAWR RR Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
427. s after the button is pressed If the vehicle s speed is above 30 mph 48 km h the rear defogger stays on continuously If turned on again the defogger only runs for about five minutes before turning off The defogger can also be turned off by pressing the button again or by turning off the engine The heated outside rearview mirrors also heat to help clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when the rear window defogger is on See Outside Power Heated Mirrors on page 2 43 Notice Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside rear window Do not adhere anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass These actions may damage the rear defogger Repairs would not be covered by your warranty 3 53 Outlet Adjustment Use the lever located in the center of each outlet to change the direction of the airflow either side to side or up and down Use the thumbwheels to open or close the outlets to adjust the airflow Turn the thumbwheel towards the vehicle door to open the outlets and allow the maximum amount of air to enter your vehicle Turn the thumbwheel towards the center console to close the outlets and minimize the amount of air entering the vehicle Operation Tips Clear away any ice snow or leaves from the air inlets at the base of the windshield that may block the flow of air into your vehicle Use of non GM approved hood deflectors may adversely affect the performance of the system
428. s are in use for about six seconds while you are driving the exterior lamps will come on automatically if the exterior lamp control is in AUTO See Wiper Activated Headlamps on page 3 37 for more information Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them If they re frozen to the windshield gently loosen or thaw them If the blades do become damaged install new blades For more information see Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5 55 Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload Your vehicle STS V only is equipped with a feature that disables the wiper system when the hood is open and your vehicle is stopped Opening the hood will automatically park the wipers if they are not parked This prevents the wipers from interfering with hood operation Be sure the hood is not opened when you require the vehicle s wipers out of the park position such as when changing the wiper blades Rainsense II Wipers If your vehicle has this feature the moisture sensor is mounted on the interior side of the windshield behind the rearview mirror It is used to automatically operate the wipers by monitoring the amount of moisture build up on the windshield Wipes occur as needed to clear the windshield depending on driving conditions and the sensitivity setting In light rain or snow fewer wipes will occu
429. s being used during a crash you may need new LATCH system parts New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt or LATCH system if equipped was not being used at the time of the crash If an airbag inflates you will need to replace airbag system parts See the part on the airbag system earlier in this section Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has been in a crash if your airbag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle or while you are driving See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 60 1 67 4 NOTES 1 68 Section 2 Features and Controls KEYS onarena ren 2 3 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle 2 27 Keyless Access System ceeeeeeeeeneee een eeee es 2 5 New Vehicle Break In ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 27 Keyless Access System Operation 055 2 6 Ignition POSitiONS ccceeec Dae ai 2 28 Remote Vehicle Start c eceeeeeeeeeee ees 2 12 Retained Accessory Power RAP 055 2 29 Doors and LOCKS 0 cccccccccceeeeeecceeeeeeeeees 2 14 Starting the Engine 0 0 0 teeta 2 29 Door Loeks cesta tetra cntteak conde aen pE nOi 2 14 Engine Coolant Heater uses 2 31 Power Door LOcKS ssnst secorra E 2 14 Automatic Transmission Operation 2 32 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 15 Parking Brake RL cata EDINE E ENER Elna 2 35 Rear Door Security LOCKS
430. s ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Do not spill coolant on a hot engine When replacing a pressure cap make sure it is hand tight and fully seated Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap Notice If the pressure cap is not tightly installed coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully installed on the coolant surge tank See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 11 for more information on location Engine Overheating There are two engine hot messages that could be displayed in the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 for more information If the engine is overheating then you will find a coolant temperature gage and a coolant warning light on the instrument panel See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3 67 and Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light on page 3 66 for more information 5 29 If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine A CAUTION Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly even if you just open the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is overheated the liquids in it can catch fire You or others co
431. s frontal airbag See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 60 for more on this including important safety information lf after several seconds both status indicator lights remain on or if there are no lights at all there may be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system See your dealer retailer for service ACAUTION If the airbag readiness light in the instrument panel cluster ever comes on and stays on it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system If this ever happens have the vehicle serviced promptly because an adult size person sitting in the right front passenger s seat may not have the protection of the airbag s See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 60 for more on this including important safety information Charging System Light This light will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition but the engine is not running as a check to show you it is working It should go out once the engine is running If it stays on or comes on while you are driving you may have a problem with the charging system A charging system Driver Information Center DIC message may also appear See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 for more information This light could indicate that you have problems with a generator drive belt or another electrical problem Have it checked right away If you must drive a short distance with the light on be certain to turn off all your accessories s
432. s in the O off position Do not exceed 36 psi 248 kPa 5 Plug the air compressor accessory plug C into an accessory power outlet in the vehicle See a Accessory Power Outlet s on page 3 46 for more 7 Push the On Off switch to the I on position information The sealant and compressor kit will inject sealant and Do not slam door or close window on the air into the tire Sealant may leak from the puncture compressor accessory plug cord until the vehicle is driven and the hole has sealed 4 Attach the sealant filling hose A onto the tire valve stem Turn it clockwise until it is tight 5 90 The pressure gage will initially show a high pressure while the compressor pushes the sealant into the tire Once the sealant is completely dispersed into the tire the pressure will quickly drop and start to rise again as the tire inflates with air 8 Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure found on the Tire and Loading Information label located on the vehicle s center pillar B pillar below the vehicle s door latch using the air pressure gage on the top of the unit The pressure gage reads high while the compressor is running Turn the compressor off to get an accurate pressure reading Notice If the recommended pressure cannot be reached after 15 minutes the vehicle should not be driven farther Damage to the tire is severe and the sealant will not be effective Remove the air compressor plug from the a
433. s less than 6 mph 9 km h Press any button on the appropriate keyless access transmitter to identify yourself as Driver 1 or Driver 2 Turn on the radio by pressing the power volume knob Press the CNFG radio button to enter the main menu of the radio Turn the tune select knob and scroll to SETUP Press the tune select knob to enter the SETUP menu Turn the tune select knob and scroll to DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS Press the tune select knob to enter the DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS submenu The following items will appear e RECALL EXIT SETTINGS e STORE EXIT SETTINGS STORE EXIT SETTINGS To store exit settings 1 Adjust your settings for the driver s seat the outside Driver Exit Settings Submenu Items RECALL EXIT SETTINGS To recall exit settings i Enter the memory programming mode for your exit settings by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Driver Exit Settings Submenu From the DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS submenu turn the tune select knob to scroll to RECALL EXIT SETTINGS and press in the knob If the vehicle is in PARK P one beep will sound and your previously saved exit position will then be recalled If the vehicle is not in PARK P three beeps will sound and your previously saved exit position will not be recalled A memory recall can be stopped by pressing any memory seat or mirror position button If you would like the stored exit positions to be recalled whe
434. s of the same size load range and speed rating as the original equipment tires Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original equipment tires may not be available for H V W Y and ZR speed rated tires If you choose winter tires with a lower speed rating never exceed the tire s maximum speed capability Tire Sidewall Labeling Useful information about a tire is molded into its sidewall The examples below show a typical passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire sidewall spec 1109 MS ec R1 SA gaoa 975 ss Aa oo KS Z LL ps Ea za RS or Passenger P Metric Tire Example A Tire Size The tire size is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire s width height aspect ratio construction type and service description See the Tire Size illustration later in this section for more detail B TPC Spec Tire Performance Criteria Specification Original equipment tires designed to GM s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall GM s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines C DOT Department of Transportation The Department of Transportation DOT code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards D Tire Identification Number TIN The letters and numbers following DOT Department of Trans
435. s reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it Airbags are supplemental restraints to the safety belts All airbags are designed to work with safety belts but do not replace them 1 51 A CAUTION Frontal airbags are designed to deploy in moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crashes They are not designed to inflate in rollover rear crashes or in many side crashes Seat mounted side impact airbags and roof rail airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe crashes where something hits the side of your vehicle They are not designed to inflate in frontal in rollover or in rear crashes Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there is an airbag for that person 1 52 A CAUTION Airbags inflate with great force faster than the blink of an eye Anyone who is up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Do not sit unnecessarily close to the airbag as you would be if you were sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward Safety belts help keep you in position before and during a crash Always wear your safety belt even with airbags The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door or side windows in seating positions with seat mounted side impact airbags and or roof ra
436. same knob to select ON or OFF An X appears in the box when ON is selected 3 106 4 Press the BACK F6 button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the BACK F6 button or wait for the display to time out Once program type is activated the PTYs display above the pushbuttons in place of the preset stations if programmed Press the pushbutton for the desired PTY Not all stations support PTYs The radio might not go to all of the stations with that music type when pressing the pushbutton AF Alternate Frequency Alternate frequency lets the radio switch to a stronger station with the same program type To turn AF on or off perform the following steps 1 Press the knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn this knob until ALTERNATE FREQ displays 3 Press the same knob to select AF OFF AF ON or AF REG An X appears in the box when ON is selected 4 Press the BACK F6 button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the BACK F6 button or wait for the display to time out This feature does not function with the XM radio stations Radio Message THEFTLOCK This message displays when the THEFTLOCK system has been activated Take the vehicle to the dealer retailer for service XMIM Satellite Radio Service XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces XM Satellite Radio has a wide var
437. se these gasolines if they comply with the specifications described earlier However E85 85 ethanol and other fuels containing more than 10 ethanol must not be used in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels Notice Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Do not use fuel containing methanol It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts That damage would not be covered under your warranty Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions can contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT We recommend against the use of such gasolines Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission control system could be affected The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on If this occurs return to your dealer retailer for service Fuels in Foreign Countries If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada the proper fuel might be hard to find Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by your warranty To check the fuel availability ask an auto club or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you will be driving Filling th
438. se when you drive If this occurs use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible Otherwise you could damage the engine If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking the engine needs service If your vehicle has the 4 4L V8 engine VIN Code D use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 91 or higher For best performance use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 93 In an emergency you can use regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or higher If 87 octane fuel is used do not perform any aggressive driving maneuvers such as wide open throttle applications You might also hear audible spark knock during acceleration Refill the tank with premium fuel as soon as possible to avoid damaging the engine If you are using gasoline rated at 91 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking the engine needs service Gasoline Specifications At a minimum gasoline should meet ASTM specification D 4814 in the United States or CAN CGSB 3 5 or 3 511 in Canada Some gasolines contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT We recommend against the use of gasolines containing MMT See Additives on page 5 6 for additional information California Fuel If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions Standards it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications See the
439. sealant available through your dealer retailer TPMS Malfunction Light and Message The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable When the system detects a malfunction the low tire warning light flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the remainder of the ignition cycle A DIC warning message is also displayed The low tire warning light and DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the problem is corrected Some of the conditions that can cause the malfunction light and DIC message to come on are One of the road tires has been replaced with the spare tire The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor The DIC message should go off once you re install the road tire containing the TPMS sensor The TPMS sensor matching process was started but not completed or not completed successfully after rotating the vehicle s tires The DIC message and TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS sensor matching process is performed successfully See TPMS Sensor Matching Process later in this section 5 71 One or more TPMS sensors are missing or damaged The DIC message and the TPMS malfunction light should go off when the TPMS sensors are installed and the sensor matching process is performed successfully See your dealer retailer for service Replacement tires or wheels do not match your vehicle s original equipment tires or wheels Tires and
440. section for more information on configuring the keys aR oD 3 99 Radio s MP3 21 JAN 2004 12 10 m 103 5 98 5 97 7 102 916 SY 99 1 94 1 O Se eI O Radio with CD shown Radio with Six Disc CD similar 3 100 Radio Data System RDS The audio system has a Radio Data System RDS RDS features are available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information With RDS the radio can do the following Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of programming e Receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies e Display messages from radio stations e Seek to stations with traffic announcements This system relies upon receiving specific information when available from these stations In rare cases a radio station can broadcast incorrect information that causes the radio features to work improperly If this happens contact the radio station While the radio is tuned to an RDS station the station name or call letters display instead of the frequency RDS stations can also provide the time of day a program type PTY for current programming and the name of the program being broadcast Playing the Radio D Power Press to turn the system on and off lt Volume Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or to decrease the volume SRCE Source Press to select a source either radio or CD The CD must be loaded to select the source and to play CD dis
441. sh if the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met And if your vehicle has side impact airbags safety belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in a side crash Pretensioners work only once If they activate in a crash you will need to get new ones and probably other new parts for your safety belt system See Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1 67 1 23 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults When installed on a shoulder belt the comfort guide positions the belt away from the neck and head There is one guide for each outboard passenger position in the rear seat Here is how to install a comfort guide to the safety belt 1 24 Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of the seatback and the interior body to remove the guide from its storage clip 2 Place the guide over the belt and insert the two 3 Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat edges of the belt into the slots of the guide The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top 1 25 A CAUTION A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are bes
442. should wear a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips just touching the top of the thighs This applies belt force to the child s pelvic bones in a crash It should never be worn over the abdomen which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides under Lap Shoulder Belt on page 1 21 According to accident statistics children and infants are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions In a crash children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up or can be thrown out of the vehicle Older children need to use safety belts properly Z CAUTION Never do this Here two children are wearing the same belt The belt cannot properly spread the impact forces In a crash the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured A belt must be used by only one person at a time 1 29 A CAUTION Never do this Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap shoulder belt but the shoulder part is behind the child In a crash the child would not be restrained by the shoulder belt The child might slide under the lap belt The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries The child coul
443. slot to enable engine starting See No Fobs Detected under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 3 Do not race the engine immediately after starting it Operate the engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts 2 29 4 If the engine does not start and no DIC message is displayed wait 15 seconds before trying again to let the cranking motor cool down If the engine does not start after 5 10 seconds especially in very cold weather below 0 F or 18 C it could be flooded with too much gasoline Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor while cranking for up to 15 seconds maximum Wait at least 15 seconds between each try to allow the cranking motor to cool down When the engine starts let go of the accelerator If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again do the same thing This clears the extra gasoline from the engine Notice Cranking the engine for long periods of time by pressing the START button immediately after cranking has ended can overheat and damage the cranking motor and drain the battery Wait at least 15 seconds between each try to allow the cranking motor to cool down Your vehicle has a Computer Controlled Cranking System This feature assists in starting the engine and protects components Once cranking has been initiated the engine continues cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts If the engine does not start cran
444. so program the remote vehicle start system to start up the vehicle s automatic climate control system If this feature is turned on the system monitors the outside temperature and turns on the rear window defogger front window defogger and heated or ventilated seats if your vehicle has them See Personal Settings Menu under Vehicle Personalization on page 2 60 Q Remote Start This button will be on the RKE transmitter if you have remote start To start the vehicle using the remote start feature 1 Aim the remote keyless access transmitter at the vehicle 2 Press the transmitter s lock button release it and then immediately press and hold the transmitter s remote start button for at least three seconds or until the vehicle s turn signal lamps flash The vehicle s doors will be locked When the vehicle starts the parking lamps will turn on and remain on while the vehicle is running 3 If itis the first remote start since the vehicle has been driven repeat these steps while the engine is still running to extend the engine running time by 10 minutes Remote start can be extended one time If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut off after 10 minutes unless a time extension has been done To manually shut off a remote start do one of the following Aim the keyless access transmitter at the vehicle and press the remote start button until the parking lamps turn off Turn on the hazard
445. son performing work for you is qualified to do so Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Q Is there anything might add to or change about the vehicle that could keep the airbags from working properly A Yes If you add things that change your vehicle s frame bumper system height front end or side sheet metal they may keep the airbag system from working properly Changing or moving any parts of the front seats safety belts the airbag sensing and diagnostic module steering wheel instrument panel roof rail airbag modules ceiling headliner or pillar garnish trim overhead console front sensors side impact sensors or airbag wiring can affect the operation of the airbag system In addition your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger s position which includes sensors that are part of the passenger s seat The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced with non GM covers upholstery or trim or with GM covers upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle Any object such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device installed under or on top of the seat fabric could also interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing system This could either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag s or prevent the passenger sensing system from properly turning off the passenger airbag s See
446. st track of the last playlist has played play continues from the first track of the first playlist e Ifthe CD does not contain any playlists then play begins from the first track under the root directory When all tracks from the root directory have played play continues from files according to their numerical listing After playing the last track from the last folder play begins again at the first track of the first folder or root directory When play enters a new folder the display does not automatically show the new folder name The new track name displays File System and Naming The song name that is displayed is the song name that is contained in the ID3 tag If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag then the radio displays the file name without the extension such as mp3 as the track name Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages are shortened Parts of words on the last page of text and the extension of the filename does not display 3 113 Preprogrammed Playlists Preprogrammed playlists that were created using WinAmp MusicMatch or Real Jukebox software can be accessed however they cannot be edited using the radio These playlists are treated as special folders containing compressed audio song files Playing an MP3 Insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player pulls it in and LOADING CD displays The CD should begin playing and the CD symbol displays If the igniti
447. steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the water deflector filter cover and the hood seal Warning Lights Gages and Indicators This part describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle The pictures will help you locate them Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement Paying attention to the warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions As you will see in the details on the next few pages some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they are working If you are familiar with this section you should not be alarmed when this happens Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there is a problem with your vehicle When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on while you are driving or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem check the section that tells you what to do about it Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous So please get to know your warning lights and gages They are a big help Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center DIC that works along with the warning lights and gages See Driver Informatio
448. surface contamination Removes light scratches and protects finish Cleans shines and protects tires No wiping necessary Medium foaming shampoo Cleans and lightly waxes Biodegradable and phosphate free Quickly removes spots and stains from carpets vinyl and cloth upholstery Odorless spray odor eliminator used on fabrics vinyl leather and carpet 5 115 Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification Number VIN SAMPLE4UX1M072675 This is the legal identifier for your vehicle It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel on the driver side You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration Engine Identification The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code This code helps you identify your vehicle s engine specifications and replacement parts 5 116 Service Parts Identification Label This label is on the spare tire cover It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts The label has the following information Vehicle Identification Number VIN Model designation e Paint information Production options and special equipment Do not remove this label from the vehicle Electrical System Add On Electrical Equipment Notice Do not add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check with yo
449. t 15 inches above The rear lifting location is about 7 inches 37 cm from the rear edge of the front wheel well 17 cm from the front edge of the rear wheel well 2 Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack 2 Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack and the vehicle and the vehicle 3 Lift the vehicle with the jack making sure the jack 3 Lift the vehicle with the jack making sure the jack is centered on the front lifting point is centered on the rear lifting point See Doing Your Own Service Work on page 5 4 5 85 If a Tire Goes Flat It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving especially if you maintain your tires properly See Tires on page 5 57 If air goes out of a tire It is much more likely to leak out slowly But if you should ever have a blowout here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do If a front tire fails the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly Steer to maintain lane position and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane A rear blowout particularly on a curve acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you would use in a skid In any rear blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go It may be very bumpy and noisy but you can still steer Ge
450. t able to take belt restraining forces 4 Buckle position and release the safety belt as described previously in this section Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder To remove and store the comfort guide squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out of the guide Pull the guide upward to expose its storage clip and then slide the guide onto the clip Turn the guide and clip inward and slide them in between the seatback and the interior body leaving only the loop of the elastic cord exposed 1 26 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone including pregnant women Like all occupants they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts A pregnant woman should wear a lap shoulder belt and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible below the rounding throughout the pregnancy The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother When a safety belt is worn properly it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash For pregnant women as for anyone the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle s safety belt will fasten around you you should use it But if a safety belt is not long enough your dealer retailer will order you an extender When you go in to order it take the heaviest coat you will wear so the extender will be long enough for you To h
451. t factory position Weather conditions such as severe icing may also cause the window to auto reverse The window will return to normal operation once the obstruction or condition is removed Express Window Anti Pinch Override A CAUTION If express override is activated the window will not reverse automatically You or others could be injured and the window could be damaged Before you use express override make sure that all people and obstructions are clear of the window path In an emergency the anti pinch feature can be overridden in a supervised mode Hold the window switch all the way up in the express position The window will rise for as long as the switch is held Once the switch is released the express mode is re activated In this mode the window can still close on an object in its path Use care when using the override mode 2 21 Window Lockout max Window Lockout Press to disable the rear window controls The light on the button illuminates indicating that the feature is in use The rear windows can still be raised or lowered using the driver s window switches To restore power to the rear windows press the button again The light on the button will go out The front passenger window can be programmed to be disabled using the window lockout button See Vehicle Personalization on page 2 60 Secure Car Feature The windows can be closed by pressing the lock button on the keyless access transmitter
452. t get twisted The lap shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passenger belt out all the way you may engage the child restraint locking feature If this happens just let the belt go back all the way and start again 3 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender on page 1 27 Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if necessary If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster move it to the height that is right for you Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash See Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment later in this section 1 21 5 To make the lap part tight pull up on the shoulder belt It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants 6 This safety belt has a feature that will reduce the tension of the safety belt on the occupant s shoulder if the vehicle is on To set this feature gently pull on the belt or lean forward and then sit back The belt will retract and rest lightly against the occupant
453. t have a top tether are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached Others require the top tether always to be attached In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint lf the child restraint does not have a top tether one can be obtained in kit form for many child restraints Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Locations KA Top Tether Anchor Seating positions with top tether anchors Lower Anchor Seating positions with two lower anchors Rear Seat To assist you in locating the lower anchors each seating position with lower anchors has two labels near the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion 1 39 To assist you in locating the top tether anchors the top tether anchor symbol is located on the cover The top tether anchors are located under covers on the rear seatback filler panel Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed 1 40 Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be att
454. t indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year However the engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset Your dealer retailer has trained service people who will perform this work using genuine parts and reset the system It is also important to check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level If the system is ever reset accidentally you must change the oil at 3 000 miles 5 000 km since your last oil change Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed 5 21 How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use Whenever the oil is changed reset the system so it can calculate when the next oil change is required If a situation occurs where you change the oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message in the DIC being turned on reset the system After the oil has been changed the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message must be reset To reset the message 1 Press the up or down arrow to scroll the DIC to show OIL LIFE 2 Once the XXX ENGINE OIL LIFE menu item is highlighted press and hold the RESET button until the percentage shows 100 If the percentage does not return to 100 or if the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes back on when you start your vehicle the engine oil life system has not reset Repeat the procedure 5 22 What to Do
455. t leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture 5 67 High Speed Operation A CAUTION Driving at high speeds 100 mph 160 km h or higher puts an additional strain on tires Sustained high speed driving causes excessive heat build up and can cause sudden tire failure You could have a crash and you or others could be killed Some high speed rated tires require inflation pressure adjustment for high speed operation When speed limits and road conditions are such that a vehicle can be driven at high speeds make sure the tires are rated for high speed operation in excellent condition and set to the correct cold tire inflation pressure for the vehicle load If you will be driving at high speeds speeds of 100 mph 160 km h or higher where it is legal set the cold inflation pressure to the maximum inflation pressure shown on the tire sidewall or 38 psi 265 kPa whichever is lower See the example following When you end this high speed driving return the tires to 5 68 the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 26 Example You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure molded on the tire s sidewall in small letters near the rim flange It will read something like this Maximum load 690 kg 1521 Ibs 300 kPa 44 psi Max Press For this example you would set the inflation pressure for high speed driving at 38 psi 265 kPa Tire Pressu
456. t must be removed to access the accessory power outlet If it does when not using the outlet be sure to cover it with the protective cap Notice Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for an extended period of time while the vehicle is off will drain the battery Power is always supplied to the outlets Always unplug electrical equipment when not in use and do not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating Certain accessory power plugs may not be compatible to the accessory power outlet and could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses If you experience a problem see your dealer for additional information on the accessory power outlets Notice Adding any electrical equipment to your vehicle may damage it or keep other components from working as they should The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not use equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes Check with your dealer retailer before adding electrical equipment Follow the proper installation instructions that are included with any electrical equipment you install Notice Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug because the power outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only Ashtray s and Cigarette Lighter Your vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette lighter Notice If you put papers pins or other flam
457. t of someone who was drinking and driving In recent years more than 17 000 annual motor vehicle related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol with about 250 000 people injured For persons under 21 it is against the law in every U S state to drink alcohol There are good medical psychological and developmental reasons for these laws The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive Medical research shows that alcohol in a person s system can make crash injuries worse especially injuries to the brain spinal cord or heart This means that when anyone who has been drinking driver or passenger is in a crash that person s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking Control of a Vehicle The following three systems help to control your vehicle while driving brakes steering and accelerator At times as when driving on snow or ice it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide Meaning you can lose control of your vehicle See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 6 and StabiliTrak System on page 4 8 or Enhanced StabiliTrak on page 4 9 Adding non dealer non retailer accessories can affect your vehicle s performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 Braking See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 64 Braking action
458. t safety information 1 63 A thick layer of additional material such as a blanket or cushion or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers seat heaters and seat massagers can affect how well the passenger sensing system operates We recommend that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket equipment other than any that GM has approved for your specific vehicle See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 65 for more information about modifications that can affect how the system operates A CAUTION Stowing of articles under the passenger s seat or between the passenger s seat cushion and seatback may interfere with the proper operation of the passenger sensing system 1 64 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced There are parts of the airbag system in several places around your vehicle Your dealer retailer and the service manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the airbag system To purchase a service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 15 A CAUTION For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off and the battery is disconnected an airbag can still inflate during improper service You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates Avoid yellow connectors They are probably part of the airbag system Be sure to follow proper service procedures and make sure the per
459. t the factory but may have changed from their default state since then To change feature preferences use the following procedure Entering the Personal Settings Menu To enter the feature programming mode 1 Be sure the ignition is either on in ACCESSORY or in RAP and place the transmission in PARK P or make sure that the vehicle speed is less than 6 mph 9 km h To avoid excessive drain on the battery it is recommended that the headlamps are turned off 2 Press any button on the appropriate keyless access transmitter to identify yourself as Driver 1 or Driver 2 Turn on the radio by pressing the power volume knob 3 Press the CNFG radio button or the tune select knob located on the right side of the radio to enter the radio s main menu 4 Turn the tune select knob and scroll to SETUP Press the tune select knob to enter the SETUP menu Turn the tune select knob and scroll to PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU then press the tune select knob to turn the feature on A check mark appears after this selection when it is turned on and the entire list of personalization features will appear Turn the tune select knob and scroll to the feature you want to change then press the tune select knob to turn the feature on or off If the feature is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name Some features have submenus that show additional features that can be turned on or off After entering a subme
460. t the filter at each engine oil change How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter To inspect the air cleaner filter remove the filter from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust and dirt If the filter remains caked with dirt a new filter is required To inspect or replace the filter in the 3 6L V6 or 4 6L V8 engines do the following 1 Remove the two screws located on the top of the cover 2 Disconnect the coolant recovery hose so that it is not going across the top of the engine air cleaner filter 5 23 3 Loosen the clamp and remove the duct from the passenger s side of the engine air cleaner filter 4 The two sides of the airbox are hinged at the bottom Open the airbox by pushing the top of the airbox cover toward the engine 5 Remove the air filter by lifting it straight up through the opening in the airbox 6 Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner filter See Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6 15 for the correct part number for the filter 7 Reinstall the cover by reversing Steps 1 through 4 If your vehicle has the 4 4L V8 STS V engine there is a special procedure for checking and changing the air cleaner filter Because this procedure is difficult you should have this done at the dealership service department Contact your dealer for additional information or the procedure can be found in the service manual To purchase a service manual see Service Publi
461. t was set returns 6 Press the BACK F6 button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the BACK F6 button or wait for the display to time out This feature does not function with the XM radio stations The radio presets do not have to be reset when the vehicle is started or when the battery power is removed PRESETS HOME AWAY This feature stores two different kinds of station presets HOME can be used for local stations and AWAY for stations outside of the local broadcasting area To set preset stations for home and away perform the following steps 1 Press the knob to enter the main menu 2 Turn this knob until PRESETS HOME AWAY displays 3 Press the same knob to select HOME or AWAY displays 4 Press the BACK F6 button to exit the display To return to the original display repeatedly press the BACK F6 button or wait for the display to time out This feature does not function with the XM radio stations Follow the manual or automatic steps previously listed for setting the preset pushbuttons for both home and away 3 103 Setting the Tone Bass Midrange Treble To adjust the bass midrange and treble perform the following steps 1 Press the knob to enter the main menu 2 Press this knob to scroll through the settings 3 Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the bass midrange or treble If a station is weak or noisy decrease the treble 4
462. tback Press for the heated seat and seatback Ventilated Seat Press for the ventilated seat The light bar in the climate control display shows the setting high medium or low Press either button to start that feature at the highest setting Each time you press the button the feature will decrease one setting Keep pressing the button until the display lights turn off to turn the feature off The heated or ventilated seats will automatically shut off when the vehicle is turned off Power Reclining Seatbacks The front seats have power reclining seatbacks Use the vertical power seat control located on the outboard side of the seat to operate them To recline the seatback press the control toward the rear of the vehicle To raise the seatback press the control toward the front of the vehicle CAUTION Continued The lap belt cannot do its job either In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there A CAUTION Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous Even if you buckle up your safety belts cannot do their job when you are reclined like this not at your pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will not be against your body Instead it will be in front of you In a crash you could go into it receiving neck or other injuries CAUTION Continued
463. ted and repaired 5 92 A CAUTION 16 17 Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone Store the tire sealant and compressor kit in the proper place Return the equipment to the proper storage location in the trunk of your vehicle You may need to loosen the retention strap to wrap it around the sealant and compressor kit and foam container To do this pull apart the strap and loosen the strap at the quick release buckle Then snap the buckle together pull the strap tight and secure the loose end of the strap by mating the ends Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles 8 km to distribute the sealant evenly in the tire Stop at a safe location and check the tire pressure refer to Steps 1 through 8 under Using the Air Compressor without Sealant next in this section 18 If the tire pressure has fallen more then 10 psi Using the Air Compressor without 68 kPa below the recommended inflation pressure stop driving the vehicle The tire is too Sealant severely damaged and the tire sealant and To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air only compressor kit cannot seal the tire See Roadside and not sealant Service on page 7 6 for more information 1 Remove the air compressor inflating hose connector If the tire pressure has not dropped more tha
464. tede ceeeaneeece 5 109 Interior Cleaning rear aeien 5 107 Leather rrine ioone ia O 5 109 Sheet Metal Damage W G sssseeerere renerne 5 113 Speaker Covers cceceeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeaes 5 110 E rer E 5 113 Underbody Maintenance sssseeneeeerreee 5 114 Vehicle Care Appearance Materials 5 115 Washing Your Vehicle cseeeeeeeee eee eee es 5 110 WeatherstmipS i 0 cccsececeaneecacerercnesecanenseeene 5 110 Windshield and Wiper Blades 5 5 112 Wood Panels sciissiccsaeteztieel dbio 5 110 Appointments Scheduling Service 7 9 ASIA acer horse ales catia cde aea 3 47 Audio SYSICM seiek enen onor n noriai 3 98 Audio Steering Wheel Controls 1 1 1 1 1 3 121 Backglass Antenna ssesseeeeeeere rener sree 3 124 Navigation Radio System see Navigation Manual eee 3 117 Radio Personalization u s ssssssereeeeerernsese 3 117 Radio Reception 55 orne rannen 3 123 Audio System cont Setting the Time W W W sssseeeeeere reen nnee 3 99 Theft Deterrent Feature eseeeeeeeee ees 3 121 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 3 124 Audio System S cceceeeeeeeeeneee een eeeeeaeeaeees 3 100 Automatic Transmission Fluid teeth cat sonteccag hare suquartonaaae E 5 25 Operation irrien iio etie 2 32 Backglass Antenna eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 124 Battery air
465. tender Safety Belt ccc ceeeeeeeeeeeee teen ees 1 27 Exterior Lighting Battery Saver eeeeeeeees 3 40 Filter Engine Air Cleaner a se 5 23 Finish Damage cacs5 cccvistcadetees cacksatawobecneameanen es 5 114 Flashers Hazard Warning 0c ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 6 Rash to Pas Sienn sagt 3 13 Flat Tne tonnerre nee niera ar EEEE 5 86 Flat Tire Changing herec niesei anmes ionii 5 96 Flat Tire Storing emesos tin herre ene 5 104 FIUIG A E E E E E E 5 25 Power Steering W u sssseeerereerere renee n erne 5 39 Windshield Washer ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee tees 5 40 Fog Lamp FOG eaa a EE E E 3 39 Fog Lamp Liohteiorer sea laane los eee 3 72 Forward Collision Alert FAC System W1 3 10 FONT AXE Aesar a aR EREE 5 52 Fuel earr a E E E E ene 5 5 AddItVE S ieaie inaina ERES 5 6 California Fuel us vets cies caer einer EDER ENE 5 6 Fuel cont Filling a Portable Fuel Container 1 5 9 Filing the Tank reserare roo detent 5 7 Fuels in Foreign Countries ceeeeeeeeeeeees 5 7 GAGE oeiras ke baner dan ul GE 3 73 Gasoline Octane 2 4 ornare ere 5 5 Gasoline Specifications ssseseeeeeererereree 5 6 Fuses Fuses and Circuit Breakers eeeeeeees 5 117 Rear Underseat Fuse Block oscene 5 121 Underhood Fuse Block usasse 5 118 Windshield Wiper ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ee 5 117 Gage Engine Coolant Temperature 3 67 UC
466. ter the curve while the front wheels are straight ahead Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the curve Maintain a reasonable steady speed Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve and then accelerate gently into the straightaway To help you steer in the direction you want to go during certain sharp or sudden cornering maneuvers gear selection is controlled This will maximize the available drive wheel torque and minimize the transmission response time and shift activity During this kind of maneuver the transmission shifts automatically as vehicle speed changes Adding non dealer non retailer accessories can affect your vehicle s performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking For example you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you You can avoid these problems by braking if you can stop in time But sometimes you cannot there is not room That is the time for evasive action steering around the problem Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these First apply the brakes See Braking on page 4 4 It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision Then steer around the problem to the left or right depending on the sp
467. tery voltage range is 11 5 to 15 5 volts when the engine is running To monitor battery voltage on the DIC press the information button until BATTERY VOLTS displays 3 82 BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW This symbol appears with this message This message displays when the electrical system is charging less than 10 volts or the battery has been drained If this message appears immediately after starting the engine it is possible that the generator can still recharge the battery The battery should recharge while driving but may take a few hours to do so Consider using an auxiliary charger to boost the battery after returning home or to a final destination Follow the manufacturer s instructions If this message appears while driving or after starting your vehicle and stays on have it checked immediately to determine the cause of this problem To help the generator recharge the battery quickly reduce the load on the electrical system by turning off the accessories The normal battery voltage range is 11 5 to 15 5 volts To monitor battery voltage on the DIC press the information button until BATTERY VOLTS displays CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON This message displays when the engine oil needs to be changed See your dealer retailer See Engine Oil on page 5 18 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 for more information After resetting the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message by clearing it from the display reset the engine oil life syst
468. the driver s selection when moving the shift lever forward or rearward See Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 74 for more information on the DIC j DRIVER DOOR AJAR socom MS Gor When using the DSC mode the number displayed on the Driver Information Center DIC indicates the gear that the transmission is in When starting the vehicle from a stopped condition only First 1 and Second 2 gear may be used While using the DSC feature the vehicle will have firmer shifting and increased performance You can use this for sport driving or when climbing descending hills to stay in gear longer or to down shift for more power or engine braking The transmission will only allow you to shift into gears appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine Revolutions Per Minute RPM The transmission will not automatically shift to the next higher gear if the engine RPM is too high lf shifting is prevented for any reason the selected gear will flash multiple times indicating that the transmission has not shifted gears The transmission will allow you to shift to the gear selected and will automatically downshift when the vehicle comes to a stop This will allow for more power during take off and passing Parking Brake The parking brake pedal is located on the lower portion of the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel This vehicle has a push to release parking brake pedal To set the parking brake h
469. the DIC The IntelliBeam system is turned off at the inside rearview mirror The vehicle s speed drops below 15 mph 24 km h IntelliBeam may not turn off the high beams if the system cannot detect other vehicle s lamps because of any of the following The others vehicle s lamp s are missing damaged obstructed from view or otherwise undetected The other vehicle s lamp s are covered with dirt snow and or road spray The other vehicle s lamp s cannot be detected due to dense exhaust smoke fog snow road spray mist or other airborne obstructions Your vehicle s windshield is dirty cracked or obstructed by something that blocks the view of the IntelliBeam light sensor Your vehicle s windshield is covered with ice dirt haze or other obstructions Your vehicle is loaded such that the front end of the vehicle points upward causing the IntelliBeam sensor to aim high and not detect headlamps and taillamps You are driving on winding or hilly roads You might need to manually disable or cancel the high beam headlamps by turning the low beam headlamps on if any of the above conditions exist 3 35 Disabling and Resetting IntelliBeam at the Rearview Mirror IntelliBeam can be disabled and reset to the original factory setting by using the controls on the inside rearview mirror AUTO 2D IntelliBeam On Off To disable the system press this button on the inside rearview m
470. the center console storage area located between the driver and front passenger seats 7 Once the transmitter is programmed a beep will The procedure will require three ten minute cycles to sound The DIC will display READY FOR X complete the matching process Do the following where X can be 3 or 4 or MAX FOBS LEARNED 8 Remove the transmitter from the transmitter pocket and press the unlock button on the keyless access transmitter two times 1 The vehicle must be off The Canadian immobilizer standard requires Canadian owners to see their dealer retailer for matching new transmitters when two recognized transmitters are not available United States owners are permitted to match a new transmitter to their vehicle when a recognized transmitter is not available 2 Place the new unrecognized transmitter into the transmitter pocket with the transmitter buttons facing the front of the vehicle The transmitter pocket is inside the center console storage area located between the driver and front passenger seats 3 Insert the vehicle key into the key lock cylinder located on the driver s door 11 12 13 Turn the key to the unlock position five times within five seconds The DIC message will display OFF ACC TO LEARN Press the Acc button ignition switch The DIC will read WAIT 10 MINUTES and will count down to zero one minute at a time The DIC will display OFF ACC TO LEARN again Press the Acc button ig
471. the dark trunk release handle located inside the trunk near the back of the rear seats This handle will glow following exposure to light Pull down the release handle to open the trunk from the inside of the vehicle Windows ACAUTION Leaving children helpless adults or pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Never leave a child a helpless adult or a pet alone in a vehicle especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather 2 19 Power Windows A CAUTION Leaving children helpless adults or pets ina vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous They can be overcome from extreme heat in warm or hot weather and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition The power window switches are located on the armrest key is dangerous for many reasons children or near each window Press the front of the switch others could be badly injured or even killed to the first position to open the window to the desired They could operate the power windows or level Lift up the front of the switch to the first position other controls or even make the vehicle move to close the window The windows will function with the keys in the Your vehicle has Retained Accessory Power RAP that ignition and they could be seriously injured or allows you to use the
472. the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle by pressing the F6 BACK button located on the radio to return to the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU REMOTE RECALL MEMORY lf your vehicle has the optional memory package you will have this feature When this feature is turned on you can recall any previously programmed seat position and mirror position when the unlock button on the keyless access transmitter is pressed Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF default The exception to the default is the recall seat to driver position which is on To program the vehicle to a different mode 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until REMOTE RECALL MEMORY is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name If this feature is selected START BUTTON RECALL cannot be selected The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle START BUTTON RECALL If your vehicle has the optional memory package you will have this feature When this feature is turned on you can recall any previously programm
473. the vehicle is in cruise control when Enhanced StabiliTrak activates the cruise control will automatically disengage When road conditions allow you to safely use it again you may re engage the cruise control See Cruise Control on page 3 17 or Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3 20 for more information Enhanced StabiliTrak comes on automatically in the Stability Touring Mode when the vehicle is started The Stability Touring Mode is recommended for normal driving Enhanced StabiliTrak also has Stability Competitive Mode that is turned on by pressing the Traction Control TC Button See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 6 This mode is designed to be used by the performance conscious driver who desires less stabilty control intervention See Competitive Driving Mode STS V on page 4 7 When the Stability Control Competitive Mode has been activated traction control operates in competitive mode and cannot be turned off The STABILITY COMPETITIVE MODE message will be displayed on the DIC See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 80 When operating your vehicle in the Stability Competitive Mode the system provides less stability control intervention Driving should be adjusted accordingly When the stability control Stability Competitive Mode has been selected the Active Steering and Magnetic Ride Control Touring Mode is not available These systems are automatically changed to the Performance Mode providing more response to ro
474. tion and Rotation 1 5 73 When It Is Time for New Tires ee 5 75 Buying New These ude rer 5 76 Different Size Tires and Wheels 5 78 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ceeeeeeeees 5 79 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance 5 80 Wheel Replacement 0 ecceeeeeeeeeeerenees 5 80 Tite Chains scsi ore ennen 5 82 Lifting Your Vehicle STS V c eeeeeeeeee ees 5 83 Ifa Tire Gogs Flat esccscece cs ccccttesenganieiediens cakes 5 86 Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit 0006 5 87 Changing a Flat Tire 0 cceeeeeeeeeee erence eens 5 96 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 5 98 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire ipine ti siniraan asn 5 99 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools 5 104 Compact Spare Tire ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 106 Appearance Care l 5 107 Interior Cleaning 2 0 0 ceeeeeeeeenee eee eeeeeneeeeeees 5 107 Fabric Canpet siiin innia cnn ganencaneds 5 108 Leather arlet dense dolkede 5 109 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plasti Surfaces a 424cnndintecilisvicia hws 5 109 Wood Panels na rn ned nens 5 110 5 2 Service and Appearance Care Speaker Covers cceceeeceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeenees 5 110 Care of Safety Belts cc ceeeeeeeee eee eeee ees 5 110 WeatherstripS 0 cceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 110 Washing Your Vehicle eeeee
475. tires space saver or temporary use spare tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches 25 to 30 cm or to some limited production tires While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria TPC standards Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 5 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Warning The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 5 79 T
476. trailer brakes are still working Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns 4 38 Passing You will need more passing distance up ahead when you are towing a trailer And because the vehicle is a good deal longer you will need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Then to move the trailer to the left just move that hand to the left To move the trailer to the right move your hand to the right Always back up slowly and if possible have someone guide you Making Turns Notice Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering When you are turning with a trailer make wider turns than normal Do this so your trailer will not strike soft shoulders curbs road signs trees or other objects Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers Signal well in advance Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer When you tow a trailer your vehicle may need a different turn signal flasher and or extra wiring Check with your dealer retailer The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change Properly hooked up
477. trucks and multipurpose vehicles Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 66 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4 26 Radial Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Rim A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead 5 64 Speed Rating An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate Traction The friction between the tire and the road surface The amount of grip provided Tread The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road Treadwear Indicators Narrow bands sometimes called wear bars that show across the tread of a tire when only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm of tread remains See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5 75 UTQGS Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire s traction temperature and treadwear Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire See Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5 79 Vehicle Capacity Weight The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 Ibs 68 kg plus the rate
478. tter is used to unlock following the instructions listed previously under the vehicle All doors must be closed for this feature to Entering the Personal Settings Menu work and the lamps will not flash if the parking 2 Turn the tune select knob until LIGHTS FLASH AT lamps or headlamps are on UNLOCK is highlighted If LIGHTS FLASH AT UNLOCK is turned on and either 3 Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth KEYLESS FT DOOR UNLOCK or KEYLESS DOORS between on and off UNLOCK is turned on the exterior lamps will flash when the doors are passively unlocked See KEYLESS FT Front DOOR UNLOCK and KEYLESS DOORS UNLOCK later in this section for more information The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available Mode 1 ON default on your vehicle Mode 2 OFF When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name Programmable Modes 2 67 LIGHTS FLASH AT LOCK This feature allows the exterior lamps to flash once when the keyless access transmitter is used to lock the vehicle All doors must be closed for this feature to work and the lamps will not flash if the parking lamps or headlamps are on If LIGHTS FLASH AT LOCK is turned on and either KEYLESS FT DOOR UNLOCK or KEYLESS DOORS UNLOCK is turned on the exterior lamps will flash when the doors are passively unlocked
479. ture See MPH km later in this section for more information on the digital speed display AB 7X 00 Trip Information Press the top of this button to scroll through the odometer trip odometer A and trip odometer B Press and hold the bottom of this button to reset each trip odometer back to zero i Reset Press this button to reset certain DIC features and to acknowledge DIC warning messages and clear them from the DIC display EM English Metric Press this button to change the display from English to metric 3 75 DIC Buttons Uplevel If your vehicle has a HUD these are the buttons for the DIC EH E amp ATV Information Press the top or bottom of this button to scroll through the available vehicle information displays which include digital speed display if your vehicle has this feature fuel range fuel economy fuel used average speed timer battery voltage tire pressure engine oil life if your vehicle has this feature and display units See MPH km later in this section for more information on the digital speed display 3 76 A Gv Head Up Display Press this button to change the position of the HUD on the windshield Press the top part of the button to move the HUD image up Press the bottom part of the button to move the HUD image down To adjust the brightness of the HUD image see Head Up Display HUD on page 3 43 For information on adjusting the instrument panel brig
480. ture 1 a 3 121 Tire Pressure Light ertesi fordi eiaei neseno 3 67 Audio Steering Wheel Controls 3 124 Malfunction Indicator Lamp eeeeeee 3 68 Radio eein ae a acd 3 123 A TA P SAN esa au Backolaes Anteniiah ssccccecsactnccarsetWiadacceacaeian 3 124 Fog Lamp Light EE S72 XMIM Satelite Radio Antenna System 3 124 Lights On Reminder eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 3 72 NOTES 3 3 Instrument Panel Overview The main components of your instrument panel are the following A B Air Outlets See Outlet Adjustment on page 3 54 Instrument Panel Brightness Control See nstrument Panel Brightness on page 3 41 Driver Information Center DIC Buttons See DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 74 HUD Controls If Equipped See Head Up Display HUD on page 3 43 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever See Turn Signal Multifunction Lever on page 3 8 Headlamp Controls See Headlamps on page 3 33 Cruise Control See Cruise Control on page 3 17 Adaptive Cruise Control If Equipped See Adaptive Cruise Control on page 3 20 Forward Collision Alert FCA If Equipped See Forward Collision Alert FCA System on page 3 10 Instrument Panel Cluster See Instrument Panel Cluster on page 3 58 Windshield Wiper Washer Lever See Windshield Wipers on page 3 14 Audio System See Audio System s on page 3 98 Navigation Radio System If Equipped See Navigation Radio
481. ture name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle DOORS UNLOCK AT OFF This feature allows all of the doors to automatically unlock when the ignition is turned off Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF default To program the vehicle to a different mode 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until DOORS UNLOCK AT OFF is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switch between on and off When the mode is turned on a check mark will appear next to the feature name The mode you selected is now set You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle 2 71 DRIVER UNLOCK IN PARK The feature allows the driver s door to automatically unlock when the transmission is shifted into PARK P Programmable Modes Mode 1 ON Mode 2 OFF default To program the vehicle to a different mode 1 Enter the PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU by following the instructions listed previously under Entering the Personal Settings Menu 2 Turn the tune select knob until DRIVER UNLOCK IN PARK is highlighted 3 Press the tune select knob to switch back and forth between on and
482. u do not feel your concerns have been addressed after the following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware of its participation in a no charge mediation Arbitration program General Motors of Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving factory related vehicle service claims The program provides for the review of the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter The program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement process from the time you file your complaint to the final decision should be completed in approximately 70 days We believe our impartial program offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal quick and free of charge For further information concerning eligibility in the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP call toll free 1 800 207 0685 Alternatively you may call the General Motors Customer Communication Centre 1 800 263 3777 English 1 800 263 7854 French or you may write to the Mediation Arbitration Program at the following address Your inquiry should be accompanied by your Vehicle Identification Number VIN Mediation Arbitration Program c o Customer Communication Centre General Motors of Canada Limited Mail Code CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Online Owner Center
483. uch as the radio and air conditioner 3 63 Brake System Warning Lig ht When the ignition is on the brake system warning light will also come on when you set your parking brake Your vehicle s hydraulic brake system is divided into The light will stay on if your parking brake does two parts If one part isn t working the other part can not release fully If it stays on after your parking brake still work and stop you For good braking though is fully released it means you have a brake problem you need both parts working well If the light comes on while you are driving pull off If the warning light comes on there is a brake problem the road and stop carefully You may notice that the Have your brake system inspected right away pedal is harder to push or the pedal may go closer to the floor It may take longer to stop If the light is still on have the vehicle towed for service See Towing Your Vehicle on page 4 31 we O Your brake system may not be working United States Canada properly if the brake system warning light is on Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident If the light is still on after you have pulled off the road and stopped carefully have the vehicle towed for service This light should come on briefly when you turn the engine on If it does not come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem 3 64 Antilock Brake System Warning Li
484. uld be badly burned Stop your engine if it overheats and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5 31 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency 5 30 Notice If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant your vehicle can be badly damaged The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5 31 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine An overheat warning can indicate a serious problem If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no steam the problem might not be too serious Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you Climb a long hill on a hot day Stop after high speed driving e Idle for long periods in traffic Tow a trailer If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam try this for a minute or so 1 In heavy traffic let the engine idle in NEUTRAL N while stopped If it is safe to do so pull off the road shift to PARK P or NEUTRAL N and let the engine idle 2 Set the climate controls to the highest heat setting and fan speed and open the windows as necessary If the coolant warning light is not on or the coolant temperature gage does not indicate the engine is overheating you can drive Just to be safe drive slower for about 10 minut
485. une to another station If this station was one of the presets choose another station for that preset button No Artist Info No artist information is available at this time on this channel The system is working properly 3 116 No Title Info No song title information is available at this time on this channel The system is working properly No CAT Info No category information is available at this time on this channel The system is working properly No Information No text or informational messages are available at this time on this channel The system is working properly CAT Not Found There are no channels available for the selected category The system is working properly XM Theftlocked The XM receiver in your vehicle could have previously been in another vehicle For security purposes XM receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles If this message is received after having your vehicle serviced check with your dealer retailer XM Radio ID If tuned to channel 0 this message alternates with the XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label This label is needed to activate the service Unknown If this message is received when tuned to channel 0 there could be a receiver fault Consult with your dealer retailer Check XM Receivr If this message does not clear within a short period of time the receiver could have a fault Consult with your dealer retailer Navigation Radio System Your vehicle may have a navig
486. ur dealer retailer first Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage would not be covered by your warranty Some add on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should Add on equipment can drain your vehicle s battery even if your vehicle is not operating Your vehicle has an airbag system Before attempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle see Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 64 Headlamp Wiring The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses in the fuse block An electrical overload will cause the lamps to turn off If this happens have your headlamp wiring checked right away Windshield Wiper Fuses The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal circuit breaker If the wiper motor overheats due to heavy snow the wipers will stop until the motor cools and will then restart Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power windows and other power accessories When the current load is too heavy the circuit breaker opens and closes protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses circuit breakers and fusible thermal links This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems Look at the silver colored band inside the fuse If the band is brok
487. ur vehicle s systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory Power RAP With RAP the audio system can be played even after the ignition is turned off See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 29 for more information Setting the Time 1 Press the tune select knob the passenger side knob to enter the main menu Turn the same knob until SET CLOCK displays Press this knob to select SET CLOCK Turn this knob to adjust the time Press the same knob to update the time VEHICLE TIME UPDATED displays lf the CLOCK RADIO DISP display is programmed into one of the configurable keys pressing the key switches the display back to the clock set function g e wY The time and date always appears on the radio display See Configurable Radio Display Keys later in this section for more information on configuring the keys Setting the Date 1 Press the knob the passenger side knob to enter the main menu Turn the same knob until SET DATE displays Press this knob to select SET DATE Turn this knob to adjust the date Press the same knob to update the time VEHICLE DATE UPDATED displays If the DATE is programmed into one of the configurable keys pressing the key switches the display back to the date set function The time and date always appears on the radio display See Configurable Radio Display Keys later in this
488. ur vehicle s painted surfaces the paint finish can be damaged Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle If you do wash it off immediately See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 110 Brake Wear Your vehicle has disc brakes Disc brake pads have built in wear indicators that make a high pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed The sound can come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly ACAUTION The brake wear warning sound means that soon the brakes will not work well That could lead to an accident When you hear the brake wear warning sound have your vehicle serviced Notice Continuing to drive with worn out brake pads could result in costly brake repair Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation When tires are rotated inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to torque specifications in Capacities and Specifications on page 5 128 Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer retailer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel This could be a sign that
489. ur vehicle does need to be towed out see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4 31 4 26 Loading Your Vehicle It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can carry This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants cargo and all nonfactory installed options Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certification label A CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle Tire and Loading Information Label SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Example Label A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the vehicle s center pillar B pillar With the driver s door open you will find the label attached below the door lock post striker The Tire and Loading Information label shows the number of occupant seating positions A and the maximum vehicle capacity weight B in kilograms and pounds The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the tire size of the original equipment tires C and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures D For m
490. ut a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys ACAUTION A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger s frontal airbag if the system detects a rear facing child restraint no system is fail safe and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off We recommend that rear facing child restraints be secured in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 60 for additional information 1 47 If your child restraint has the LATCH system see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 37 for how to install your child restraint using LATCH If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt and it uses a top tether see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 37 for top tether anchor locations Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether
491. ut first pushing the button on the shift lever If you can it means that the shift lever was not fully locked into PARK P Torque Lock If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your transmission into PARK P properly the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK P This is called torque lock To prevent torque lock set the parking brake and then shift into PARK P properly before you leave the driver s seat To find out how see Shifting Into PARK P listed previously If torque lock does occur you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK P Shifting Out of PARK P This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock release system The shift lock release is designed to Prevent shifting out of PARK P unless the vehicle is running or in Accessory mode and the regular brake pedal is applied The shift lock release is always functional except in the case of an uncharged or low voltage less than 9 volt battery If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with low voltage try charging or jump starting the battery See Jump Starting on page 5 45 To shift out of PARK P use the following 1 Apply the brake pedal 2 Then press the shift le
492. ve good traction However if there is snow or ice between the tires and the road you can have a very slippery situation You have a lot less traction or grip and need to be very careful 4 22 What is the worst time for this Wet ice Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on But wet ice can be even more trouble because it can offer the least traction of all You can get wet ice when it is about freezing 32 F 0 C and freezing rain begins to fall Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there Whatever the condition smooth ice packed blowing or loose snow drive with caution The Traction Control System TCS improves your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road Even though you have TCS slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions Under certain conditions you might want to turn the TCS off such as when driving through deep snow and loose gravel to help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 6 StabiliTrak System on page 4 8 or Enhanced StabiliTrak on page 4 9 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4 26 and Winter Tires under Tires on page 5 57 The Antilock Brake System ABS improves your vehicle s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road Even though you have ABS begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement See Antilock Brake System ABS on page 4 5 A
493. ve to wear Safety belts Airbags are supplemental systems only so they work with safety belts not instead of them Whether or not an airbag is provided all occupants still have to buckle up to get the most protection That is true not only in frontal collisions but especially in side and other collisions Q If am a good driver and I never drive far from A home why should wear safety belts You may be an excellent driver but if you are ina crash even one that is not your fault you and your passenger s can be hurt Being a good driver does not protect you from things beyond your control such as bad drivers Most accidents occur within 25 miles 40 km of home And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph 65 km h Safety belts are for everyone How to Wear Safety Belts Properly This section is only for people of adult size Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children And there are different rules for smaller children and babies If a child will be riding in your vehicle see Older Children on page 1 28 or Infants and Young Children on page 1 30 Follow those rules for everyone s protection It is very important for all occupants to buckle up Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of the vehicle
494. vehicle Notice If you ever lose your transmitter s and or key it could be difficult to get into your vehicle You may even have to damage your vehicle to get in Be sure you have a spare transmitter and or key In an emergency contact Cadillac Roadside Assistance See Roadside Service on page 7 6 Keyless Access System Your vehicle has a Keyless Access System that operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment If you ever notice a decrease in the keyless access transmitter range try doing one of the following Check the distance You may be too far from your vehicle You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather Check the location Other vehicles or objects m
495. vehicle s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often Notice Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can damage the emblems or nameplates on your vehicle Check the cleaning product label If it states that is should not be used on plastic parts do not use it on your vehicle or damage may occur and it would not be covered by the warranty Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight Use a car washing soap Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives as they can damage the paint metal or plastic on your vehicle Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer retailer See Vehicle Care Appearance Materials on page 5 115 Follow all manufacturers directions regarding correct product usage necessary safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any vehicle care product Rinse the vehicle well before washing and after to remove all cleaning agents completely If they are allowed to dry on the surface they could stain Dry the finish with a soft clean chamois or an all cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the vehicle Avoid using high pressure washes closer than 12 inches 30 cm to the surface of the vehicle Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses Use only lukewarm or cold water a soft cloth and a
496. vehicle and the trailer can be damaged But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill here is how to do it 1 Apply your regular brakes but do not shift into PARK P yet 2 Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels 4 39 3 When the wheel chocks are in place release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load 4 Reapply the regular brakes Then apply your parking brake and then shift to PARK P 5 Release the regular brakes When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on a Hill 1 Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you Start your engine Shift into a gear Release the parking brake 2 Let up on the brake pedal 3 Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks 4 Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks 4 40 Maintenance When Trailer Towing Your vehicle will need service more often when you re pulling a trailer See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid don t overfill engine oil drive belt cooling system and brake system Each of these is covered in this manual and the Index will help you find them quickly If you re trailering it s a good idea to review this information before you start your trip Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing Your cooling system may temp
497. ver button 3 Move the shift lever to the desired position If you still are unable to shift out of PARK P 1 Fully release the shift lever button 2 While holding down the brake pedal press the shift lever button again 3 Move the shift lever to the desired position If you still cannot move the shift lever from PARK P consult your dealer retailer or a professional towing service 2 37 Parking Over Things That Burn Engine Exhaust A CAUTION A CAUTION Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust Engine exhaust can kill It contains the gas parts under your vehicle and ignite Do not carbon monoxide CO which you cannot see or park over papers leaves dry grass or other smell It can cause unconsciousness and death things that can burn You might have exhaust coming in if The exhaust system sounds strange or different Your vehicle gets rusty underneath Your vehicle was damaged in a collision Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris Repairs were not done correctly Your vehicle or the exhaust system has been modified improperly If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out any CO and Have your vehicle fixed immediately 2 38 Running the Engine While Parked It is better not to park with the engine running But if you ever have to here are some things to know ACAUTION
498. volves time sensitive actions so read the entire procedure before you begin If you do not follow these actions the device will time out and you will have to repeat the procedure To program up to three devices 2 Locate in the garage the garage door opener receiver motor head unit Locate the Learn or Smart button It can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor head unit and may be a colored button Press this button After you press this button you will have 30 seconds to complete the following steps 3 Immediately return to your vehicle Press and hold the Universal Home Remote button that you would like to use to control the garage door until the garage door moves The indicator light above the selected button should slowly blink You may need to hold the button from five to 20 seconds 1 From inside the vehicle press the two outside buttons at the same time for one to two seconds and immediately release them 2 53 4 Immediately within one second release the button when the garage door moves The indicator light will blink rapidly until programming is complete 5 Press and release the same button again The garage door should move confirming that programming is successful and complete To program another Rolling Code device such as an additional garage door opener a security device or home automation device repeat Steps 1 5 choosing a different function
499. wheel spin You may feel or hear the system working but this is normal This warning light will come on to let you know if there is a problem with your traction control system See Traction Control System TCS Warning Light on page 3 65 When this warning light is on the system will not limit wheel spin Adjust your driving accordingly The Traction Control System TCS automatically comes on whenever you start your vehicle To limit wheel spin especially in slippery road conditions you should always leave the system on But you can turn the TCS off if you ever need to Notice Do not repeatedly brake or accelerate heavily when the TCS is off You could damage your vehicle s driveline When the TCS is switched off on AWD and STS V vehicles you may still feel the system working This is normal and necessary with the hardware on your vehicle You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is required See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4 26 and If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 4 25 for more information See also Winter Driving on page 4 22 for information on using TCS when driving in snowy or icy conditions To turn the system off press the TC traction control button located near the shift lever TC If your All Wheel Drive vehicle has the optional enhanced vehicle stability control system called Active Steeri
500. wo cupholders in the center console area Center Console Storage Your vehicle has a center console storage area located between the front seats It includes storage areas and accessory power outlet s on the rear of the console Convenience Net Your vehicle may have a convenience net in the rear of the vehicle Put small loads behind the net The net is not for heavier loads Store them as far forward as you can 2 58 Sunroof If your vehicle has a power sunroof the switches are located on the overhead console To open or close the sunroof the ignition must be on or Retained Accessory Power RAP must be active See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 29 Express Open The express open feature will operate from the closed or partially open position To express open the power sunroof fully press the driver s side switch rearward once To stop the sunroof glass in a desired position other than to the express open position press the switch again in either direction to stop the movement If the sunshade is in the closed position it will open with the sunroof or it can be opened manually Vent Open To open the power sunroof to the vent position from the closed position press and hold the passenger s side sunroof switch forward The rear of the sunroof panel will tilt upward to the full vent position The sunshade must be opened manually Express Close The express close feature will operate from the ope
501. y fit poorly exhibit premature durability corrosion problems and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty and any vehicle failure related to such parts are not covered by that warranty Repair Facility GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair facility that meets your needs before you ever need collision repairs Your GM dealer retailer may have a collision repair center with GM trained technicians and state of the art equipment or be able to recommend a collision repair center that has GM trained technicians and comparable equipment Insuring Your Vehicle Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with comprehensive and collision insurance coverage There are significant differences in the quality of coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs by using aftermarket collision parts Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts When purchasing insurance we recommend that you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original equipment collision parts If such insurance coverage is not available from your current insurance carrier consider switching to another insurance carrier If your vehicle is leased the leasing company may require you to have insurance that assures repairs with Ge
502. y press the set decrease button Each this is done your set speed will be 1 mph 1 6 km h slower Resuming a Set Speed If you apply the brakes while the Adaptive Cruise Control is at a set speed this disengages the Adaptive Cruise Control But it does not need to be reset Once the vehicle reaches about 30 mph 48 km h or more move the Adaptive Cruise Control switch briefly from on to resume increase Adaptive Cruise Control will be engaged with the speed previously selected Selecting the Follow Distance GAP When the system detects a slower moving vehicle it will adjust your vehicle s speed and maintain the following distance gap selected Use the GAP button on the steering wheel to adjust the follow distance between your vehicle SRCE and other vehicle s Press the top of the button to increase the distance or the bottom of the button to decrease the distance The first button press shows the current follow distance setting on the HUD The current following distance setting is maintained until it is changed There are six follow distances to choose from The follow distance selection ranges from near to far one second to two seconds follow time The distance maintained for a selected follow distance varies based on vehicle speed The faster the vehicle speed the further back you will follow Consider traffic and weather conditions when selecting the follow distance The range of selectable distances may not
503. y satisfied with your new vehicle However if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two you should file with the Better Business Bureau BBB Auto Line Program to enforce your rights The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days If you do not agree with the decision given in your case you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the toll free telephone number or write them at the following address BBB Auto Line Program Council of Better Business Bureaus Inc 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington VA 22203 1838 Telephone 1 800 955 5100 This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia Eligibility is limited by vehicle age mileage and other factors General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and or discontinue its participation in this program STEP THREE Canadian Owners General Motors Participation in the Mediation Arbitration Program In the event that yo
504. your set speed If your vehicle is in Adaptive Cruise Control when the traction control system begins to limit wheel spin the Adaptive Cruise Control will automatically disengage See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 6 StabiliTrak System on page 4 8 or Enhanced StabiliTrak on page 4 9 When road conditions allow you to safely use it again you can turn the Adaptive Cruise Control back on 3 23 Increasing Set Speed While Using Adaptive Cruise Control There are two ways to increase the set speed Use the accelerator to get to the higher speed Press the set button at the end of the lever then release the button and the accelerator pedal You will now cruise at the higher speed Move the Adaptive Cruise Control switch from on to resume increase Hold it there until the desired set speed is displayed in the HUD then release the switch To increase your set speed in very small amounts move the switch briefly to resume increase Each time this is done your vehicle set speed increases by about 1 mph 1 6 km h Your vehicle will not reach the set speed until the system determines there is no vehicle in front of you At that point your vehicle speed will increase to the set speed 3 24 Decreasing Set Speed While Using Adaptive Cruise Control Press in the set decrease button on the end of the lever until you reach the lower desired speed then release the button To slow down in very small amounts briefl

Cadillac 2007 DTS Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents